Clarion Max983Hd Users Manual NAVI ENG

MAX983HD MAX983HD-NAVI-ENG,13

MAX983HD to the manual a8809d4d-5e69-4e3e-9d05-88d3dbf230e0

2015-02-02

: Clarion Clarion-Max983Hd-Users-Manual-411173 clarion-max983hd-users-manual-411173 clarion pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 187 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner’s manual (Navigation)

Mode d’emploi (Navigation)

Benutzerhandbuch (Navigation)

Manuale dell’utente (Navigazione)

Gebruikershandleiding (Navigatie)

Guía de usuario (Navegación)

Ägarhandbok (Navigation)

Manual do utilizador (Navegação)

Brugervejledning (Navigation)

HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIESYSTEEM

SISTEMA DE NAVEGACIÓN HDD

NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED HÅRDDISK

SISTEMA DE NAVEGAÇÃO COM HDD

(UNIDADE DE DISCO RÍGIDO)

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

QY-5003E-B

2008/5(Y-YI)

MAX983HD

Clarion Co., Ltd.

Printed in Hungary / Imprimé en Hongrie / Gedruckt in Ungarn /

Stampato in Ungheria / Gedrukt in Hongrarije / Impreso en Hungría /

Tryckt i Ungern / Impresso na Hungria / Trykt i Ungarn

MAX983HD

English

1. Preface

Safety Precautions

When using this navigation system, follow the precautions listed below. After reading this manual, be

sure to keep it in a handy place (such as the glove box of your car).

CAUTION

Cautions

•While driving, set the volume so that sound

from outside the vehicle can be heard.

Driving without hearing sound from the

outside of the vehicle may cause a traffic

incident.

Warnings

•This navigation system should not be used as a substitute for your own judgment. Any route

suggestions made by this navigation system may never override any local traffic regulations,

your own judgment, and/or knowledge of safe driving practices. Disregard route suggestions

by the navigation system if such suggestions would: cause you to perform a hazardous or

illegal maneuver, place you in a hazardous situation, or route you into an area you consider

unsafe.

•The advice provided by the navigation system is to be regarded only as a suggestion(s)/

There may be situations where the navigation system displays the vehicle’s location

incorrectly, fails to suggest the shortest course, and/or fails to direct you to your desired

destination. In such situations, rely on your own driving judgment, taking into account

current driving conditions.

•Do not use the navigation system to route you to emergency services. The database does

not contain a complete listing of locations of emergency service providers such as police,

fire stations, hospitals and clinics. Please use your judgment and your ability to ask for

directions in these situations.

•As a driver you are solely responsible for your road safety.

•In order to avoid a traffic accident or traffic offence, remember that actual road conditions

and traffic regulations take precedence over the information contained in the navigation

system.

•Accordingly, the software may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the

passage of time, changing circumstances, and due to the nature of the sources used.

Please observe the actual traffic circumstances and regulations at all times while driving.

•The navigation system does not provide, or account for in any way; information regarding

traffic and road laws; vehicle specifications including weight, height, width, load, and/or

speed restrictions; road conditions including road slope, grade, and/or surface

conditions; obstruction information including bridge and tunnel height and width, and/or

other prevailing driving and/or road conditions. Always rely on your own driving

judgment, taking into account current driving conditions.

•Minimize the amount of time spent viewing the screen while driving.

•The driver should not operate this unit while driving.

Be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place when the driver is operating this unit. For safety,

some of the navigation functions are prohibited if the vehicle is not stopped with the parking

brake engaged.

4MAX983HD

English

About This Manual

The following two manuals are provided to this system:

●Owner’s Manual (Audio, Visual, General & Installation)

This manual (hereinafter referred to as “Audio Manual”) explains the functions and operation procedures

of the AV features. In addition, the general precautions and other information on using this system are

also explained in this manual.

●Owner’s Manual (Navigation) (This Book)

This manual (hereinafter referred to as “Navigation Manual”) explains the functions and operation

procedures of the navigation features.

Note:

•This manual is described on the assumption that the default Skin data has been applied. When the other Skin

data is applied, the screen design and shapes of icons will be different from the contents listed in this manual.

•Please be aware that the device may be different from the manual according to the changes of the

specifications.

Symbols used in this manual

Notes on Handling

• In no event shall Clarion be liable for any incidental damage (including, but not limited to, loss of the

business profit or change/loss of the data) caused from use or inability to use of this product.

Note:

•When using this unit first time after purchasing, or not used for long periods of time, it might take about 5 to

15 minutes until the current location is determined using GPS. Moreover, even when using it often, it may take

about 2 to 3 minutes until the current location is determined according to the GPS measuring situation.

•Provided RDS TMC information about traffic incidents may not be up to date. Use the provided RDS TMC

information as a reference only.

•When the route (path) cannot be calculated, move desired destination to a nearby main road and perform

calculation again. It may be impossible to find a route in case the car location is too close to the desired

destination.

Note: : Lists what should be noted when operating or referential information.

[ ] button : Indicates a button on this unit.

[ ] key : Indicates a menu item on the screen.

➜: Indicates a title and page number on which recommended reference information is

described.

MAX983HD

English

Contents

1. Preface .......................................................................................................................... 3

Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................... 3

About This Manual ......................................................................................................... 4

Notes on Handling.......................................................................................................... 4

Contents ......................................................................................................................... 5

2. Basic Operations.......................................................................................................... 6

Switching the Operation Mode ....................................................................................... 6

Menu Types and Operation............................................................................................ 6

Map Screen Features................................................................................................... 10

Manipulating the Map Screen....................................................................................... 16

Outline of Destination Entering Procedures ................................................................. 19

3. Entering the Destination............................................................................................ 22

Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu............................................... 22

Searching Your Destination from the Map Screen ....................................................... 26

Searching for POI Using the Quick POI Function......................................................... 26

Searching Your Destination from the Favourite/Frequent List...................................... 27

Setting the Destination and Starting the Route Guidance............................................ 28

4. Route Guidance.......................................................................................................... 30

Route Guidance Screen Features................................................................................ 30

About the Voice Guidance............................................................................................ 32

Changing/Editing the Route Settings ........................................................................... 32

Notes on the Route Guidance ...................................................................................... 36

Notes on the Voice Guidance....................................................................................... 37

5. Traffic Information...................................................................................................... 38

Displaying the Traffic Information................................................................................. 38

Notes on the Traffic Information ................................................................................... 41

6. System Settings ......................................................................................................... 42

General Settings........................................................................................................... 43

Navigation Settings ...................................................................................................... 44

Audio Settings .............................................................................................................. 48

Adjusting the Monitor.................................................................................................... 48

User Settings................................................................................................................ 48

Registering/Editing the Data......................................................................................... 49

Importing Data Using the SD Card............................................................................... 51

Service Options............................................................................................................ 52

Setting Safety Camera ................................................................................................. 53

7. Favourite/Frequent List Operations.......................................................................... 54

What is Favourite/Frequent List?.................................................................................. 54

Using Favourite/Frequent List ...................................................................................... 54

8. Voice Command Operations ..................................................................................... 57

Voice Command Features............................................................................................ 57

List of the Voice Commands (Navigation Features)..................................................... 59

Notes on the Voice Command Operations................................................................... 61

9. Others.......................................................................................................................... 62

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 62

Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 62

About the Positioning Error .......................................................................................... 63

6MAX983HD

English

2. Basic Operations

See the Audio Manual for the procedure to turn the power on/off and the details of controls on the

Operation Panel.

Switching the Operation Mode

To switch between the Navigation screen and Audio screen, press the [ NAVI] (Navi/AV) button.

Menu Types and Operation

This section explains the types of the typical menu screens on the touch panel and their operation.

Destination menu

Pressing the [MENU] button displays the Destination menu screen. By touching the desired menu item,

you can display menu screens and perform operations of entering a destination.

Touching the menu item on the lower part of the screen displays each menu screen.

For the entering procedure of the destination, see “Outline of Destination Entering Procedures”

(P. 19), and “3. Entering the Destination” (P. 22).

1 [] key

Displays the Favourite list menu screen.

➜ “Favourite/Frequent menu” (P. 7), “7.

Favourite/Frequent List Operations” (P. 54)

2 [Music Search] key

Displays the Music Search menu screen.

➜ “Music Catcher Operations” (Audio Manual)

3 [Telephone] key

Displays the Telephone menu screen.

➜ “Telephone Operations” (Audio Manual)

4 [Back] key

Returns to the previous screen.

5 [Cancel Route] key

Terminates the route guidance during the route

guidance mode.

➜ “Cancelling the route guidance” (P. 33)

1 2 3

Menu Types and Operation

MAX983HD

English

Favourite/Frequent menu

Touching the [ ] key in the Destination menu or in the Navi Shortcut menu displays the Favourite list

menu screen.

Your favourite places can be registered in the Favourite list, and places often visited are automatically

registered in the Frequent list.

From the 3D List screen of the Favourite/Frequent list menu, you can enter a destination by an easy

operation. From the 2D List screen, you can edit the list items by drag-and-drop operations.

For details, see “7. Favourite/Frequent List Operations” (P. 54).

Menu Types and Operation

8MAX983HD

English

Navi Shortcut menu

Touching the [NAVI] key from the Current Location Map screen displays the Navi Shortcut menu on top

of the Map screen. Operate by touching the desired menu items or icons.

[ ] key:

Displays the Favourite list menu screen.

[Dest] key:

Displays the Destination menu screen of the

navigation system.

[Route] key:

Displays the Route menu screen.

[Quick POI] key:

Displays the Quick POI screen for searching

nearby POI or POI on the route with five

categories. You can customise the categories by

touching the [Setting] key on the Quick POI

screen. The five categories can also be

customised from the Setting menu. ➜ “Quick

POI Settings” (P. 46)

[ ] key:

Repeats the current voice guidance.

[ ] key:

Hides the Navi Shortcut menu.

Menu Types and Operation

MAX983HD

English

Location menu (Menu on scrolled map)

After scrolling the map by touching the Map screen, touch the [OK] key on the screen to display the

Location menu at the left side of the screen. You can set the location under the cursor at the centre of

the screen as the destination or store it to the Address Book.

[Back] key:

Returns to the scrolled Map screen before

touching the [OK] key.

[New Dest] key:

Sets the location under the cursor as the

destination. When a destination is already set,

the old destination is cancelled as soon as the

new destination is set.

[Add to Route] key:

When another location is already set as the

destination, you can set the location under the

cursor as a waypoint. Touching this key displays

the Edit Route screen. Specify the desired order

of passing to set the location as a waypoint. ➜

“Editing the route” (P. 33)

[Nearby POI] key:

Displays the Category screen of the POIs in the

vicinity of the location under the cursor.

[Store Location] key:

Registers the location under the cursor in the

Address Book.

[Delete] key:

When the cursor points at a stored location,

pressing this key deletes this location from the

Address Book.

10 MAX983HD

English

Map Screen Features

Types of the map

There are two types of map: the 2D map and the 3D map. Such as the method of scrolling the map,

some operation are different depending on the map types. Moreover, you can display two types of maps

at the same time on the divided screen, and can change the map orientation. Change the map

appearance according to your preferences. ➜ “Scrolling the Map” (P. 16), “Changing the map

appearance” (P. 16)

●2D Map

The 2D map is a map screen represented to the

plane just like the map of atlases. It is suitable for

searching a destination and confirming the road

or route.

●3D Map

The 3D map is a map screen using a viewing

position above the vehicle while looking in the

direction of the car heading. It is suitable for

understanding the image of the direction,

because the perspective of the travelling

direction can be adjusted as required.

Map Screen Features

MAX983HD

English

Indicators on the map

Indicators displayed on the Map screen are different according to the conditions at that time. This section

explains the main indicators displayed on the Map screen.

Indicators on the map of the current location

1 AV Shortcut key

Displays the AV Shortcut menu.

Letters displayed on the key vary to indicate the

current mode of the AV feature.

2 Current street name

Shows the name of the current street.

3 Vehicle mark

Indicates the current location and direction of

your vehicle. You can change this mark. ➜

“Vehicle Icon” (P. 45)

4 Clock

Displays the current time.

5 [NAVI] key

Displays the Navi Shortcut menu.

6 Speed Limit Icon

Generally the icon shows the speed limit of the

current main road where a speed data is supplied

by a map database.When a speed data was

changed, the numerals on the icon are changed

and the indication blinks for a few seconds. ➜

“

Changing the map appearance

” (P. 16)

7 [View] key

Touch this for changing the appearance of the

map.

➜

“

Changing the map appearance

” (P. 16)

8 Map scale

Indicates the scale of the map currently

displayed.

9 Map bearing mark/GPS receiving

status

Indicates the map orientation. You can switch the

map orientation between Heading Up and North

Up by touching this icon. ➜ “Changing the map

appearance” (P. 16)

In addition, the receiving status of the GPS signal

is indicated by coloured three dots under the

bearing mark.

Blue:

Receiving in 3D

Yellow:

Receiving in 2D

Grey:

No signal received

0 TMC indicator

The TMC indicator turns to green and the time

that data was received in last is indicated in the

upper area while receiving TMC information.

➜ “5. Traffic Information” (P. 38)

1 2 3 4

80 9

Map Screen Features

12 MAX983HD

English

Indicators on the scrolled map

Indicators are displayed after scrolling the map. During scrolling, only the scroll cursor is displayed on

the map.

1 [Back] key

Returns to the map of current location.

2 [OK] key

Displays the Location menu. You can set the

location under the cursor as the destination or

store this location. ➜ “Location menu (Menu on

scrolled map)” (P. 9)

3 Scroll cursor

Displayed when scrolling the map.

4 Latitude/longitude information

Displays the latitude/longitude information of the

location under the cursor. Whether this is

displayed or not can be set. ➜ “Map Scrolling

Information” (P. 47)

5 Location information

When moving the cursor on a Stored Location,

destination, or waypoint, the place name will be

displayed.

If the TMC icon is put together to the cursor, the

TMC information is displayed.

3 4

Map Screen Features

MAX983HD

English

Indicators displayed during the route guidance mode

After a destination is set and travelling is started, the guidance route and various guidance information

are displayed on the map. ➜ “Route Guidance Screen Features” (P. 30)

1 Small Turn by Turn Arrow display

Displays the turning direction and distance to the

next guidance point. Whether it is displayed or

not can be set. ➜ “Map Guidance Settings”

(P. 44)

2 Expected arrival time and distance to

the destination

The expected time of arrival to the destination

and the distance from the current location to the

destination are displayed. The remaining time

and distance to the next waypoint are displayed

additionally, if at least one waypoint is existing.

3 Guidance route

The guidance route to the destination is

displayed. The colour of the route can be

changed. ➜ “Route Colour” (P. 45)

4 Destination direction

Indicates the direction to the destination from the

current location.

5 Guidance point

Indicates the guidance point.

6 Next intersecting Road name and

distance

The distance to the next guidance intersection

and the name of the next intersecting road will be

displayed when you get near to approx. 600 m or

600 yd (2 km or 1.4 mile for a motorway) to the

intersection.

2 3

5 46

Map Screen Features

14 MAX983HD

English

Map symbols

This navigation system indicates information such as roads and facilities using symbols and colours.

Colour of the roads

Map symbols (examples)

The following map symbols are displayed on the map.

Landmark icons

Landmark icons are displayed on the Intersection map screen, etc. Whether they are displayed or not

can be set. ➜ “Landmark Icon display” (P. 45)

Motorways : (Yellow with red border)

Main roads : (Red)

Minor roads : (Yellow)

Municipal Office Rental Car Company University or College

Military Base Petrol Station Hotel

Airport Historical Site Restaurant

Main Station Science Museum·

Art Museum Shopping Centre

Station Tourist Information

Centre Supermarket

Ferry Terminal Park & Ride Golf Course

Car Park Recreation Ground Marina

Parking Lot Sports Complex Marina

Parking Garage Library Other Facilities

Hospital Petrol Station Car Park

Hotel Restaurant

Map Screen Features

MAX983HD

English

TMC traffic information symbols

When the system receives RDS-TMC traffic information, detailed TMC traffic information on the route

are displayed on the map. TMC traffic information is displayed on the map with symbols and congestion

information colour. ➜ “5. Traffic Information” (P. 38)

Example of TMC traffic information displayed

●Current location map screen with traffic

information

●Screen of TMC traffic information on route

Symbols used for TMC traffic information

Congestion information colour

Accident Broken vehicle Danger Vehicle on wrong

carriage way

Traffic

congestion Delay Roadworks Closed road

Contra flow Lane restrictions Road surface in

poor condition Slippery road

Fog reduced

visibility Rain Snow Weather

Wind Information Major events

Closed : Purple

Jammed :Red

Moderate : Yellow

Free flow : Green

No data (unknown): Not displayed (no colour)

16 MAX983HD

English

Manipulating the Map Screen

Scrolling the Map

Touching the Map screen displays a cursor at the

centre of the screen, and you can scroll the map.

For the 2D map, touch the map to move the map

to the touched position, and keep touching the

map to scroll the map towards the touched

direction.

For the 3D map, touch the upper part of the map

to scroll the map toward the touched direction,

and touch the left or right part to rotate the map

while touching.

2D Map

3D Map

Displaying the map of the

current car location

When the [MAP] button is pressed, the map

around the current location is displayed with the

vehicle in the centre of it. When the vehicle runs,

the behaviour is the same.

Zooming IN/OUT the map

Press the [OUT] (Zoom Out) or [IN] (Zomm In)

button to change the map scale.

The 2D map can be adjusted in 11 steps, and the

3D map in 10 steps.

Note:

For the 2D/2D or 2D/3D map, these buttons work

upon the right map. To adjust the left map, touch the

left map, and then use these buttons.

Changing the map

appearance

The Map screen can be adjusted regarding

orientation or appearance of the map.

Screen examples

•2D Map

[Back] key:

Returns to the current location map screen.

[OK] key:

You can set the location under the cursor as the

destination or store the location to the Address

Book. ➜ “Location menu (Menu on scrolled

map)” (P. 9)

[IN] (Zoom In) button:

Increases the map scale, and shows a more

detailed map. Keep touching it to enter the Free

Zoom mode.

[OUT] (Zoom Out) button:

Decreases the map scale, and shows the map of

a wider area. Keep touching it to enter the Free

Zoom mode.

Manipulating the Map Screen

MAX983HD

English

•3D Map

•2D/2D Map

•2D/3D Map

Touch the [View] key on the Map screen of the

current vehicle location. The Map View menu is

displayed.

Note:

You can also adjust these settings from

[Navigation] of the Setting menu. ➜ “Map View

settings” (P. 44)

[D]/[d] key:

Scrolls the Map View menu screen up or down.

[2D] key:

Changes to the map represented to the plane just

like the map of atlases.

[3D] key:

Changes to the 3D map using a viewing position

above the vehicle while looking in the direction of

the car heading.

Note:

To change the 3D angle, set the “3D Map Angle” as

mentioned below.

[2D/2D] key:

Displays two 2D maps right and left on the

divided screen. This is convenient to view two

maps with different scales.

Note:

To change the orientation or scale of the left map,

set the “Left Map Heading” or “Left Map Scale” as

mentioned below.

[2D/3D] key:

Displays a 2D map at the left and a 3D map at the

right on the divided screen.

Note:

To change the orientation or scale of the left map,

use the “Left Map Heading” or “Left Map Scale” as

mentioned below.

“Turn list on Route”:

During the route guidance mode: Set to ON to

display the list of the name, distance, and turning

direction of the guidance intersections at the left

of the screen.

•[ON]

Displays the Turn List screen.

•[OFF]

Hides the Turn List screen.

“Intersection Map”:

Changes the setting of the Intersection Close-up

display which displays the turning direction of the

next guidance intersection.

•[ON]

Displays the Intersection Close-up display.

•[OFF]

Hides the Intersection Close-up display.

“Main Map Heading”:

Changes the orientation of the map. This control

is available when the main map or the right map

is set to 2D mode.

•[Heading Up]

The map is displayed with the travelling

direction pointing up.

•[North Up]

The map is displayed with north pointing up.

“Left Map Scale”:

Changes the scale of the left map. This control is

available when a divided map mode is selected.

•[+]

Increases the map scale, and shows a more

detailed map.

•[–]

Decreases the map scale, and shows the map

of a wider area.

Manipulating the Map Screen

18 MAX983HD

English

CAUTION

Cautions

•The actual speed limit may change due to

hours or other circumstances. Be sure to

observe the actual traffic circumstances

and regulations at all times while driving.

•When the actual speed exceeds the speed

limit data, the icon blinking and a beep

sounding will not work.

“Left Map Heading”:

Changes the orientation of the left map. This

control is available when the divided map screen

is displayed.

•[Heading Up]

The map is displayed with the travelling

direction pointing up.

• [North Up]

The map is displayed with north pointing up.

“3D Map Angle”:

Changes the angle of the 3D map. This control is

available when the 3D map is displayed.

•[Adjust]

The angle control keys are displayed. You can

raise the angle by touching the [E] key, and

lower the angle by touching the [e] key.

“Speed Limit Icon”:

Changes the function of the Speed Limit icon.

•[ ]

The icon blinks and a beep sounds when the

speed limit information in the map database is

changed.

•[ ]

The icon blinks when the speed limit information

in the map database is changed.

•[OFF]

This function is disabled.

[Hide Map] key:

Hides the map, and displays the screen

containing only the next guidance point (Turn-by-

Turn screen). This screen can also be displayed

by keep pressing the [MAP] button. When the

navigation system is not in the route guidance

mode, the screen with the compass showing the

direction is displayed.

MAX983HD

English

Outline of Destination Entering Procedures

To start route guidance, operate the navigation system with the following procedure:

●Select the method of searching destination from the Destination menu screen, then search for

the desired destination.

Select a suitable searching method according to the place to search.

●Confirm the position of the place found with the Set Location menu screen or Place menu

screen, then set the destination.

You can store the place found to the Address Book, or can confirm the information according to the

place, as well as set it as destination.

●Start the route guidance from the Set Route menu screen.

You can also display other suggested routes, or confirm information of the route.

Other than the above procedure, you can also enter the destination by scrolling the map or from the

Favourite/Frequent menu.

Setting destination by entering the address

This section explains the basic operation procedure to set the destination in detail, using the example to

specify the destination by entering the address from the Destination menu. Read this explanation

thoroughly because this procedure is similar to other destination entering methods.

For other destination entering methods, see “3. Entering the Destination” (P. 22).

1. Press the [MENU] button.

The Destination menu of the navigation

system is displayed.

2. Touch the [Address] key.

The Address input screen is displayed.

3. Confirm the displayed country name (the

previous country name is displayed). If the

country name you wish to go to is not

displayed, touch the [Country] key, otherwise

proceed to the step 5.

4. Touch the country name you wish to go.

The specified country name is displayed.

[I] / [i]

Scrolls the list up or down by one item.

[D] / [d]

Scrolls the list by one page.

5. Touch the [City] key.

Note:

You can omit the city name entry and directly enter

a road name.

Outline of Destination Entering Procedures

20 MAX983HD

English

6. Enter the city name you wish to go to by

touching the characters on the screen, then

touch the [OK] key.

[]

Deletes the last entered character.

[Back]

Returns to the previous screen.

[All Cities]

Specify all cities of the specified country for

the search.

[Last 5 Cities]

Displays the list of five city names recently

used. Touch desired city name you wish to go

to.

[All Clear]

Deletes all characters entered so far.

[A-Z]

Displays the alphabetic input keyboard.

[Accent]

Displays the accent characters input

keyboard.

[0-9]

Displays the number input keyboard.

[Symbols]

Displays the symbol characters input

keyboard.

[OK]

Searches the map database using entered

characters, and proceeds to the city name

List.

Note:

•By touching the [OK] key, the city name list is

displayed even if you do not enter all characters.

•During the character entry, the system shows the

city name list automatically when the amount of

matching cities is five or less.

7. Touch the city name you wish to go to.

Then, the system returns to the Address input

screen.

[(Alphabet)]

Scrolls the list to each initial letter.

The total number of list items is displayed at

the left of the screen.

8. Touch the [Street] key.

The Street input screen is displayed.

Note:

You can omit the street name entry. By touching the

[OK] key, proceed to step 13.

9. Enter the street name you wish to go to by

touching characters on the screen, then touch

the [OK] key.

Enter by the same way as the city name entry.

The street name list is displayed.

10.Touch the street name you wish to go to.

Then, the system returns to the Address input

screen.

Outline of Destination Entering Procedures

MAX983HD

English

11.Touch the [House No.] key.

The house number input screen is displayed.

Note:

You can omit the house number entry. By touching

the [OK] key proceed to step 13.

12.Enter the house number by touching numbers

on the screen, then touch the [OK] key.

The Set Location menu is displayed. The

place found is shown with “ ” on the map.

Note:

The range of house numbers you can enter is

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

13.Confirm the location, then touch the [OK] key.

The Set Route menu is displayed with the

map around the place selected.

Note:

With this screen, you can register the place found or

can search facilities (POI) around the place. ➜ “Set

Location menu” (P. 28)

14.Touch the [Start] key.

The route guidance will be started.

Note:

In this screen, you can also select among other

suggested routes with a different routing priority

condition, obtain additional route information, and

set waypoints. ➜ “Set Route menu” (P. 28)

22 MAX983HD

English

3. Entering the Destination

Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu

You can search for a destination from the Destination menu by using various methods. Use a suitable

searching method according to the place you wish to go to.

Destination menu screen 1

Destination menu screen 2

1. Press the [MENU] button.

The Destination menu screen is displayed. Touching the [ ] (Next) key displays the next menu

screen.

Note:

You can also display the Destination menu screen by touching the [Dest] key from the Navi Shortcut menu

which is displayed by touching the [NAVI] key on the Map screen.

2. Touch the desired searching method.

For the operation procedure hereafter, see the explanation of each section.

Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu

MAX983HD

English

By Address

For the operation procedure using the [Address],

see “Setting destination by entering the

address” (P. 19)

By Address Book

Specifies a place registered in the navigation

system as the destination.

Note:

To use this function, register places beforehand. ➜

“Address Book” (P. 49)

1. Touch the [Address Book] key.

2. From the displayed Address Book list, touch

the stored location you wish to go.

[Sort]

You can select the sorting method.

•[by Number]: Displayed by the registered

order.

•[by Name]: Displayed by the alphabetical

order of the name.

•[by Icon]: Displayed the list classified by

icon type.

•[by Group]: Displayed the list classified by

groups.

Note:

•You can store a new location by touching the

[None (Add New)] key.

•For storing or editing procedure, see “Address

Book” (P. 49).

3. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

By Points of Interest (POI)

Select the category of the place, narrow down the

data by specifying the area or entering the name,

and then select the place you wish to go to.

By touching the [by Name] key, you can also

search a place by simply entering the name.

1. Touch the [Points of Interest] key.

2. Touch your desired category.

When a additional category list is displayed,

touch a category again to select one.

3. Enter the city name and place name.

4. From the displayed place list, touch the place

you wish to go to select it.

[by Dist.]

The list is sorted by nearby order after

pressing this key. This key is displayed when

the list is set to the alphabetical order.

[by Name]

The list is sorted by alphabetical order after

pressing this key. This key is displayed when

the list is set to the nearby order.

5. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

6. Touch the [Start] key.

By Nearby POI

Select the category of the place, then search for

places around the current location.

1. Touch the [Nearby POI] key.

2. Touch your desired category.

When an additional category list is displayed,

touch a category again to select.

3. From the displayed place list, touch the place

you wish to go to select it.

4. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

5. Touch the [Start] key.

Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu

24 MAX983HD

English

Going Home

When your home address is registered, you can

start route guidance to your home by a simple

operation.

Note:

When your home address is not registered, register

it by touching the [Home (Add New)] key. When the

list of searching methods appears, register your

home address by the desired method. You can also

Setting menu. ➜ “Home Location” (P. 49)

1. Touch the [Home] key.

2. Touch the [Start] key.

The route to your home is automatically

calculated and the route guidance is started.

By Previous Destination

The destinations previously used are registered

in the previous destination list (up to 100

locations). You can enter a destination by

selecting it from this list. When the previous

destination list exceeds 100 items, the oldest

entries are automatically deleted.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [Previous Destinations] key.

3. From the displayed previous destination list,

touch the place you wish to go.

4. Touch the [OK] key.

5. Touch the [Start] key.

By Previous Starting Point

You can set the last start location as the

destination. In case you want to set a return route

from the reached destination, you can enter the

new destination quickly using this method.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [Previous Starting Point] key.

3. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

By Postal Code

You can search for destinations by entering the

country name and the postal code of the place

you wish to go to.

Note:

•In some countries or districts, it may be hard to

search specific places. In such cases, use postal

code search as a subsidiary function of searching

addresses.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [Postcode] key.

3. Touch the [Country] key, and touch the

desired country name.

4. Touch the [Postcode] key.

The postal code input screen is displayed.

5. Enter the postal code by touching number

keys on the screen.

6. Touch the [OK] key.

For the rest of the procedure, read the

sections that apply to the country of your

residence.

●When the [Country] is set to the United

Kingdom or the Netherlands

1. Touch the [Pinpoint Search] key.

[Area Search]

Displays the City name list that corresponds

to the input postal code. Search a place by the

same way of searching by address.

2. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

If a different place from where you wish to go

to is displayed, touch the [Back] key to return

to the previous screen, then perform the

procedure of “When the [Country] is set to an

other than the United Kingdom and the

Netherlands” listed below.

3. Touch the [Start] key.

●When the [Country] is set to an other than

the United Kingdom and the Netherlands

1. Touch the [Area Search] key.

2. Touch the desired City name to select.

The Address input screen is displayed.

3. If required, enter the Street name and House

No., then touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu

MAX983HD

English

By Motorway Entrance/Exit

You can search an entrance or exit of a motorway

to set as the destination.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [M-way Entrance/Exit] key.

3. Touch the [Country] key, then touch the

country name, if necessary.

4. Touch the [Motorway] key.

5. Enter the name of the motorway, then touch

the [OK] key.

6. From the displayed Motorway list, touch the

desired motorway to select.

7. Select the [Entrance] or [Exit] key.

8. From the displayed Entrance list or Exit list,

touch the place you wish to go to select it.

[by Dist.]

The list is sorted by nearby order after

pressing this key. This key is displayed when

the list is set to the order along the road.

[on the Way]

The list is sorted by order along the road after

pressing this key. This key is displayed when

the list is set to the nearby order.

9. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

10.Touch the [Start] key.

By Intersection

You can specify an intersection as destination by

entering the two crossing street names, and set

them as destination.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [Intersection] key.

3. Touch the [Country] key, then touch the

country name, if necessary.

4. Touch the [City] key, enter the city name, then

touch the [OK] key.

The city name entry can be omitted.

5. From the displayed City list, touch the city to

select it.

6. Touch the [1st Street] key, enter the street

name, then touch the [OK] key.

7. From the displayed Street list, touch the street

to select it.

8. Select the 2nd Street by a similar procedure

as for the 1st Street.

9. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

10.Touch the [Start] key.

By Stored Routes

Selects a route previously registered, then set it

as the new route.

Note:

To use this function, one or more registered routes

are required. When a route is currently set, you can

key in case the route contains at least one waypoint.

You can also register the current route using the

Route menu. ➜ “Stored Route” (P. 50)

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key.

2. Touch the [Stored Routes] key.

3. From the displayed stored route list, touch the

route you wish to set.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

By Extra POI

You can set the downloaded data from website

as a destination. For more information about the

setting method, see the Clarion homepage.

26 MAX983HD

English

Searching Your Destination from the Map Screen

You can search for a place by scrolling the map, and set it as the destination.

1. Scroll the map by touching the Map screen,

and move the cursor to the place you wish to

go to. Touch the [OK] key. ➜ “Scrolling the

Map” (P. 16)

2. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [New Dest] key.

3. Touch the [Start] key.

Note:

When you search a place far from the current location, change the map scale to search more quickly.

Searching for POI Using the Quick POI Function

By using the Navi Shortcut menu, you can enter a destination by searching a place near the current

position or along the route quickly from five POI categories specified before in the Setting menu.

When the destination has been set, you can specify POIs that you want to visit along the route as

waypoints, and you can search them quickly.

You can customise the five categories in the Setting menu. ➜ “Quick POI Settings” (P. 46)

1. Touch the [NAVI] key on the Map screen.

The Navi Shortcut menu is displayed.

2. Touch the [Quick POI] key.

The Quick POI screen is displayed.

3. Select a category by touching it.

The list of the nearby places or along the route

of the selected category is displayed.

When the destination is already set, the

following keys are displayed at the top of the

screen.

[by Dist.]

The list of nearby POI ordered by the distance

from the current location is displayed after

pressing this key. This key is displayed when

displaying the list screen of POI along the

route.

[along the Route]

The list of POI along the route ordered by the

distance from the current location is displayed

after pressing this key. This key is displayed

when displaying the list screen of nearby POI.

4. Select the desired place you wish to go to by

touching it.

5. Touch the [Start] key.

The route guidance to the destination will

start. In case a route existed before the

selected POI will be added as waypoint.

MAX983HD

English

Searching Your Destination from the Favourite/

Frequent List

You can enter a destination by selecting from the list of the registered favourite places or the places often

visited.

For detailed usage of the Favourite/Frequent list, see “Using Favourite/Frequent List” (P. 54)

By Favourite

You can enter a destination by selecting a place

from the Favourite list registered beforehand.

1. From the Destination menu or the Navi

Shortcut menu, touch the [ ] key.

The Favourite list screen is displayed.

When your desired icon is not displayed,

touch the [N] or [n] key to scroll the list.

2. Touch the desired icon you wish to set as

destination.

The Set Location menu screen is displayed.

3. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

By Frequent

You can enter a destination by selecting a place

from the Frequent list. The places entered as the

destination are registered to the Frequent list

automatically.

1. From the Destination menu or the Navi

Shortcut menu, touch the [ ] key.

The Favourite list screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [ ] (Frequent) key.

The Frequent list screen is displayed.

When your desired icon is not displayed,

touch the [N] or [n] key to scroll the list.

3. Confirm the location of the destination, then

touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [Start] key.

28 MAX983HD

English

Setting the Destination and Starting the Route

Guidance

Set Location menu

From the Set Location menu displayed when

setting the searched place as the destination,

you can perform the following operations

according to the conditions:

Note:

•The name of the road close to the cursor is

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

•For the 2D maps, the road that will be set as

destination blinks when the map scale is 200 m(1/

8 mile) or smaller. When you set the following

places as the destination, confirm the position of

the blinking road:

• Place where roads of ascending and

descending have diverged

• Place near the intersection of overpass

• Place where no road exists in the vicinity

Set Route menu

When you enter the destination, the Set Route

menu is displayed with the map showing the

suggested routes. You can perform the following

operations from this screen according to the

situation:

Note:

If approx. 30 seconds pass without touching any key

after this screen is displayed, the route guidance will

be automatically started.

[Start] key:

Starts the route guidance to the destination.

[More Routes] key:

You can change to other suggested routes with a

different priority condition. You can also set this

from the Route menu. ➜ “Selecting another

route” (P. 35)

•[Shortest Time]

Shows the route of which the required driving

time is shortest.

•[Minimize M-way]

Shows the route of which motorways are not

used as much as possible.

•[Shortest Distance]

Shows the route of which the distance is

shortest.

•[OK]

Changes to the specified route.

[Route Info] key:

Shows the information of the suggested route

selected on the screen.

•[Preview]

You can confirm the route from the map.

Touching the [F] key scrolls the map so that

the cursor moves along the travelling direction

of the suggested route. Touching the [R] key

scrolls the map so that the cursor moves to the

opposite direction of travelling along the

suggested route. Touching the [G] key stops

scrolling temporarily.

[OK] key:

Sets the location shown by the “ ”on the map

as the destination.

[Add to Route] key:

When a destination is already set, you can set the

location of the “ ” as a waypoint. Specify the

order of passing when setting the location as a

waypoint. ➜ “Editing the route” (P. 33)

[Nearby POI] key:

You can search for a place of the specified

category around the location of the “ ”, and set

it as the destination. The searching procedure is

similar to the procedure for POI search. ➜ “By

Nearby POI” (P. 23)

[POI Info] key:

When the navigation system has information

concerning the searched location, you can

display this information by pressing the [POI Info]

key.

[Store Location] key:

[ ] key:

Touching this key changes the map to the map

scrolling screen. You can adjust the location of

the searched place.

Setting the Destination and Starting the Route Guidance

MAX983HD

English

•[Simulation]

Starts the simulation of the route guidance with

moving the vehicle mark automatically.

Touching the [G] key stops the simulation

temporarily, and the [P] key restarts the

simulation. Touching the [p] key stops the

simulation, and returns to the previous screen.

[Add Way Pt.] key:

Adds waypoints to the suggested route displayed

on the map. After the list of the place search

method is displayed, search and select places

you wish to set as waypoints by using similar

methods as for entering a destination. After the

Edit Route screen is displayed, touch the [Add

way Point] key. Up to five waypoints can be

specified.

You can also set waypoints after starting the

route guidance.➜ “Editing the route” (P. 33)

30 MAX983HD

English

4. Route Guidance

After you have entered the destination and started the route guidance, you will be guided along the route

by screen display and by voice.

Route Guidance Screen Features

As well as the Map screen, various guidance screens are displayed during the route guidance mode

according to the situation.

Press the [MAP] button to switch the screen among the following guidance screens.

Intersection Map

When you get near to approx. 300 m or 300 yd (1 km or 1 mile for a motorway) from the next guidance

point, the screen will be divided into two displays and the Intersection Map will be displayed on the left

display.

You can set whether to display the Intersection Map screen or not. The factory setting is ON.➜

“Changing the map appearance” (P. 16)

1 Guidance point

Indicates the next guidance point.

2 Guidance route

Indicates the direction to travel.

3 Remaining distance indication

Indicates the remaining distance to the next

guidance point with the bar gauge.

2 3

Route Guidance Screen Features

MAX983HD

English

Turn list on Route

The screen is always divided into two displays and the Turn List on Route is displayed on the left display

if Turn list on Route is activated. The Turn List contains the guidance points next to the vehicle position,

and will change while travelling.

When you get near to the next guidance point, the left display is automatically changed to the

Intersection Map.

You can set whether to display the Turn List screen or not. The factory setting is OFF.➜ “Changing the

map appearance” (P. 16)

1 [I] / [i] key

Scrolls the Turn List on Route screen. Touching

the [I] key displays the Turn List of the

subsequent guidance points.

2 Turn List

The list of the guidance points and turning

directions are displayed from the items near to

the vehicle position, and it will change while

travelling.

Other guidance screens

From the Map Guidance settings menu of the Navigation Setting, you can set other functions such as

displaying the small turn arrow or the intersection map. ➜ “Map Guidance Settings” (P. 44)

●3D Junction View

While travelling on the motorway, when you get

near to approx. 1 km or 1 mile from the next

guidance point with junctions, the screen will be

divided into two displays and the information of

the junction with a 3D image will be displayed on

the left display.

●Small Turn Arrow on Map

The turning direction and distance of the next

guidance point is displayed at the upper left of the

screen.

32 MAX983HD

English

About the Voice Guidance

After starting the route guidance, not only guidance by screen but also guidance by voice, such as the

turning direction or the distance to the guidance point, will be given when you get near to the guidance

point.

You can set whether to use the voice guidance or not, and set the volume to be changed according to

the vehicle speed. ➜ “Guidance Voice Settings” (P. 44)

Changing/Editing the Route Settings

From the Route menu, editing the current route, confirming the route information, setting the conditions

of the route calculation, etc. can be performed.

Route menu screen

1. Touch the [NAVI] key on the Map screen to display the Navi Shortcut menu.

2. Touch the [Route] key.

The Route menu screen is displayed.

3. Touch the desired menu item.

For the operation procedure hereafter, see the explanation of each section.

Changing/Editing the Route Settings

MAX983HD

English

Cancelling/restarting the

route guidance

Cancelling the route guidance

Terminates the route guidance during the route

guidance mode.

1. Touch the [Cancel Route] key.

A confirmation message is displayed.

This key is also provided on the Destination

menu screen.

2. Touch the [Yes] key.

The route guidance will be terminated, and

the destination and route will be deleted.

Resuming the cancelled route

guidance

Restores the previous route, and restarts the

cancelled route guidance.

1. Touch the [Resume Route] key.

A confirmation message is displayed.

2. Touch the [Yes] key.

The route guidance will be restarted.

Changing/editing the route

Changes or edits the route currently specified.

1. Touch the [Change/Edit] key.

The Change/Edit Route menu screen is

displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to select it.

Setting the diverting distance

Searches for a diverted route where the section

from the current location up to the specified

distance is avoided.

1. Touch the [Detour] key.

2. Touch the distance you want to avoid.

The route where the section of selected

distance is avoided is automatically

calculated, and the route guidance will be

restarted.

Setting a diverted route using traffic

information

You can change the route based on traffic

information.

1. Touch the [Traffic Detour] key.

The diverted route is displayed with TMC

traffic information taken into account.

When no diverted route is found, a message

is displayed.

2. Confirm the diverted route, then touch the

[OK] key.

The route with traffic information considered

is automatically calculated, and the route

guidance will be restarted.

Recalculating the route

After changing the conditions of the route

calculation or when the status of the route is

changed, you can recalculate the route if you

want.

1. Touch the [Recalculate Route] key.

The route is automatically recalculated, and

the Set Route screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [Start] key.

The route guidance will be restarted.

Editing the route

You can edit the current route.

1. Touch the [Edit Route] key.

The Edit Route screen is displayed.

2. Change settings by touching the desired

setting item.

The route is recalculated with added or edited

conditions.

[Destination]

You can enter a new destination.

[Add way Point]

Up to 5 waypoints can be specified. The

specified waypoints are displayed by marks

with the ordinal number for visiting.

[(Current destination name/Waypoint

name)]

The edit screen is displayed. Only the

destination/waypoints that have not been

passed can be edited.

Changing/Editing the Route Settings

34 MAX983HD

English

•[Delete]: Displays a confirmation screen. If

you touch the [Yes] key, the destination/

waypoint is deleted.

• [ ]: You can adjust the location of the

destination/waypoint by scrolling the map.

[(Route calculation condition icon)]

You can change the conditions of route

calculation. When you change a condition, the

route is recalculated with the specified

condition. When waypoints are specified, you

can set the condition for each section of the

route.

•[ ]:

Calculates the route of which the required

time is shortest.

•[ ]:

Calculates the route of which motorways

are not used as much as possible.

•[ ]:

Calculates the route of which the distance is

shortest.

Storing the current route

Stores the current route as the Stored Route. ➜

“Stored Route” (P. 50)

1. Touch the [Store Current Route] key.

A confirmation screen is displayed. Touching

the [Yes] key stores the current route.

Note:

To register the current route, at least one waypoint is

required.

Setting the conditions of the

route calculation

You can customise the conditions of the route

calculation.

Note:

The conditions set in the Route Priority menu screen

are applied to the current route, the recalculation is

performed automatically.

1. Touch the [Route Priority] key.

The Route Priority menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the condition you wish to use.

Touching the [Back] key returns to the

previous screen.

[Fastest Route]

Calculates the route of which the required

time is shortest.

[Minimize Motorways]

Calculates the route of which motorways are

not used as much as possible.

[Shortest Route]

Calculates the route of which the distance is

shortest.

[Set Route Preferences]

Sets the detailed condition of the route

calculation.

•[Minimize Toll Roads]: Minimises the use

of toll roads.

•[Use Time Restricted Roads]: Uses roads

with restricted usage time.

•[Use RDS-TMC information]: Considers

the RDS-TMC information for routing.

•[Use Avoid Area Settings]: Takes a detour

to avoid the registered Avoid Area.

•[Use Ferries]: Uses car ferries for routing.

•[Auto Reroute]: When leaving the

suggested route during the route guidance

mode, a new route is automatically

recalculated.

Changing/Editing the Route Settings

MAX983HD

English

Confirming the route

information

Confirms various information of the current route.

1. Touch the [Route Information] key.

The Route Information menu screen is

displayed.

[Route Info]

Displays the list of route information. The

main guidance points from the current

location to the destination are displayed by

the list format. When there is a lot of

information items, you can scroll the list by

touching the [D], [I], [i], [d] keys.

[Preview]

Confirms the suggested route by scrolling

with the cursor on the map.

[Simulation]

Simulates the route guidance with moving the

vehicle mark automatically.

Note:

Refer to the [Route Info] key in “Set Route menu”

(P. 28) for details of [Preview] and [Simulation].

Selecting another route

Changes the current route to another suggested

route with different priority conditions.

Note:

When waypoints are set, this operation is disabled.

1. Touch the [More Routes] key.

If a confirmation screen is displayed, touch

the [Yes] key.

The More Route menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired priority condition you wish

to confirm.

The route of the specified priority condition is

highlighted on the map.

[Shortest Time]

Shows the route of which the required time is

shortest.

[Minimize M-way]

Shows the route of which motorways are not

used as much as possible.

[Shortest Distance]

Shows the route of which the distance is

shortest.

3. Touch the [OK] key.

The Set Route menu screen is displayed.

Touching the [Start] key starts the route

guidance with the route you have selected.

Storing the track travelled

You can register the track which is the travelled

path on the vehicle up to the current car position.

Note:

The track is automatically recorded from the place of

departure up to 100 km, and the current tracking

from the current location up to 20 km can be

registered for up to five tracks. You can select

whether to display track traveled or not, and you can

also register/edit it from the [Navigation] or the

[Stored Data] of the Setting menu. ➜ “Tracking

Display Settings” (P. 46).

1. Touch the [Store Tracking] key.

A confirmation screen is displayed. Touching

the [Yes] key stores the current track.

36 MAX983HD

English

Notes on the Route Guidance

• When you enter the destination, be sure to stop

the vehicle in a safe place.

• The displayed route is only a suggested route.

• Roads can change every day, and may have

changed in geometries and traffic regulations

from the date the map data is created. Be sure

to follow the actual traffic regulations.

• It may take a little time until the suggested route

is displayed according to the situation.

• Even when the destination is entered by the

Stored Routes, the current location map screen

is displayed. When the starting point is set to a

remote position from the vehicle position, the

route may not be displayed on the screen.

• Roads and places where the vehicle cannot

pass, such as roads in housing areas, site or in

installations, and roads under construction may

be included in the suggested route.

• The passed waypoints are not included for

route recalculation.

• When you set waypoints, the system calculates

the routes between every point. Therefore, the

following notes apply:

• If a route between certain waypoints is not

found, no route may be displayed.

• The route may not be connected in the

vicinity of a waypoint.

• A U-turn may be required at a waypoint.

• The route calculation may not be completed in

the following cases:

• If there is no main road within a range of

approx. 5 km (3 miles) from the current

location.

• If there is no main road within a range of

approx. 5 km (3 miles) from the destination

(or waypoints).

• If the vehicle is too close to the destination.

In this case, a message to inform you about

this will be displayed.

• If it is impossible to reach the destination or

waypoints because of traffic regulations,

etc.

• If the map database does not contain the

area data of the selected locations.

• If only an extremely roundabout route is

available to reach the destination or

waypoints.

• When displaying a route, the followings may

occur:

• Even if a route calculation is requested on a

main road, the start point of the suggested

route may not exactly match the current

vehicle location.

• If a route calculation is requested on a main

road, the end point of the suggested route

may not exactly match the destination.

• If a route calculation is requested on a main

road, the system may suggest a route

starting from another main road.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe

location and adjust the current location

using Setting menu, or continue driving until

the vehicle icon appears on a main road. If

either of these methods are not successful,

request a route calculation again.

• Ferry lines are stored in this system. Take

into consideration the travel time required

and operational condition before deciding

whether to use them or not.

• The current location or the travelling direction

may shift according to the travelling condition.

It is not a malfunction, and will return to a

normal display when keeping travelling for a

while.

• Though the vehicle position may shift in places

other than the road such as in the parking lot,

etc., it is not a malfunction. It will return to a

normal display when travelling on an actual

road for a while.

• In the current location display, a representative

name of the place which is nearest to the

vehicle position in the map database is

displayed, it may be different from the actual

place name.

MAX983HD

English

Notes on the Voice Guidance

• The voice guidance may not match the actual

roads or regulations. The cause of this can be

that the actual roads and the data in the map

database are different, or the vehicle speed.

• If the content of the voice guidance does not

match the actual roads or regulations, follow

the information acquired from the actual traffic

or road signs.

• The voice guidance is activated only for

intersections with certain conditions. There

may be cases that the vehicle has to turn, but

the voice guidance is not activated.

• The content of the voice guidance may vary,

depending on the direction of the turn and the

type of the intersection.

• The voice guidance timing will vary depending

on the situation.

• The voice guidance is not available when the

voice guidance function is not set to ON.

Moreover, even when the voice guidance

function is set to ON, if the voice guidance

volume is set to a very low value, the voice

guidance may not be audible. ➜ “Guidance

Voice Settings” (P. 44)

• The voice guidance will start when the vehicle

enters the suggested route. Before entering the

route, refer to the map screen for directions.

• When the vehicle approaches a waypoint, the

voice guidance will say “You have arrived at

waypoint <1 to 5>”. The voice guidance will

switch to the next route section. Please refer to

the map screen for directions until the next

voice guidance is started.

• When the vehicle approaches a destination,

the voice guidance will say “You have arrived

at the destination”. For the remainder of the

way, please refer to the map screen for

directions.

38 MAX983HD

English

5. Traffic Information

The RDS-TMC (Radio Data System-Traffic Message Channel) provides various information useful for

driving using FM radio transmission. The system can receive RDS-TMC information, and can display

the information on traffic conditions, congestion forecasts, and weather forecasts, etc. on the screen and

on the map.

By using RDS-TMC, you can obtain or confirm event information on congestions, road works, and

suspension of traffic, etc. around the route and the vehicle position.

When information is received from the RDS-TMC, the latest receiving time is displayed in the upper part

of TMC indicator on the Map screen.

Note:

•You can set the system to calculate routes that avoid the traffic incidents and congestions, etc. by using

received RDS-TMC information.

•When the TMC provider name is included in the received data, the TMC indicator on the map contains the

TMC provider name.

•For the symbols used for the TMC, see “Symbols used for TMC traffic information” (P. 15).

Displaying the Traffic Information

RDS TMC menu screen

1. Press the [ INFO] button.

The RDS TMC menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired item, and confirm the information.

Note:

•By touching the [TMC Traffic Info Settings] key, you can change the settings for the TMC information

indicators and the TMC provider. ➜ “Setting TMC traffic information” (P. 40)

Displaying the Traffic Information

MAX983HD

English

Displaying traffic information

on the route

Confirms the traffic information on the current

route.

1. Touch the [Traffic Info on Route] key.

The TMC event list is displayed in order of

distance from the current location on the

current route. The time of the event received

is displayed on the right side of the list.

2. Touch the desired event.

Detailed information of the event is displayed.

Touch the [I] / [i] key to Scroll the detailed

information screen.

The position and the TMC traffic information

symbol of the selected event information are

displayed on the map.

Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Displaying nearby traffic

information

You can confirm all the traffic information that are

within 50 km in the radius of the current location.

1. Touch the [Nearby Traffic Info] key.

The TMC event list is displayed in order of

distance from the current location. You can

confirm the detailed information by a similar

way as for the [Traffic Info on Route] key.

Displaying traffic information

on the map

You can confirm the information of all the TMC

traffic information symbols displayed on the map.

1. Touch the [Traffic Info on Map] key.

[J] / [j]

Moves the TMC traffic information symbol on

the map, and switches to detailed information

of other events.

Note:

•To display the TMC traffic information on the map,

touch the [TMC Traffic Info Settings] key, and set

the “Traffic Info on Map” to ON.➜ “Setting TMC

traffic information” (P. 40)

Displaying TMC information

on the weather

1. Touch the [Weather] key.

The TMC event list about weather is displayed

in order of distance from the current location.

You can confirm the detailed information by a

similar way as for the [Traffic Info on Route]

key. Detailed information is not displayed for

events without information about the weather.

Displaying congestion

forecast information

1. Touch the [Traffic Forecast] key.

The TMC event list with congestion forecast

information is displayed. You can confirm the

detailed information by a similar way as for the

[Traffic Info on Route] key.

Displaying the Traffic Information

40 MAX983HD

English

Displaying traffic information

on the registered user

location

1. Touch the [User Locations] key.

The User Locations list and the map around

the User Location is displayed.

2. Touch the desired User Location.

The map moves, and you can identify the

TMC event by the TMC traffic information

symbol.

You can edit/register a User Location by

touching the desired list item.

[(User Location name)]

The Edit User Location screen is displayed.

You can edit a registered User Location.

•[Rename]: Changes the User Location

name.

•[Delete]: Deletes the User Location.

•[OK]: Terminates the editing, then returns to

the previous screen.

• [ ]: Changes the location of the User

Location by scrolling the map.

[None (Add New)]

You can register a new User Location by the

procedures similar to entering the destination.

Setting TMC traffic

information

1. Touch the [TMC Traffic Info Settings] key.

The TMC Traffic Info Settings menu screen is

displayed.

2. Touch the desired key on the screen to set it.

“Traffic Info on Map”

Switches ON and OFF the TMC traffic

information display on the map. The factory

setting is ON.

“Traffic Info Selection”

Switches ON and OFF the event information

icon display for each event type. The factory

settings are all ON.

You can set this for the following types of TMC

traffic information event symbols:

[All Traffic Information], [Accident &

Incident], [Traffic Status], [Roadworks],

[Closure & Restrictions], [Weather & Road

Info], [Information], [Traffic Forecast],

[Weather]

“Select TMC Provider”

You can select the TMC provider you want to

use.

•[Automatic]: Uses the provider

automatically selected.

•[Manual]: Uses the provider you select from

the list of providers.

Note:

For the TMC provider setting, we recommend to set

to [Automatic].

Setting TA (Traffic

Announcement) mode

1. Touch the [TA] key.

“TA” will be displayed at the bottom of the

screen, and the system enters the TA standby

mode. For the detailed information on the TA

standby mode, see “Radio Operations”

(Audio Manual).

Displaying the Traffic Information

MAX983HD

English

TMC urgent information

indication

When the system receives a TMC information of

high urgency located within 10km from the

vehicle position or within 50km on the route, the

system displays the high urgency information

automatically, with a priority higher than any

other screen.

To return to the Map screen, touch the [OK] key.

Diverted routes with traffic

information considered

When a TMC event is found on your route, a

diverted route with traffic information considered

is automatically displayed.

Confirm or cancel the diverted route, and touch

the [OK] key to start the route guidance. If you do

not do anything, the diverted route will not be

used.

Notes on the Traffic Information

The information given by RDS-TMC is only a reference, it may not match the actual traffic conditions. Be

sure to follow the actual traffic regulations and traffic conditions.

42 MAX983HD

English

6. System Settings

You can set various settings of the navigation system from the Setting menu.

Setting menu screen 1

Setting menu screen 2

1. Press the [ ] (Set) button.

The Setting menu screen is displayed. Touching the [ ] (Next) key displays the additional Setting

menu screen.

2. Touch the desired menu item.

For the operation procedure hereafter, see the explanation of each section.

Note:

•For details about the Screen Colour item, see “Setting the Screen Colour mode” (P. 48)

MAX983HD

English

General Settings

When you touch the [General] key from the Setting menu, you can set various settings concerning the

general features.

Language setting

You can change the language used by the

system. As for “English”, you can also select the

unit of distance (km/mile).

“Language”:

You can select the language from the following

language keys:

[English (mile)] key

[English (km)] key

[Français] key

[Deutsch] key

[Español] key

[Italiano] key

[Nederlands] key

[Português] key

[Svenska] key

[Dansk] key

Note:

For the languages other than English, distances are

displayed using the metric system.

Clock settings

You can set various settings concerning the

clock.

1. Touch the [Setting] key of the “Clock” item.

The Clock menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“On-Screen Clock”:

Shows/hides the clock display on the screen.

“Clock Format”:

Changes the clock format to 12-hour/24-hour

system.

“Daylight Saving Time”:

Selects whether to apply the daylight saving

time or not.

“Offset Adjust”:

Adjusts the current time manually. The

adjustment is applied as offset value related

to the time signal received via GPS. Touching

the [+] or [–] key shifts the time by 1 minute.

Normally, it is not necessary to adjust

because the time is received from the GPS

signals automatically.

“Time Zone”:

Sets the time zone. You can select from the

list of 74 regions including the [Auto] key.

When you select the [Auto] key, the clock is

automatically switched to the time zone of the

country at the vehicle position.

Changing Skin

You can change the screen design by using the

skin data stored in the hard disk drive.

Note:

This operation is disabled while recording a CD or

loading/ejecting a disc.

1. Touch the [Select] key of the “Skin Change”

item.

2. Touch the desired item key you wish to set.

Beep Sound

You can turn ON/OFF the beep sounds and

menu operation sounds.

Keyboard Type

You can change the keyboard layout used for

name entry.

1. Touch the item key of the “Keyboard” item.

2. Select the keyboard type by touching one of

the following keys:

[ABCDEF] key

[QWERTY] key

[QWERTZ] key

[AZERTY] key

Voice Recognition

You can turn ON/OFF the voice recognition

feature (optional). When you touch the [OFF]

key, the voice recognition is not available.

Voice Feedback

You can turn ON/OFF the voice feedbacks which

are responded when using voice commands.

System Information

You can confirm the version number of the map

data and the system software here.

1. Touch the [Info.] key.

The system information is displayed.

Other General Settings

See the Audio Manual for the details of the

following settings:

“Blinking LED”

“Security Mode”

“System Check”

“System Information”

“Antenna”

44 MAX983HD

English

Navigation Settings

When you touch the [Navigation] key from the Setting menu, you can set various settings or confirm the

information concerning the navigation function.

Map Guidance Settings

You can change settings concerning the screen

route guidance.

1. Touch the [Map Guidance Settings] key.

The Guidance Settings menu screen is

displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“Route Guidance”

Turns ON/OFF the route guidance. When you

touch the [OFF] key, the route guidance is not

available.

“3D Junction View”

Shows/hides the 3D Junction guidance

screen.

“Small Turn Arrow on Map”

Shows/hides the Small Turn Arrow displayed

at the upper left of the Map screen.

“Interrupt AV”

You can set the interrupt of the route guidance

screen while displaying the audio screen.

•[OFF]: The audio screen is not interrupted.

• [ ]: Displays the small turn arrow on the

information pane. You can hide the arrow by

touching it.

• [ ]: The Route Guidance screen

interrupts the audio screen, and returns to

the main audio screen when the interrupt

finishes.

“Set Average Speeds”

When you set “Auto” to “OFF”, you can set

the average speed of the vehicle for each

road type. The time required to the destination

will be calculated in consideration of the

speed set.

•“Auto”: When you touch the [ON] key, the

time required is automatically calculated. To

set the average speeds manually, touch the

[OFF] key.

•“(Name of road type)”: Touching the [+] /

[–] key increases/decreases the average

speed by 5 km/h.

•“Reset”: Touching the [Reset] key resets

the average speeds to the factory settings.

Guidance Voice Settings

You can change settings concerning the voice

guidance.

1. Touch the [Guidance Voice Settings] key.

The Guidance Voice Settings menu screen is

displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“Guidance Voice”: Sets whether to activate

the voice guidance.

“Vol: Normal Speed”: Adjusts the volume of

the voice guidance when the vehicle speed is

normal.

“Vol: High Speed”: Adjusts the volume of the

voice guidance when the vehicle speed is

high.

“Voice Announcements”: Sets the number

of repetitions of the voice guidance per

guidance point.

Map View settings

You can change settings concerning the map

appearance.

1. Touch the [Map View] key.

The Map View menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to set.

For details of the setting items, see

“Changing the map appearance” (P. 16).

However, the [Hide Map] key is not displayed

on this screen.

Navigation Settings

MAX983HD

English

Map Design settings

You can change the map appearance, such as

the colours of the map, type of vehicle mark, etc.

Map Colour

Selects the colours of the map for the Day mode

(when illumination is turned OFF) and for the

Night mode (when illumination is turned ON).

“Map Colour (Day)” / “Map Colour (Night)”:

Touch the item key, then touch one of the [Map

Colour 1] to [Map Colour 4] keys you wish to set.

Vehicle Icon

Selects the type of the vehicle mark from 2 types.

“Vehicle Icon”:

Touch the desired mark you wish to use.

Route Colour

Selects the colour of the suggested route

displayed on the Map screen.

“Route Colour”:

Touch the desired colour you wish to set.

Landmark Icon display

Switches ON and OFF Landmark icon display for

each type.

1. Touch the [Landmark Icons] key.

The list of the Landmarks is displayed.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the desired

icon type you wish to change the setting for.

The types of Landmarks that can be set are

the following five types. The factory settings

are all OFF.➜ “Landmark icons” (P. 14)

“Petrol Station”

“Restaurant”

“Car Park”

“Hotel”

“Hospital”

Avoid Area Settings

You can register areas you do not want to pass

or areas that often get congested as an Avoid

Area. When you register the Avoid Areas, you

can set the system to calculate routes avoiding

the registered areas. ➜ “Setting the conditions

of the route calculation” (P. 34)

Up to 10 Avoid Areas can be registered. You can

edit the registered Avoid Areas.

Note:

You can also register/edit them from the [Stored

Data] of the Setting menu. ➜ “Avoid Area” (P. 50)

To register an Avoid Area

1. Touch the [Avoid Area Settings] key.

The list screen of Avoid Areas is displayed.

2. Touch the [None (Add New)] key.

3. Search the area to avoid by a similar way as

for entering a destination.

The setting screen of the Avoid Area is

displayed with the map of area found.

4. Touch the desired menu item to set.

[Rename]

You can change the name of the Avoid Area.

Enter the name, then touch the [OK] key.

[Resize Area]

You can change the size of the Avoid Area in

5 steps. Touch the [Large], [I], [Medium],

[i], or [Small] key.

[M-way]

You can set whether to avoid motorways

passing the Avoid Area.

•[included]: Avoided.

•[not included]: Not avoided.

[Delete]

Delete the current Avoid Area.

[]

You can correct the location of the Avoid Area

by moving the cursor on the map.

5. Touch the [OK] key.

To edit an Avoid Area

1. Touch the [Avoid Area Settings] key.

2. Touch the Avoid Area you wish to edit.

3. Touch the desired menu item to set, and set it

by a similar way as for registering Avoid

Areas. ➜ Step 4 above

4. Touch the [OK] key.

Navigation Settings

46 MAX983HD

English

TMC Traffic Information

Settings

1. Touch the [TMC Traffic Info Settings] key.

The TMC Traffic Info Setting menu screen is

displayed.

For details of the TMC settings , see “Setting

TMC traffic information” (P. 40).

Tracking Display Settings

The system can display track data for one trip

(from ACC ON to OFF) from the place of

departure up to a distance of 100 km on the map.

The track from the current location up to 20 km

can be registered for up to five tracks, and can be

edited. The tracks on the map are displayed

using the colour of the mark displayed left of the

registered name.

You can also set the system to always display the

current track.

Note:

You can also register/edit them from the [Stored

Data] of the Setting menu. ➜ “Stored Tracking”

(P. 50)

1. Touch the [Tracking Display Settings] key.

The list of track data is displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item.

To register a track

Registers the current track data.

1. Touch the [ON] key of the [None (Add New)]

item.

2. On the displayed confirmation screen, touch

the [Yes] key.

To show/hide track

1. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key from the list

screen of track data.

The setting of the track data display is

changed. To set to always display the current

track, touch the [ON] key of the “Current

Tracking”.

To edit a registered track

1. Touch the [Edit] key of “(Registered name)”

from the list of track data.

For the “Current Tracking”, only the [Map]

and [Delete] key are displayed.

[Map]

You can confirm the registered track data on

the map.

[Rename]

You can change the name of the registered

track data.

[Replace]

Deletes the registered track data, and register

the current track data.

[Delete]

Deletes the registered track data.

[OK]

Terminates the editing, and returns to the list

of track data.

Quick POI Settings

Note:

You can also set the categories of the Quick POI

from the Navi Shortcut menu. ➜ “Navi Shortcut

menu” (P. 8)

You can customise the 5 categories of the Quick

POI. In the factory settings, the following

categories are registered:

“Item 1”: [PETROL STAION]

“Item 2”: [RESTAURANT]

“Item 3”: [CAR PARK]

“Item 4”: [HOTEL]

“Item 5”: [HOSPITAL]

1. Touch the [Quick POI Settings] key.

The Item list of Quick POI is displayed.

2. Touch the desired Item of Quick POI you wish

to change.

3. Touch the desired main category of Quick

POI.

4. Touch the desired sub category of the Quick

POI.

The system returns to the Item list of Quick

POI.

Navigation Settings

MAX983HD

English

Map Scrolling Information

You can set the information displayed on the

scrolled map screen.

1. Touch the [Map Scrolling Information] key.

The Map Scrolling Information menu screen is

displayed.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of each item.

“Address Book Icons”

Shows/hides detail information display for

icons of locations registered in the Address

Book while scrolling.

“TMC Traffic Icons”

Shows/hides detail information display for

icons of TMC traffic information while

scrolling.

“Destination/Waypoint Icons”

Shows/hides detail information display for

destination and waypoints icons while

scrolling.

“Latitude/Longitude Info”

Shows/hides the latitude/longitude

information displayed at the bottom right of

the screen.

Adjusting Current Location

You can correct the vehicle position on the Map

screen.

1. Touch the [Adjust Current Location] key.

2. Scroll the map so that the cursor points to the

location you want to set as the vehicle

position.

3. Touch the [OK] key.

4. Touch the [ ] or [ ] key to turn the

arrowhead according to the direction of the

vehicle.

5. Touch the [OK] key.

Resetting All Settings to

Factory Defaults

You can reset all settings to return to the factory

settings.

Note:

Though all the settings are reset, the registered data

such as the Address Book, Stored Routes, stored

track data, and Avoid Area, are not erased.

1. Touch the [Reset All Settings to Default]

key.

2. From the displayed confirmation screen,

touch the [Yes] key.

Navigation System Check

You can check the conditions of the navigation

system.

1. Touch the [Navigation System Check] key.

The Navigation System Check screen is

displayed, and the conditions of GPS and

various sensors are shown.

The detailed situation of GPS is displayed by

touching the [GPS State] key.

“GPS”

“GPS Antenna”

“Speed Pulse”

To check the Speed Pulse connection, move

the vehicle a little.

“Reverse Signal”

To check the Reverse Signal connection,

once move the gear lever to the back position.

“Gyro Sensor”

“Parking Brake”

To check the Parking Brake connection, once

engage the parking brake.

“Illumination”

To check the Illumination connection, once

turn the lights on.

“RDS-TMC”

48 MAX983HD

English

Audio Settings

When you touch the [Audio] key from the Setting menu, you can set various setting concerning the

audio features. For details, see the Audio Manual.

Adjusting the Monitor

Setting the Screen Colour mode

The system has two Screen Colour mode: the Day mode and the Night mode. Each Screen Colour mode

has the own dimmer level setting.

To switch to the Day mode or Night mode manually, touch the [Day] or [Night] key of the “Screen

Colour” item on the Setting menu.

When the [Auto] key is selected, the Screen Colour mode is automatically switched according to

whether the illumination of the vehicle is turned off or on.

When you touch the [Monitor] key from the Setting menu, you can adjust the dimmer level of the monitor

screen.

Monitor settings

When you touch the [Monitor] key from the Setting menu, you can adjust the dimmer level of the monitor

screen.

• The dimmer level adjustment operates upon the current Screen Colour mode.

1. Touch the [Monitor] key to display the Monitor menu screen.

2. Touch the [+] or [–] key to adjust the dimmer level.

[+]: Touch to make image brighter.

[–]: Touch to make image dimmer.

User Settings

When you touch the [User] key from the Setting menu, you can register the User Profiles to personalise

the Favourite/Frequent/Recent Album list data. For details, see the Audio Manual.

MAX983HD

English

Registering/Editing the Data

From the Stored Data menu, you can register the home address, addresses of facilities and places,

routes, track data, and Avoid Areas. You can also edit the data registered.

The registered places or routes can be set as the destination or as the current route.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting menu.

2. Touch the [Stored Data] key to display the Stored Data menu.

Home Location

Registers your home address. You can edit the

registered home address.

To register the Home Location

The Home Location can be registered when the

[Home Location (Add New)] key is displayed.

1. Touch the [Home Location (Add New)] key.

2. Search the location of your home by a similar

way as for entering destinations.

3. Confirm the searched location, edit items if

required, then touch the [OK] key to register it.

[Edit]

Edits the registered Home Location.

•“Show Icon on Map”: Shows/hides the

home icon on the map.

•“Icon”: Changes the icon for the Home

Location.

•“Image”: Specifies the image data for the

Home Location.

•“Sound”: Selects the sound heard when

you get near the Home Location.

•“Direction”: Sets the approach direction for

locations along roads with separated lanes

for each direction.

•“Distance”: Sets the distance for locations

along roads with separated lanes for each

direction.

•“Phone No.”: Registers the telephone

number of your home.

[Store to Favourite]

Registers the Home Location to the Favourite

list.

To edit the Home Location

1. Touch the [Home Location] key.

2. Touch the desired Item, then edit it.

[Edit]

Edits data by a similar way as for registering

the Home Location. ➜ “To register the Home

Location” as Step 3 above.

[Delete]

Deletes the registered Home Location data.

[Store to Favourite]

Registers the Home Location to the Favourite

list.

[OK]

Terminates the editing, then returns to the

previous screen.

[]

Adjust the location by scrolling the map.

Address Book

Registers locations. You can register up to 200

locations, and can also edit the registered

locations.

To register Locations

1. Touch the [Address Book] key.

2. Touch the [None (Add New)] key.

3. Search for the location you wish to register by

a similar way as for entering destinations.

4. Confirm the location found, edit items if

required, then touch the [OK] key to register it.

[Edit]

Edits the Stored Location.

•“Show Icon on Map”: Shows/hides the

Stored Location icon on the map.

•“Name”: Changes the name of the Stored

Location.

•“Icon”: Changes the icon type for the Stored

Location.

•“Image”: Specifies the image data for the

Stored Location.

•“Sound”: Selects the sound heard when

you get near the Stored Location.

•“Direction”: Sets the approach direction for

locations along roads with separated lanes

for each direction.

•“Distance”: Sets the distance at which the

Sound is heard.

•“Phone No.”: Registers the telephone

number of the Stored Location.

•“Group”: Sets the group the Stored

Location belong to.

•“Swap Numbers”: Changes the registration

number of an Address Book entry. The

number of the order of registration is initially

specified automatically. In order to avoid

that entries need to be deleted while

changing the registration number, numbers

can only be swapped with other entries.

Registering/Editing the Data

50 MAX983HD

English

[Store to Favourite]

Registers the Stored Location to the

Favourite list.

Note:

The Address Book can sorted by the registration

number, name, icon, or group. So we recommend

you set these items for your convenience.

To edit a Stored Location

1. Touch the [Address Book] key.

2. Touch the name of the Stored Location you

wish to edit.

By touching the [Sort] key, you can change

the listing order of the Address Book list.

Edit data by a similar way as for registering

data.

➜ “To register Locations” Step 3 (P. 49)

Stored Route

Registers the current route. You can register up

to 5 routes, and can also edit the registered

routes.

To register the current route

Note:

To register the current route, at least one way point

is required.

1. Touch the [Stored Route] key.

2. Touch the [None (Add New)] key.

3. On the displayed confirmation screen, touch

the [Yes] key.

To edit the Stored Route

1. Touch the [Stored Route] key.

2. Touch the name of the Stored Route you wish

to edit.

3. Touch the desired item, then edit it.

[Rename]

Changes the name of the Stored Route.

[Replace]

Replaces the Stored Route with the current

route.

[Delete]

Deletes the Stored Route.

[OK]

Terminates the editing, then returns to the

previous screen.

4. Touch the [OK] key.

Stored Tracking

By touching the [Stored Tracking], you can

settings for show/hide of the Stored Tracking.

The operation procedures are the same as for

the Tracking Display Settings of the Navigation

settings. ➜ “Tracking Display Settings” (P. 46)

Avoid Area

By touching the [Avoid Area] key, you can set an

Avoid Area. The operation procedures are the

same as for the Avoid Area Settings of the

Navigation settings. ➜ “Avoid Area Settings”

(P. 45)

Deleting registered data

You can delete various data stored in the

navigation system.

1. Touch the [Delete Stored Items] key.

2. Touch the item to delete.

[Home Location]

[All Stored Locations]

[All Stored Routes]

[Current Tracking]

[All Stored Trackings]

[All Avoid Areas]

[All Previous Destinations]

[Previous Starting Point]

[All Favourite items]

[All Frequent items]

3. From the displayed confirmation screen,

touch the [Yes] key.

MAX983HD

English

Importing Data Using the SD Card

From the [Import Data] menu, you can import the downloaded data from the website. For more

information about the installation method and the function, see the Clarion homepage.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting menu.

2. Touch the [Import Data] key to display the Import Data menu.

Note:

When you perform the operation of data import, confirm that the SD card on which the relevant data is stored

has been set to the SD card slot.

To use the SD card

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

2. Confirming the orientation of the SD card,

insert the SD card surely to the SD card slot

until it stops.

Note:

For the detailed information on using SD cards, see

the Audio Manual.

CAUTION

Data may be broken when using SD cards in

the following situation:

When disconnecting the SD card or turning

the power off during writing or reading data.

When affected by static electricity or electric

noises.

It is recommended that you back up your

important data to a personal computer by

using the SD card.

Skin

You can import the Skin data stored in the SD

card into the hard disk drive.

Touch the [Import] key of the “Skin” item, then

operate according to the displayed messages.

To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive,

touch the [Delete] key.

Extra POI

You can import the Extra POI data stored in the

SD card into the hard disk drive.

Touch the [Import] key of the “Extra POI” item,

then operate according to the displayed

messages.

To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive,

touch the [Delete] key.

Safety Camera

You can import the location database of Safety

Cameras stored in the SD card to the hard disk

drive. Touch the [Import] key of “Safety

Camera”, then operate according to the

displayed messages. To delete the data imported

to the hard disk drive, touch the [Delete] key.

Note:

•This function displays the locations of Safety

Cameras on the map using the imported location

database of the Safety Camera on the hard disk

drive, and warns that the vehicle approaches the

location. For details, see the Clarion’s homepage.

•Be sure to import the location database of Safety

Cameras while the vehicle is stopped. The

message “Reading Safety Camera data.”

disappears when the import is finished. If the

vehicle starts to move before the message

disappears, the import will be cancelled.

Other data

You can also import the following data:

• Image data

• Album Infromation data

For the detailed information on importing these

data, see the Audio Manual.

52 MAX983HD

English

Service Options

From the [Service Option] menu, you can perform the operation such as displaying a demonstration of

the navigation system, backup or restore of stored data, and resetting to the factory settings.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting menu.

2. Touch the [Service Option] key to display the Service Option menu.

Demonstration

Displays the demonstration of the route

guidance.

“Demo”:

Touch the [Select] key, then touch the desired

demonstration course to play.

Backing up User Data

You can back up the data currently stored in the

navigation system to SD card.

Note:

•This function saves the following data: the data of

the Stored Locations, the route data, the data

registered in Favorite/Frequent list, the setting

data of the Settings menu.

•The recorded music data, Playlist data, and data

imported using SD cards (Skin, Extra POI, etc.)

cannot be backed up.

“Backup User Data”:

When touching the [Backup] key, a screen with

a confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen

displayed.

Restoring User Data

You can restore data backed up using SD card.

Note:

When you perform backup/restore of data of two

different navigation systems, the stored data on the

restored system will be lost. Be sure to back up data

of the system to restore to before performing the

restore operation.

“Restore User Data”:

When touching the [Restore] key, a screen with

confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen.

Resetting to the Factory

Settings

You can return the navigation system to the

status after purchase.

Note:

When the system is reset to the factory settings, all

stored data is erased (including the music data in the

Music Catcher). It is recommended that you backup

all data you want to keep.

“Reset to Factory Setting”:

When touching the [Reset] key, a screen with

confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen.

Software & Map Update

You can update the software and the map data.

“Software & Map Update”:

When touching the [Start] key, a screen with a

message prompting to insert the update disc

appears. Operate according to the guidance on

the screen.

Screen Adjustment

The position and sharpness of the screen can be

adjusted.

“Screen Adjustment”:

After touching the [Adjust] key, adjust the screen

position by touching the [J], [K], [j] and [k] key.

Touch the [1] or [2] key to select a setting at

which the screen is displayed clearly.

MAX983HD

English

Setting Safety Camera

From the Safety Camera menu, you can set the Safety Camera.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting menu.

2. Touch the [Safety Camera] key to display the Safety Camera menu.

3. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“Show Icon on Map”:

Turns ON/OFF the Safety Camera Icon display on the map.

“Warning & Sound”:

Turns ON/OFF both of the warning indication and alarm sound when the vehicle gets near a Safety

Camera location.

“Camera Location”:

Touch the [List] key to display the list of the Safety Camera locations. Touching an item of the list

displays the icon at the location of the Safety Camera on the right map.

Note:

These settings are enabled when the Safety Camera data is stored in the hard disk. ➜ “Safety Camera” (P. 51)

54 MAX983HD

English

7. Favourite/Frequent List

Operations

What is Favourite/Frequent List?

The system has the following 3 shortcut lists:

•Favourite list: You can register your favourite places.

•Frequent list: Destinations frequently entered are automatically registered.

•Recent Album list: Albums recently selected from the Music Search are automatically registered (see

the Audio Manual for details).

You can display these lists by easy operation, and can specify your desired item to set as the destination

or to be played back.

You can also customise these lists when its Angle is set to 2D list screen.

Using Favourite/Frequent List

Favourite/Frequent list

Favourite

You can register up to 16 favourite places. The

favourite places can be registered from the

Frequent by moving icons (drag and drop). In

addition, you can register your home address

from the [Home Location] key of the [Stored

Data] key in the Setting menu, or places from

[Address Book]. ➜ “Home Location” (P. 49),

“Address Book” (P. 49)

Frequent

The system automatically registers the places

entered as the destinations in the past.

Up to 16 places, where the number of times you

entered as destination is higher than others and

the date is newer than others, are registered and

sorted automatically. ➜ “2D List screen” (P. 56)

Displaying Favourite/

Frequent list

To display the Favourite/Frequent list screen,

press the [MENU] button and touch the [ ]

key, or press the [MAP] button and touch the

[NAVI] key, and then touch the [ ] key from

the Navi Shortcut menu.

Touching the [ ] (Favourite) or [ ]

(Frequent) key switches the screen. Large icons

which indicate the category of registered places

are displayed in each screen.

Switching Angle

Touch the [ ] key to switch the viewing angle.

•3D List screen

•2D List screen

Using Favourite/Frequent List

MAX983HD

English

Favourite/Frequent menu

3D List screen

1 [N] [n] key

Scrolls the list to display other icons. Up to 5

icons are displayed on the screen.

2 [ ] (Favourite) key

Switches to the Favourite list screen.

3 [ ] (Frequent) key

Switches to the Frequent list screen.

4 [ ] (Recent Album) key

Switches to the Recent Album list screen.

See the Audio Manual for details.

5 [ ] key

Changes the viewing angle of the screen by

switch to the 2D screen.

6 Icon

Indicates the category of each registered place.

For the rotating icon, the registered name is

displayed at the upper left of the screen. By

touching the desired icon, you can set the

registered place as the destination. ➜

“Searching Your Destination from the

Favourite/Frequent List” (P. 27)

For the Favourite/Frequent list items registered

from the Stored Locations, the name and number

in the Address Book are displayed together with

the icon. If an image data is registered, the image

is displayed instead of the icon.

7 [Back] key

Returns to the previous screen.

8 Registered name/Place name

Displays the registered name, place name, or

facility name of the place which is selected

(rotating icon).

2 3 4 5

Using Favourite/Frequent List

56 MAX983HD

English

2D List screen

1 Icon

Indicates the category of a registered place. The

icon can be moved by touching and dragging it.

Thus, you can change the location of the desired

icon in the list, or drop the desired icon to the

Trash icon to discard it or to the Folder icon to

store it to the Favourite list.

2 [] key

Displayed only on the Frequent list screen.

Touching this key displays the following keys:

“Delete Item”

Changes the Folder icon to the Trash icon. You

can discard the desired icon.

“Sort by Date”

Changes the sorting method of the list to the

order of the registered date.

3 [Back] key

Returns to the 3D List screen.

4 Trash/Folder

In the Favourite list screen, the Trash icon is

displayed. You can discard the desired icon by

dragging and dropping it to the Trash icon.

In the Frequent list screen, the Folder icon is

displayed. You can move the desired icon to the

Favourite list by dragging and dropping it to the

Folder icon.

5 Registered name/Place name

Displays the registered name, place name, or

facility name of the place which is selected.

453

MAX983HD

English

8. Voice Command Operations

This system has a built in voice recognition function. You can perform fundamental operations by saying

the corresponding voice commands.

Note:

•The supported languages by the voice command function are English, French, German, Italian, Dutch and

Spanish. You can perform voice command operations after switching to a supported language.

For details of switching languages, please see the “Language setting” (P. 43).

•When the language setting is set to Swedish, Portuguese, or Denmark, the voice command function is not

available.

Voice Command Features

Voice Command menu

Pressing the [VOICE] button displays the following screen.

1 [D]/[d] key

Displays the previous page or next page of the

Voice Command list. You can also operate by

saying “Previous page” or “Next page”.

2 Voice Command list

This is the list of the commands for voice

operation. The available commands at that time

are displayed in yellow. You cannot operate by

touching this list.

3 [Cancel] key

Cancels the voice recognition, and returns to the

previous screen. You can also achieve this by

saying “Cancel”.

4 [ ] key

Suspends the voice input waiting mode, and

displays the available command list. Touching

this again returns to the voice input waiting mode.

5 [Back] key

Returns to the previous screen. When the voice

command operation is suspended, returns to the

voice input waiting mode.

6 Voice input waiting time indication

bar

Indicates the time remaining of the voice input

waiting mode. Say the desired command during

the blue bar is displayed. The system returns to

the previous screen when the blue bar runs out.

Note:

Various operation advices are displayed according

to the status at the bottom of the screen. You can

refer to them while operating the voice recognition.

2 3

Voice Command Features

58 MAX983HD

English

Example of voice command

operation

This section provides an example of the

destination entry by inputting the location stored

in the Address Book by voice.

1. Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice Command menu screen is

displayed, and the announcement for the user

to say the desired command and a beep

sound are heard. The system enters the voice

input waiting mode.

2. Say “Address book”.

When the voice command is recognised, the

system will respond with a feedback

message, display the list screen of the

Address Book, then enter the voice input

waiting mode again.

Note:

If you say the voice command before a beep sound

is heard, the voice command cannot be recognised.

3. Say the number of the desired list entry.

The registered place of the number said will

be set as the destination.

MAX983HD

English

List of the Voice Commands (Navigation Features)

The following table lists the fundamental

command examples which can be input during

the voice input wait mode entered by pressing

the [VOICE] button, classified by the usage.

Note:

•You can omit the term enclosed by ( ).

•Touching the [ ] key displays the voice

commands usable at that operating condition. You

can refer to them.

●Common voice commands available anytime during voice input

These are the commonly usable commands in any condition during the voice input operation.

●Voice commands for changing the map appearance

Say “(Change)map view”➜ then say the following command.

●Voice commands for changing the map scale

Say “(Change)zoom (level)”/“(Change)scale”➜ then say the following command.

Operation Command

Terminates the voice operation, and displays the

current location map screen. “Map”

“Current Position”, “Display/Show Map”, “Go to

Map”, “(Show me) Where am I”, “Current Location”

Cancels the immediately precedent voice

operation, and returns to the previous voice input

wait mode.

“Back”

Displays the next page of voice command list

displayed on the screen. “Next (page)”

Displays the previous page of voice command list

displayed on the screen. “Previous (page)”

Displays the screen displayed when touching the

[ ] key (Voice Help screen). “(Voice)Help”

“What can I say?”

Operation Command

Displays the 2D map. “2D”

Displays the 3D map. “3D”

Displays the 2D/2D maps on the split screen. “(split screen)2D (and)2D”

Displays the 2D/3D maps on the split screen. “(split screen)2D (and)3D”

Changes the map orientation to heading up. “Heading up”

Changes the map orientation to North up. “North up”

Displays the turn list. “Turn list on”

“Show turn list”

Hides the turn list. “Turn list off”

“Hide turn list”

Turns on the traffic information display on the map

screen. “Show traffic information”

“Traffic information on”

Turns off the traffic information display on the map

screen. “Hide traffic information”

“Traffic information off”

Operation Command

Increases/decreases the map scale by one step. “Zoom in/out”

Changes to the specified map scale. “XX m (scale)” “XX mile (scale)”

Changes the map scale to minimum. “Minimum (scale)”

Changes the map scale to maximum. “Maximum (scale)”

List of the Voice Commands (Navigation Features)

60 MAX983HD

English

●Voice commands for entering destination

Say “(Find) Destination”➜ then say the following command.

●Voice commands for setting voice guidance

These are the commands to change settings of the voice guidance during route guidance.

Operation Command

Sets the home address as the destination. “(My)Home”

“(Go/Return to) (my) home”, “Set destination to

(my) home”

Enters from the Address Book. “(From)Address Book”

Enters from the Nearby POI. “(From)Nearby POI”

Enters from the Previous Destinations. “(From)Previous destination”

Operation Command

Sets the route guidance voice setting to ON. “Voice guidance on”

“Activate (the) voice guidance”

Sets the route guidance voice setting to OFF. “Voice guidance off”

“Deactivate (the) voice guidance”

Increases the volume of the guidance voice. “Voice guidance Volume up”

Decreases the volume of the guidance voice. “Voice guidance Volume down”

Repeats the immediately previous voice

guidance. “Repeat (voice)guidance”

MAX983HD

English

Notes on the Voice Command Operations

• When operating the system by voice, it is

necessary to reduce the surrounding noises to

be recognised correctly. Follow the following

guidelines.

• Close the windows.

• Say commands clearly and correctly toward

the microphone.

• Refrain from other conversations while

voice input.

• After the announcement request to say

commands is heard, say commands during the

blue bar is displayed on the voice input

listening time indication bar. The system

returns to the previous screen when the blue

bar runs out.

• Voice commands may not be recognised

correctly. Use it as an assistance for the

system operation only.

62 MAX983HD

English

9. Others

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Problem Cause Remedy

RDS-TMC

The provider of RDS-TMC is not

automatically selected. The aerial is not connected. Confirm the connection of the

aerial.

[Manual] is selected on the

Select TMC Provider screen. Select [Automatic].

The menu screen is not

displayed. Certain keys/functions are not

available for your safety during

driving.

Menu is displayed again when

the vehicle is stopped in a safe

place.

Too many landmark icons are

displayed on the map. According to system settings,

many landmark icons are

displayed according to the

current location.

You can set the system not to

display landmark icons.

“Landmark Icon display”

(P. 45)

Error Message Cause Remedy

SD Card

ACCESS ERROR

Memory Card access failed The SD card is not set correctly. Set the SD card again.

The SD card is not recognised. Set another SD card.

Hard Disk Drive

HIGH TEMP ERROR

Please wait until the temperature

becomes normal

The HDD cannot be accessed

because the temperature in the

vehicle is extremely high.

Please wait until the temperature

becomes appropriate.

LOW TEMP ERROR

Please wait until the temperature

becomes normal

The HDD cannot be accessed

because the temperature in the

vehicle is extremely low.

Please wait until the temperature

becomes appropriate.

HDD ACCESS ERROR

Please consult a dealer The HDD cannot be accessed.

The sectors or clusters of the

HDD may be damaged.

Please consult you nearest

dealer.

MAX983HD

English

About the Positioning Error

Error of the vehicle position

When the vehicle travels, this system learns the

distance and the direction advanced on the map

from the travelling data and corrects the position

accordingly. (distance coefficient/learning

function). Therefore, some initial travelling data is

required for proper operation. According to the

travelling situation and condition of the GPS

satellites, the position of the vehicle position

mark and the actual vehicle position may be

different, but this is not a malfunction.

Effective method to avoid the

positioning error

When you use the system for the first time,

dislocation may appear as the travelling data is

few. Though, after travelling for a while on a road

where the signal from the GPS satellites can be

received well (such as national roads, principal

main roads, and principal minor roads), the

vehicle position mark will be displayed accurately

on the map. It is possible to train the system in a

short time when applying the following method:

Travel about 15 to 20 km on a smooth road where

there is no barrier in the sky like tall buildings or

forests (GPS signals can be received well) at a

constant speed of 25 km/h or more (try to avoid

frequent acceleration and moderation).

Owner’s manual (Navigation)

Mode d’emploi (Navigation)

Benutzerhandbuch (Navigation)

Manuale dell’utente (Navigazione)

Gebruikershandleiding (Navigatie)

Guía de usuario (Navegación)

Ägarhandbok (Navigation)

Manual do utilizador (Navegação)

Brugervejledning (Navigation)

HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIESYSTEEM

SISTEMA DE NAVEGACIÓN HDD

NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED HÅRDDISK

SISTEMA DE NAVEGAÇÃO COM HDD

(UNIDADE DE DISCO RÍGIDO)

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

QY-5003E-B

2008/5(Y-YI)

MAX983HD

Clarion Co., Ltd.

Printed in Hungary / Imprimé en Hongrie / Gedruckt in Ungarn /

Stampato in Ungheria / Gedrukt in Hongrarije / Impreso en Hungría /

Tryckt i Ungern / Impresso na Hungria / Trykt i Ungarn

560 MAX983HD

Käyttöturvallisuusohjeet

VAROITUS

•Tätä navigointijärjestelmää ei saa käyttää korvaamaan omaa harkintaasi. Mitkään

navigointijärjestelmän antamat reittiehdotukset eivät koskaan saa ohittaa paikallisia

liikennesääntöjä, omaa harkintaasi ja/tai turvallisen ajokäyttäytymisen tapoja. Jätä

noudattamatta navigointijärjestelmän ehdottamia reitityksiä mikäli ne; johtaisivat vaarallisen

tai lainvastaisen ajoliikkeen tekemiseen, saattaisivat sinut vaaralliseen tilanteeseen tai

toimimaan vastoin liikennesääntöjä tai opastaisivat sinut ei-turvalliseksi pitämällesi alueelle.

•Navigointijärjestelmän antamia ohjeita tulee pitää ainoastaan ehdotuksena (ehdotuksina).

Navigointijärjestelmää käytettäessä saattaa syntyä tilanteita joissa; navigointijärjestelmä

ilmoittaa ajoneuvosi sijainnin virheellisesti, jättää ehdottamatta lyhyintä reittiä päämäärääsi

ja/tai se ei anna opastusta haluamaasi määränpäähän. Tällaisissa tilanteissa sinun tulee

tukeutua omaan harkintaasi ajamisessasi ja sinun tulee huomioida kullakin hetkellä

vallitsevat ajo-olosuhteet.

•Älä käytä navigointijärjestelmää hätäpalveluiden reitittämiseen. Järjestelmän tietokanta ei

sisällä täydellistä tiedostoa hätäpalveluiden suorittajista. Tällaisia hätäpalveluiden

suorittajia ovat mm. poliisi, palolaitokset, sairaalat ja ensiapuasemat. Muista käyttää omaa

harkintaasi ja mahdollisuutta kysyä tällaisissa tilanteissa muilta ajo-ohjeita.

•Ajoneuvon kuljettajana vastaat aina itse liikenneturvallisuudestasi.

•Liikenneonnettomuuksien taikka liikennerikkomusten välttämiseksi sinun tulee muistaa,

että vallitsevat liikenneolosuhteet ja liikennesäännöt ovat ensisijaisia

navigointijärjestelmän sisältämään tietoon verrattuna.

•Tästä seuraa, että ohjelmisto saattaa sisältää epätarkkaa tai puutteellista tietoa, joka

johtuu ajan kulumisesta, muuttuneista olosuhteista ja ohjelmiston luomiseen käytettyjen

tietolähteiden luonteesta. Muista aina ajaessasi huomioida vallitsevat liikenneolosuhteet

ja liikennesäännöt.

•Tämä navigointijärjestelmä ei sisällä saatika vastaa millään muodoin; tiedoista, jotka

koskevat tieliikennelainsäädäntöä, nopeusrajoituksia, tieolosuhteita, mukaan lukien tien

kaltevuutta, luokitusta ja/tai tien pinnan olosuhteita, liikennöintiä haittaavien/rajoittavien

tietojen mukaan lukien siltojen ja tunneleiden korkeus- ja leveystietoja ja/tai muita

kulloinkin vallitsevia liikennöinti- ja/tai tieolosuhteista. Muista aina luottaa ajaessasi

omaan harkintaasi ja huomioi kulloinkin vallitsevat ajo-olosuhteet.

•Minimoi ajon aikana järjestelmän näytön katselemiseen käyttämäsi aika.

561

MAX983HD

Sikkerhetsregler

Advarsel

•Dette navigasjonssystemet bør ikke benyttes som en erstatning til Deres egne vurderinger

og veivalg. Navigasjonssystemets anbefaling av rute må aldri benyttes dersom denne er i

strid med eller tilsidesetter lokale trafikkreguleringer, deres egne vurderinger eller skjønn og/

eller gjeldende regler og praksis for sikker kjøring. Se bort fra ruteanbefalinger fra

navigasjonssystemet hvis slike anbefalinger enten skulle medføre at De måtte utføre en

farlig eller ulovlig manøver, sette Dem eller noen i en farlig situasjon, eller dirigere Dem inn

i et område De vurderer som usikkert.

•Anbefalinger som navigasjonssystemet gir må bare anses som forslag. Det kan oppstå

situasjoner hvor navigasjonssystemet feil oppgir kjøretøyets lokasjon, mislykkes med å

foreslå det korteste veivalget og/eller mislykkes i å dirigere Dem til Deres ønskede mål. I slike

situasjoner må De derfor basere Dem på Deres egne vurderinger under hensyn til rådende

kjøreforhold.

•Aldri bruk navigasjonssystemet til å dirigere Dem til nødhjelp og lignende tjenester.

Databasen inneholder ikke en fullstendig oversikt over politistasjoner, brannstasjoner,

sykehus, klinikker eller lignende steder hvor nødhjelp finnes. Vennligst forhold Dem til Deres

egne vurderinger og Deres evne til å spørre om veien ved behov for nødhjelp og lignende

situasjoner.

•Som fører av kjøretøy er De alene ansvarlig for Deres sikkerhet i trafikken.

•For å unngå en trafikkulykke eller en overtredelse av trafikkreglene; husk at de rådende

veiforholdene og trafikkreglene gjelder foran informasjon som finnes i

navigasjonssystemet.

•Programvaren kan inneholde unøyaktig eller ufullstendig informasjon som følge av tidens

løp, endrede forhold, eller som følge av den aktuelle kildens art. Vennligst iaktta de

rådende trafikkforhold og trafikkregler ved all kjøring.

•Navigasjonssystemet tar verken hensyn til eller gjør rede for, på noen som helst måte,

informasjon vedrørende lover og trafikkregler, fartsrestriksjoner, veiforhold inklusive

helling, dosering og/eller veidekke, informasjon om veihinder inklusiv bro- og

tunnelhøyder og – bredder, og/eller andre rådende kjøre- og/eller veiforhold. Baser Dem

derfor alltid på Deres egen vurdering og skjønn under hensyn til rådende kjøreforhold.

•Bruk minst mulig tid til å se på skjermen mens De kjører.

562 MAX983HD

Bezpečnostní opatření

Varování

•Tento navigační systém by neměl nahrazovat váš vlastní úsudek. Bez ohledu na to, jakou

trasu tento navigační systém navrhne, musíte vždy dodržovat dopravní předpisy, řídit se

vlastním úsudkem a dodržovat zásady bezpečného řízení vozidla. V případě, že navigační

systém navrhne trasu, na které byste museli provést riskantní manévr nebo manévr v

rozporu s dopravními předpisy, dostali se do nebezpečné situace nebo by vás trasa zavedla

do oblasti, kterou považujete za nebezpečnou, takovou trasou se neřid’te.

•Trasu navrženou navigačním systémem považujte pouze za doporučení. Může se totiž stát,

že navigační systém nezobrazí správnou polohu vozidla, nenavrhne nejkratší trasu nebo vás

nedovede k požadovanému cíli. V takovém případě se spoléhejte na vlastní úsudek a

zkušenosti a přihlížejte k aktuálním podmínkám jízdy.

•Nepoužívejte navigační systém k navržení trasy k nejbližší nouzové službě. Databáze totiž

neobsahuje kompletní seznam poskytovatelů nouzových služeb (policie, hasičů, nemocnic a

zdravotnických zařízení). V těchto situacích se řid’te vlastním úsudkem a případně se

zeptejte na cestu kolemjdoucích.

•Za bezpečnost na silnici nesete jakožto řidič výhradní odpovědnost.

•Aby nedošlo k dopravní nehodě nebo dopravnímu přestupku, mějte vždy na paměti, že

před informacemi uloženými v navigačním systému mají vždy přednost aktuální podmínky

na silnicích a dopravní předpisy.

•Z důvodu zastarání databáze, změny okolností nebo povahy zdrojů dat může software

také obsahovat nepřesné nebo neúplné informace. Sledujte proto po celou dobu jízdy

aktuální dopravní podmínky a dopravní značení a dodržujte dopravní předpisy.

•Navigační systém neobsahuje ani žádným způsobem nenahrazuje informace o

dopravních předpisech, specifikacích vozidla včetně váhy, výšky, šířky a nákladu a/nebo

omezeních rychlosti, podmínkách na silnicích včetně sklonu, stoupání a stavu vozovky,

informace o překážkách na cestě, například výšku a šířku mostů a tunelů, ani žádné další

obecné informace o podmínkách jízdy a silnic. Vždy se proto spoléhejte na vlastní úsudek

a řidičské zkušenosti a respektujte aktuální dopravní situaci.

•Snažte se sledovat displej za jízdy co nejméně.

563

MAX983HD

Bezpečnostné pokyny

Varovanie

•Tento navigačný systém by nemal nahrádzat’ váš vlastný úsudok. Bez ohl’adu na to, akú

trasu tento navigační systém navrhne, musíte vždy dodržiavat’ dopravné predpisy, riadit’ sa

vlastným úsudkom a dodržiavat’ zásady bezpečného riadenia vozidla. V prípade, že

navigačný systém navrhne trasu, na ktorej by ste museli urobit’ riskantný manéver alebo

manéver v rozpore s dopravnými predpismi, dostali sa do nebezpečnej situácie alebo by vás

trasa zaviedla do oblasti, ktorú považujete za nebezpečnú, takouto trasou sa neriad’te.

•Trasu navrhnutú navigačným systémom považujte iba za odporúčanie. Môže sa totiž stat’,

že navigačný systém nezobrazí správnu polohu vozidla, nenavrhne najkratšiu trasu alebo vás

nedovedie k požadovanému ciel’u. V takomto prípade sa spoliehajte na vlastný úsudok a

skúsenosti a prihliadajte k aktuálnym podmienkam jazdy.

•Nepoužívajte navigačný systém k navrhnutiu trasy k najbližšej núdzovej službe. Databáza

totiž neobsahuje kompletný zoznam poskytovatel’ov núdzových služieb (polície,

požiarnikov, nemocníc a zdravotníckych zariadení). V týchto situáciách sa riad’te vlastným

úsudkom a prípadne sa spýtajte na cestu okoloidúcich.

•Za bezpečnost’ na ceste nesiete ako vodič výhradnú zodpovednost’.

•Aby nedošlo k dopravnej nehode alebo dopravnému priestupku, majte vždy na pamäti, že

aktuálne podmienky na cestách a dopravné predpisy majú vždy prednost’ pred

informáciami uloženými v navigačnom systéme.

•Z dôvodu zastarania databázy, zmeny okolností alebo povahy zdrojov dát môže software

tiež obsahovat’ nepresné alebo neúplné informácie. Sledujte preto po celú dobu jazdy

aktuálne dopravné podmienky a dopravné značenie a dodržiavajte dopravné predpisy.

•Navigačný systém neobsahuje ani žiadnym spôsobom nenahrádza informácie o

dopravných predpisoch, špecifikáciách vozidla vrátane váhy, výšky, šírky a náklade,

obmedzeniach rýchlosti, podmienkach na cestách vrátane sklonu, stúpania a stavu

vozovky, informácie o prekážkach na ceste, napríklad výšku a šírku mostov a tunelov, ani

žiadne d’alšie bežné informácie o podmienkach jazdy a ciest. Vždy sa preto spoliehajte

na vlastný úsudok a skúsenosti s riadením vozidla a rešpektujte aktuálnu dopravnú

situáciu.

•Snažte sa čo najmenej sledovat’ displej za jazdy.

564 MAX983HD

Mjere opreza

Upozorenje

•Ovaj navigacijski sustav ne može se koristiti kao zamjena za vlastitu procjenu. Bilo kakvi

smjerovi koje ovaj navigacijski sustav predloži ne mogu ni u kojem slučaju imati prednost

pred lokalnom prometnom regulacijom, Vašom vlastitom procjenom i/ili znanjima o sigurnoj

vožnji. Zanemarite smjerove koje navigacijski sustav predloži ukoliko biste zbog takvih

prijedloga: morali poduzeti opasnu ili nezakonitu radnju, doveli sebe u opasnu situaciju, ili

bili usmjereni u područje koje smatrate nesigurnim.

•Upute koje daje navigacijski sustav treba smatrati isključivo prijedlozima. Moguće su

situacije kad navigacijski sustav pogrešno pokazuje lokaciju vozila, ne predlaže najkraći put

i/ili Vas ne usmjerava prema željenom odredištu. U takvim situacijama oslonite se na Vašu

vozačku procjenu uzimajući u obzir trenutne uvjete za vožnju.

•Ne koristite navigacijski sustav za usmjeravanje prema hitnim službama. Zbirka podataka ne

sadrži cjelovit popis lokacija hitnih službi kao što su policija, vatrograsne stanice, bolnice i

klinike. Molimo koristite vlastitu procjenu i mogućnost da u takvim situacijama zatražite

upute.

•Kao vozač, Vi ste isključivo odgovorni za Vašu sigurnost na cestama.

•Kako biste izbjegli prometne nesreće odnosno prometni prekršaj, imajte na umu kako

uvjeti na cesti te prometna regulacija imaju prednost pred informacijama sadržanim u

navigacijskom sustavu.

•Slijedom navedenog, program (software) može sadržavati netočne ili nepotpune

informacije uslijed proteka vremena, promijenjenih okolnosti i zbog prirode korištenih

izvora. Molimo motrite stvarne prometne okolnosti i regulaciju za čitavo vrijeme dok

vozite.

•Navigacijski sustav ne daje niti na bilo koji način uzima u obzir prometne i cestovne

propise; specifikacije vozila uključujući masu, visinu, širinu, nosivost i/ili ograničenja

brzine; uvjete na cestama uključujući strminu, uspon i/ili stanje podloge/kolinka; podatke

o preprekama uključujući visinu i širinu mosta ili tunela, i/ili druge značajne uvjete vožnje

i/ili uvjete na cesti. Uvijek se oslanjajte na vlastitu vozačku procjenu uzimajući u obzir

trenutne uvjete vožnje.

•Vrijeme u kojem promatrate ekran za vrijeme vožnje svedite na najmanje moguće.

565

MAX983HD

Varnostne informacije

Opozorilo

•Ta navigacijski sistem ne nadomešča presoje uporabnika. Katerokoli usmeritveno

priporočilo, vsebovano v tem navigacijskem sistemu, ne more nikoli imeti prednosti pred

lokalnimi prometnimi predpisi, pred osebno presojo uporabnika in/ali pred pravili varne

vožnje. V primeru, da bi usmeritvena priporočila, vsebovana v tem navigacijskem sistemu, od

uporabnika zahtevale tvegano ali nezakonito ravnanje, ali bi ga pripeljala v tvegano situacijo

ali na območje, za katerega meni da je nevarno, se usmeritvenih priporočil, vsebovanih v tem

navigacijskem sistemu, ne sme uporabljati.

•Napotek, vsebovan v navigacijskem sistemu, se šteje le kot priporočilo(a). Lahko pride do

situacije, ko navigacijski sistem uporabnika vozila ne postavi na pravo lokacijo, mu ne

pokaže najkrajše možne poti in/ali uporabnika vozila ne usmeri do željenega cilja potovanja.

V takih primerih naj se uporabnik zanese na svojo osebno presojo, pri tem pa naj upošteva

trenutne razmere na cesti.

•Uporabnik ne sme uporabljati navigacijskega sistema za usmerjanje v primeru iskanja

storitev nujne službe. Podatkovna baza ne vsebuje popolnega seznama vseh lokacij nujnih

služb, kot so npr. policija, gasilci, bolnice in klinike. V takšnih primerih naj uporabnik uporabi

lastno presojo in sposobnost, ter v takih primerih prosi za pomoč pri usmeritvah.

•Kot voznik je uporabnik sam odgovoren za svojo prometno varnost.

•Da se izogne nastanku prometne nesreče ali storitvi prometnega prekrška, naj uporabnik

upošteva, da imajo dejanske razmere na cesti in prometni predpisi, prednost pred

informacijami, vsebovanimi v navigacijskem sistemu.

•V tej zvezi, programska oprema lahko vsebuje netočne ali nepopolne podatke zaradi

poteka časa, sprememb okoliščin in glede na vire, ki jih uporablja. Prosimo uporabnika,

da ves čas vožnje upošteva dejanske prometne okoliščine in predpise.

•Navigacijski sistem v nobenem primeru ne zagotavlja in/ali ne vsebuje: informacij, ki se

nanašajo na prometne in cestne predpise; podatkov o vozilu, vključno z maso, višino,

širino, nosilnostjo in/ali hitrostnimi omejitvami; podatkov o razmerah na cesti, vključno s

podatki o naklonu, strmini in/ali cestišču; informacij o ovirah na cesti, vključno z višino in

širino tunelov ter mostov in/ali drugimi obstoječimi voznimi razmerami in razmerami na

cesti. Uporabnik se mora vedno zanesti na lastno presojo, pri tem pa naj upošteva

trenutne razmere na cestah.

•Uporabnik mora znižati čas gledanja na ekran med vožnjo na minimum.

566 MAX983HD

Zasady bezpieczenstwa

Ostrzeżenie

•System nawigacyjny nie powinien stanowić dla użytkownika substytutu jego indywidualnej

oceny sytuacji. Jakiekolwiek wskazówki dotyczące drogi generowane przez system

nawigacyjny nie powinny nigdy zastępować użytkownikowi lokalnych przepisów

drogowych, indywidualnej oceny sytuacji i/lub znajomości zasad bezpiecznej jazdy. Nie

należy brać pod uwagę wskazówek systemu nawigacyjnego, w przypadku gdy miałyby one:

zmusić użytkownika do wykonania niebezpiecznego lub niezgodnego z prawem manewru,

postawić użytkownika w niebezpiecznej sytuacji lub zalecić jazdę na obszarze, który

użytkownik uważa za niebezpieczny.

•Porady generowane przez system nawigacyjny powinny być traktowane wyłącznie jako

sugestie. Mogą zdarzyć się sytuacje, kiedy system nawigacyjny będzie wskazywał

niepoprawną pozycję pojazdu, kiedy nie przedstawi propozycji najkrótszej trasy, i/lub nie

pokieruje użytkownika do wybranego przez niego celu. W takich sytuacjach, użytkownik

powinien opierać się na własnej ocenie sytuacji, biorąc pod uwagę warunki panujące na

drodze.

•Nie należy korzystać z systemu nawigacyjnego w przypadku konieczności dotarcia do

instytucji oferujących pomoc w nagłych wypadkach. Baza danych nie zawiera pełnej listy

instytucji oferujących pomoc w nagłych wypadkach, takich jak: placówki policji i straży

pożarnej, szpitale i przychodnie. Użytkownik musi polegać w tych sytuacjach na własnej

ocenie sytuacji i możliwości uzyskania wskazówek.

•Jako kierowca, użytkownik ponosi wyłączną odpowiedzialność za swoje bezpieczeństwo na

drodze.

•W celu uniknięcia wypadku lub wykroczenia na drodze, użytkownik powinien pamiętać,

że rzeczywiste warunki na drodze i przepisy ruchu drogowego mają pierwszeństwo przed

informacjami zawartymi w systemie nawigacyjnym.

•Tym samym, z powodu upływu czasu, zmieniających się okoliczności oraz ze względu na

naturę wykorzystanych źródeł oprogramowanie może zawierać niedokładne lub niepełne

informacje. W trakcie jazdy należy zawsze mieć na uwadze rzeczywiste warunki na

drodze i przepisy ruchu drogowego.

•System nawigacyjny nie zapewnia, ani w żadnym zakresie nie stanowi, informacji na

temat: przepisów dotyczących ruchu drogowego; właściwości pojazdu, w tym: wagi,

wysokości, szerokości, ładowności, i/lub ograniczeń prędkości; warunków na drodze, w

tym spadku, nachylenia, i/lub jakości nawierzchni; informacji o przeszkodach, w tym o

wysokości i szerokości mostów i tuneli, ani żadnych innych informacji dotyczących

warunków jazdy i/lub warunków drogowych. Użytkownik powinien zawsze polegać na

swojej własnej ocenie sytuacji, uwzględniając panujące warunki na drodze.

•Użytkownik powinien zmniejszyć do minimum czas poświęcany na spoglądanie na ekran

w trakcie jazdy.

567

MAX983HD

Biztonsági óvintézkedések

Figyelmeztetés

•A jelen navigációs rendszer nem helyettesíti az Ön ítélőképességét. A navigációs rendszer

által adott bármilyen útvonaljavaslat nem pótolja a helyi közlekedési szabályokat, az Ön

megítélését és/vagy az Ön biztonságos vezetését. A navigációs rendszer útvonaljavaslatát

hagyja figyelmen kívül, amennyiben az arra vezetne, hogy: önnek veszélyes vagy

szabálysértő manővert kellene végrehajtania, önt veszélyes helyzetbe hozza, illetve önt a

megítélése szerint nem biztonságos helyre vezeti.

•A navigációs rendszer által adott utasítás kizárólag javaslatnak minősül. Előfordulhat, hogy

a navigációs rendszer a jármű helyzetét nem pontosan jelöli, nem vagy nem pontosan

mutatja a legrövidebb útvonalat és/vagy nem vezet a kijelölt célállomásra. Ezekben az

esetekben az adott útviszonyok figyelembevétele mellett hagyatkozzon saját vezetési

tapasztalatára.

•Ne használja a navigációs rendszert arra, hogy az Önt segélyszolgálati helyekre vezesse. A

rendszer nem tartalmaz teljes listát a segélyszolgálatokról, mint amilyen a rendőrség,

tűzoltóság, kórházak és klinikák. Ebben az esetben intézkedjen legjobb belátása szerint és

kérjen tájékoztatást az útirányról.

•A vezető kizárólag saját maga felel a közúti biztonságáért.

•A közlekedési balesetek és szabálysértések elkerülése érdekében mindig tartsa szem

előtt, hogy az aktuális út- és közlekedési viszonyok, közlekedési szabályok elsőbbséget

élveznek a navigációs rendszeren található információkkal szemben.

•Így a szoftver pontatlan vagy hiányos információkat adhat az útvonal idejéből, a változó

körülményekből és az információk természetéből adódóan, ezért az aktuális közlekedési

körülményeket a vezetés teljes időtartama alatt vegye figyelembe.

•A navigációs rendszer nem veszi figyelembe és nem nyújt információt a közlekedési

szabályokra, a gépjárművek súlyára, magasságára, szélességére, rakományára

vonatkozóan, az út viszonyokra, beleértve az emelkedőket, kanyarokat és/vagy útfelületi

viszonyokat.; az akadályokra vonatkozó információk a hidak és alagutak hosszát és

szélességét és/vagy egyéb jellemző közlekedési és/vagy útviszonyokat tartalmazzák.

Vezetés közben mindig saját döntésére hagyatkozzon, figyelembe véve az aktuális

közlekedési viszonyokat.

•Vezetés közben lehetőség szerint a legrövidebb ideig nézze a képernyőt.

568 MAX983HD

PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY

BEFORE USING THE NAVTEQ DATABASE

NOTICE TO THE USER

THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT - AND NOT AN AGREEMENT FOR SALE - BETWEEN YOU AND

NAVTEQ B.V. FOR YOUR COPY OF THE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE, INCLUDING

ASSOCIATED COMPUTER SOFTWARE, MEDIA AND EXPLANATORY PRINTED

DOCUMENTATION PUBLISHED BY NAVTEQ (JOINTLY “THE DATABASE”). BY USING THE

DATABASE, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END USER

LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS

AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE DATABASE, ALONG WITH ALL OTHER ACCOMPANYING

ITEMS, TO YOUR SUP-PLIER FOR A REFUND.

OWNERSHIP

The Database and the copyrights and intellectual property or neighboring rights therein are owned by

NAVTEQ or its licensors. Ownership of the media on which the Database is contained is retained by

NAVTEQ and/or your supplier until after you have paid in full any amounts due to NAVTEQ and/or your

supplier pursuant to this Agreement or similar agreement(s) under which goods are provided to you.

NAVTEQ grants you a non-exclusive license to use the Database for your personal use or, if applicable,

for use in your business’ internal operations. This license does not include the right to grant sub-licenses.

LICENSE GRANT

NAVTEQ grants you a non-exclusive license to use the Database for your personal use or, if applicable,

for use in your business’ internal operations. This license does not include the right to grant sub-licenses.

LIMITATIONS ON USE

The Database is restricted for use in the specific system for which it was created. Except to the extent

explicitly permitted by mandatory laws (e.g. national laws based on the European Software Directive (91/

250) and the Database Directive (96/9)), you may not extract or reutilize substantial parts of the contents

of the Database nor reproduce, copy, modify, adapt, translate, disassemble, decompile, reverse

engineer any portion of the Database. If you wish to obtain interoperability information as meant in (the

national laws based on) the European Software Directive, you shall grant NAVTEQ reasonable

opportunity to provide said information on reasonable terms, including costs, to be determined by

NAVTEQ.

TRANSFER OF LICENSE

You may not transfer the Database to third parties, except when installed in the system for which it was

created or when you do not retain any copy of the Database, and provided that the transferee agrees to

all terms and conditions of this Agreement and confirms this in writing to NAVTEQ. Multi-disc sets may

only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided by NAVTEQ and not as subset thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

NAVTEQ warrants that, subject to the warnings set out below, for a period of 12 months after acquisition

of your copy of the Database, it will perform substantially in accordance with NAVTEQ’s Criteria for

Accuracy and Completeness existing on the date you acquired the Database; these criteria are available

from NAVTEQ at your request. If the Database does not perform in accordance with this limited warranty,

NAVTEQ will use reasonable efforts to repair or replace your non-conforming copy of the Database. If

these efforts do not lead to performance of the Database in accordance with the warranties set out

herein, you will have the option to either receive a reasonable refund of the price you paid for the

Database or to rescind this Agreement. This shall be NAVTEQ’s entire liability and your sole remedy

against NAVTEQ. Except as expressly provided in this section, NAVTEQ does not warrant nor make any

representations regarding the use of results of the use of the Database in terms of its correctness,

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

569

MAX983HD

accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. NAVTEQ does not warrant that the Database is or will be error free.

No oral or written information or advice provided by NAVTEQ, your supplier or any other person shall

create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of the limited warranty described above. The limited

warranty set forth in this Agreement does not affect or prejudice any statutory legal rights that you may

have under the legal warranty against hidden defects.

If you did not acquire the Database from NAVTEQ directly, you may have statutory rights against the

person from whom you have acquired the Database in addition to the rights granted by NAVTEQ

hereunder according to the law of your jurisdiction. The above warranty of NAVTEQ shall not affect such

statutory rights and you may assert such rights in addition to the warranty rights granted herein.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

The price of the Database does not include any consideration for assumption of risk of consequential,

indirect or unlimited direct damages which may arise in connection with your use of the Database.

Accordingly, in no event shall NAVTEQ be liable for any consequential or indirect damages, including

without limitation, loss of revenue, data, or use, incurred by you or any third party arising out of your use

of the Database, whether in an action in contract or tort or based on a warranty, even if NAVTEQ has

been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any event NAVTEQ’s liability for direct damages is

limited to the price of your copy of the Database.

THE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, DO

NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS WHERE YOU HAVE ACQUIRED THE

DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS.

WARNINGS

The Database may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing

circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which

may lead to incorrect results. The Database does not include or reflect information on - inter alia -

neighborhood safety; law enforcement; emergency assistance; construction work; road or lane closures;

vehicle or speed restrictions; road slope or grade; bridge height, weight or other limits; road or traffic

conditions; special events; traffic congestion; or travel time.

GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the jurisdiction, in which you reside at the date of

acquisition of the Database. Should you at that moment reside outside the European Union or

Switzerland, the law of the jurisdiction within the European Union or Switzerland where you acquired the

Database shall apply. In all other cases, or if the jurisdiction where you acquired the Database cannot

be defined, the laws of the Netherlands shall apply. The courts competent at your place of residence at

the time you acquired the Database shall have jurisdiction over any dispute arising out of, or relating to

this Agreement, without prejudice to NAVTEQ’ right to bring claims at your then current place of

residence.

570 MAX983HD

WICHTIG - BITTE LESEN SIE DIESEN LIZENZVERTRAG FÜR ENDBENUTZER VOR

DER VERWENDUNG DER NAVTEQ DATENBANK SORGFÄLTIG DURCH.

HINWEIS FÜR DEN BENUTZER

DAS VORLIEGENDE DOKUMENT IST EIN LIZENZVERTRAG UND KEIN KAUFVERTRAG

ZWISCHEN IHNEN UND NAVTEQ B.V. FÜR IHRE KOPIE DER NAVIGATIONSKARTENDATENBANK

VON NAVTEQ, EINSCHLIESSLICH ZUGEHÖRIGER COMPUTERSOFTWARE, MEDIEN UND VON

NAVTEQ HERAUSGEGEBENER SCHRIFTLICHER UNTERLAGEN ZUR ERLÄUTERUNG

(GEMEINSAM "DIE DATENBANK"). MIT DER VERWENDUNG DER DATENBANK ERKLÄREN SIE

SICH MIT ALLEN BESTIMMUNGEN DIESES LIZENZVERTRAGES FÜR ENDBENUTZER

("VERTRAG") EINVERSTANDEN. FALLS SIE MIT DEN BESTIMMUNGEN DIESES VERTRAGES

NICHT EINVERSTANDEN SIND, GEBEN SIE DIE DATENBANK MIT ALLEN ZUGEHÖRIGEN

MATERIALIEN GEGEN RÜCKERSTATTUNG DES KAUFPREISES BITTE AN IHREN HÄNDLER

ZURÜCK.

EIGENTUMSRECHT

Die Datenbank sowie sämtliche Urheberrechte, geistige Eigentumsrechte oder verwandte Schutzrechte

an der Datenbank stehen im Eigentum von NAVTEQ oder deren Lizenzgebern. Das Eigentumsrecht an

den Medien, auf denen sich die Datenbank befindet, verbleibt bei NAVTEQ und/oder Ihrem Händler, bis

Sie alle Forderungen beglichen haben, die Sie NAVTEQ und/oder Ihrem Händler entsprechend diesem

Vertrag oder ähnlichen Verträgen, unter denen Ihnen Waren bereitgestellt werden, schulden.

LIZENZGEWÄHRUNG

NAVTEQ gewährt Ihnen eine nicht-exklusive Lizenz, die Datenbank zur persönlichen Verwendung oder,

soweit anwendbar, zur internen Verwendung in Ihrem Unternehmen einzusetzen. Die vorliegende

Lizenz berechtigt nicht zur Vergabe von Unterlizenzen.

NUTZUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN

Die Verwendung der Datenbank ist nur in dem spezifischen System gestattet, für das sie entwickelt

worden ist. Soweit durch zwingendes Recht nicht ausdrücklich gestattet (z.B. nationale Gesetze auf

Grundlage der europäischen Software-Richtlinie (91/250/EWG) oder der Datenbank-Richtlinie (96/9/

EG), sind Sie weder berechtigt, wesentliche Teile des Inhalts der Datenbank zu extrahieren oder weiter

zu verwenden, noch Teile der Datenbank zu vervielfältigen, zu kopieren, zu modifizieren, anzupassen,

zu übersetzen, zu zerlegen, zu dekompilieren oder mittels Reverse Engineering zurückzuentwickeln.

Falls Sie Informationen über Interoperabilität gemäß den nationalen Gesetzen, die auf Grundlage der

europäischen Software-Richtlinie erlassen worden sind, erhalten möchten, sind Sie verpflichtet,

NAVTEQ angemessene Gelegenheit zu geben, Ihnen diese Informationen zu angemessenen, von

NAVTEQ festzulegenden Bedingungen und Kosten zur Verfügung zu stellen.

LIZENZÜBERTRAGUNG

Sie sind zu einer Übertragung der Datenbank an Dritte nicht berechtigt. Dies gilt nicht, wenn die

Datenbank auf dem System, für das sie entwickelt worden ist, installiert ist oder wenn Sie keinerlei

Kopien der Datenbank zurückbehalten, vorausgesetzt, dass der Empfänger der Datenbank sich

schriftlich gegenüber NAVTEQ mit sämtlichen Bestimmungen dieses Vertrages einverstanden erklärt.

Die CD-Sätze dürfen nur als kompletter Satz, wie von NAVTEQ bereitgestellt, nicht aber in Teilen

weitergegeben oder verkauft werden.

BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG

NAVTEQ gewährleistet vorbehaltlich der unten aufgeführten Warnungen für die Dauer von 12 Monaten

ab dem Tag, an dem Sie Ihre Kopie der Datenbank erworben haben, dass die Datenbank im

Wesentlichen in Übereinstimmung mit den am Tag Ihres Erwerbes der Datenbank gültigen Kriterien für

Genauigkeit und Vollständigkeit von NAVTEQ funktioniert; diese werden auf Anfrage von NAVTEQ zur

Verfügung gestellt. Falls die Datenbank nicht entsprechend dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung

funktioniert, wird sich NAVTEQ angemessen darum bemühen, Ihre mangelhafte Kopie der Datenbank

zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen. Sollten diese Bemühungen keine Verbesserung der Performance der

Datenbank bewirken, haben Sie die Möglichkeit, eine angemessene Erstattung des von Ihnen

geleisteten Kaufpreises für die Datenbank zu erhalten oder von diesem Vertrag zurückzutreten. Diese

LIZENZVERTRAG FÜR ENDBENUTZER

571

MAX983HD

Möglichkeiten stellen Ihr einziges Rechtsmittel gegen NAVTEQ dar. Soweit in diesem Abschnitt nicht

ausdrücklich anderweitig festgelegt, macht NAVTEQ im Hinblick auf Richtigkeit, Genauigkeit,

Zuverlässigkeit oder in anderer Hinsicht keine weiteren Gewährleistungen oder Zusicherungen

bezüglich der Nutzung der Ergebnisse, die durch die Verwendung der Datenbank erzielt werden.

NAVTEQ gewährleistet nicht, dass die Datenbank ohne jeglichen Fehler ist oder sein wird. Die

vorstehende beschränkte Gewährleistung wird durch mündliche oder schriftliche Informationen oder

Ratschläge seitens NAVTEQ, Ihrem Händler oder anderen Personen in keinem Fall ergänzt oder

erweitert. Soweit Sie gesetzliche Gewährleistungsrechte für versteckte Fehler haben, werden diese

durch die in diesem Vertrag festgelegte beschränkte Gewährleistung nicht berührt.

Falls Sie die Datenbank nicht direkt von NAVTEQ erworben haben, haben Sie möglicherweise

zusätzlich zu den von NAVTEQ laut dem vorliegenden Vertrag gewährten Rechten nach nationaler

Rechtsprechung Ihres Landes weitere gesetzliche Gewährleistungsrechte gegenüber der Person, von

der Sie die Datenbank erworben haben. Die vorstehende Gewährleistung von NAVTEQ lässt derartige

gesetzliche Gewährleistungsrechte unberührt, und Sie sind berechtigt, derartige Rechte zusätzlich zu

den nach diesem Vertrag gewährten Gewährleistungsrechten geltend zu machen.

HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNG

Der Preis für die Datenbank umfasst nicht die Übernahme des Risikos von Folgeschäden, mittelbaren

Schäden oder unbegrenzten unmittelbaren Schäden, die in Zusammenhang mit Ihrer Verwendung der

Datenbank entstehen können. NAVTEQ haftet daher in keinem Fall für Folgeschäden oder mittelbare

Schäden, einschließlich - aber nicht beschränkt auf - Gewinnverlust, Datenverlust oder Nutzungsausfall,

die durch Sie oder Dritte in Folge der Verwendung der Datenbank entstehen können, selbst wenn

NAVTEQ auf die Möglichkeit solcher Schäden hingewiesen worden ist. Die vorstehende

Haftungsbeschränkung besteht für sämtliche Ansprüche aus sämtlichen Rechtsgründen, gleich ob aus

Vertrag, unerlaubter Handlung oder Gewährleistung. Darüber hinaus ist die Haftung von NAVTEQ für

unmittelbare Schäden in jedem Fall auf die Höhe des von Ihnen für Ihre Kopie der Datenbank bezahlten

Kaufpreises beschränkt.

SOWEIT SIE DIE DATENBANK NICHT IM RAHMEN EINER GESCHÄFTSTRANSAKTION

ERWORBEN HABEN, LÄSST DIE IN DIESEM VERTRAG FESTGELEGTE BESCHRÄNKTE

GEWÄHRLEISTUNG UND HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNG IHRE GESETZLICHEN RECHTE

UNBERÜHRT.

WARNUNG

Die Datenbank gibt die Wirklichkeit wieder, wie sie vor Ihrem Erwerb der Datenbank bestanden hat, und

enthält Daten und Informationen von staatlichen und anderen Quellen, die Fehler oder Auslassungen

aufweisen können. Die Datenbank kann daher wegen Änderungen, die im Lauf der Zeit eingetreten sind,

wegen geänderter Umstände oder der Art der genutzten Quellen ungenaue oder unvollständige

Informationen enthalten. Die Datenbank enthält keinerlei Informationen über - unter anderem - die

Sicherheit der Umgebung, Verfügbarkeit und Anwesenheit der Polizei, Hilfe im Notfall, Bauarbeiten,

Absperrungen von Straßen und Spuren, Fahrzeugtyp- oder Geschwindigkeitsbeschränkungen,

Straßengefälle oder Straßenneigungen, Brückenhöhen, Gewichts- oder andere Beschränkungen,

Straßen- oder Verkehrsbedingungen, besondere Ereignisse, Verkehrsstaus oder Reisezeiten.

GELTENDES RECHT

Dieser Vertrag unterliegt jener Rechtsprechung, in der Sie zum Zeitpunkt des Erwerbs der Datenbank

Ihren Wohnsitz haben. Haben Sie zu diesem Zeitpunkt Ihren Wohnsitz außerhalb der Europäischen

Union oder der Schweiz, gilt das Recht jenes Landes innerhalb der Europäischen Union oder der

Schweiz, in dem Sie die Datenbank erworben haben. In allen übrigen Fällen oder in Fällen, in denen die

Rechtsprechung, in der Sie die Datenbank erworben haben, nicht festgestellt werden kann, gilt das

niederländische Recht. Für Rechtsstreitigkeiten im Zusammenhang mit diesem Vertrag gilt die

Zuständigkeit jenes Gerichts, an dem Sie zum Zeitpunkt des Erwerbs der Datenbank Ihren Wohnsitz

haben; NAVTEQ ist darüber hinaus berechtigt, Klagen auch an dem Gericht Ihres damaligen

Wohnsitzes einzureichen.

572 MAX983HD

VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE A L’USAGE DE

L’UTILISATEUR FINAL AVANT D’UTILISER LA BASE DE DONNEES NAVTEQ

NOTE POUR L’UTILISATEUR

CECI EST UN CONTRAT DE LICENCE – ET NON UN CONTRAT DE VENTE – ENTRE VOUS ET LA

SOCIETE NAVTEQ B.V. POUR VOTRE COPIE DE LA BASE DE DONNEES NAVIGABLE DE NAVTEQ

Y COMPRIS LE LOGICIEL QUI Y EST ASSOCIE, LE SUPPORT ET LA DOCUMENTATION IMPRIMEE

EXPLICATIVE PUBLIEE PAR NAVTEQ (COLLECTIVEMENT DESIGNES PAR “LA BASE DE

DONNEES”). EN UTILISANT LA BASE DE DONNEES, VOUS ACCEPTEZ LES TERMES ET

CONDITIONS DE CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR L’UTILISATEUR FINAL (“CONTRAT”). SI VOUS

N’ACCEPTEZ PAS LES TERMES DE CE CONTRAT, VEUILLEZ RETOURNER À VOTRE

FOURNISSEUR, DANS LES MEILLEURS DELAIS, LA BASE DE DONNEES AINSI QUE TOUS LES

ELEMENTS QUI L’ACCOMPAGNENT AFIN D’EN OBTENIR LE REMBOURSEMENT.

PROPRIETE

La Base de données ainsi que les droits de propriété intellectuelle et les droits d’auteur ou les droits

voisins qui y sont attachés sont détenus par NAVTEQ ou par ses concédants de licences. La propriété

du support contenant la Base de données est conservée par NAVTEQ et/ou votre fournisseur jusqu’à

ce que vous ayez intégralement payé les sommes dues à NAVTEQ et/ou à votre fournisseur

conformément au présent Contrat ou à tout autre contrat similaire aux termes duquel les biens vous ont

été remis.

CONCESSION DE LICENCE

NAVTEQ vous concède une licence non exclusive d’utilisation de la Base de données pour votre usage

personnel ou, le cas échéant, pour un usage professionnel interne. Cette licence ne comprend pas le

droit de concéder des sous-licences.

LIMITES SUR L’UTILISATION

L’utilisation de la Base de données est limitée au système spécifique pour lequel elle a été créée. A

l’exception des dispositions expressément prévues par la loi (par exemple, les dispositions des

législations nationales transposant les Directives européennes 91/250 portant sur les logiciels et 96/9

portant sur les Bases de données), vous n’êtes pas autorisé à extraire ou à réutiliser une ou plusieurs

parties substantielles du contenu de la Base de données, ni à reproduire, copier, modifier, adapter,

traduire, désassembler, décompiler, pratiquer l’ingénierie inverse d’une quelconque partie de la Base de

données. Si vous souhaitez obtenir des informations nécessaires à l’interopérabilité conformément aux

dispositions (du Code de la propriété intellectuelle après transposition) de la Directive européenne sur

les logiciels, vous devrez laisser à NAVTEQ la possibilité de vous fournir lesdites informations, dans des

délais et conditions raisonnables, y compris au regard des frais, qui seront déterminés par NAVTEQ.

TRANSFERT DE LICENCE

Vous n’êtes pas autorisé à transférer la Base de données à des tiers, sauf lorsqu’elle est installée dans

le système pour lequel elle a été créée ou dans le cas où vous ne conserveriez aucune copie de la Base

de données et à condition que le cessionnaire accepte les termes et conditions du présent Contrat et

confirme cette acceptation par écrit à NAVTEQ. Les coffrets de disques ne peuvent être transférés ou

vendus que complets, tels que fournis par NAVTEQ, et non en disques séparés.

GARANTIE LIMITEE

NAVTEQ garantit que, sous réserve des Avertissements prévus ci-dessous, pour une période de 12

mois à compter de la date d’acquisition de votre copie de la Base de données, cette dernière

fonctionnera pour l’essentiel conformément aux Critères de précision et d’exhaustivité de NAVTEQ en

NAVTEQ sur votre demande. Si la Base de données ne fonctionne pas conformément à cette garantie

limitée, NAVTEQ s’efforcera, dans une limite raisonnable, de réparer ou de remplacer votre copie non

conforme de la Base de données. Si ces efforts ne permettent pas d’obtenir que la Base de données

fonctionne conformément aux garanties prévues aux présentes, vous aurez la possibilité, soit d’obtenir

un remboursement raisonnable du prix que vous avez payé pour la Base de données, soit de résilier le

présent Contrat. Ceci constitue le seul engagement de responsabilité de NAVTEQ et votre seul recours

à l’encontre de NAVTEQ. A l’exception des dispositions expresses du présent paragraphe, NAVTEQ ne

CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR L’UTILISATEUR FINAL

573

MAX983HD

donne aucune garantie et ne fait aucune déclaration concernant l’utilisation ou les résultats de

l’utilisation de la Base de données en ce qui concerne son exactitude, sa précision, sa fiabilité ou toute

autre qualité. NAVTEQ ne garantit pas que la Base de données est ou sera exempte de toute erreur.

Aucune information ou conseil oral ou écrit fournis par NAVTEQ, votre fournisseur ou une quelconque

autre personne ne saurait constituer une garantie ni engager NAVTEQ ou accroître le champ de la

garantie limitée décrite ci-dessus. La garantie limitée prévue dans le présent Contrat est sans préjudice

des droits dont vous pouvez bénéficier en vertu de la garantie légale contre les vices cachés.

Si vous n’avez pas directement acquis la Base de données auprès de NAVTEQ, vous pouvez bénéficier,

selon les textes en vigueur dans votre pays, de droits à l’égard de la personne auprès de laquelle vous

avez acquis la Base de données en plus des droits ci-dessus concédés par NAVTEQ. La garantie de

NAVTEQ prévue ci-dessus n’affectera pas ces droits. Vous êtes autorisé à vous prévaloir de tels droits

en plus de ceux accordés par la présente garantie.

LIMITE DE RESPONSABILITE

Le prix de la Base de données n’inclut aucune considération relative à la contrepartie d’un quelconque

risque lié à des dommages indirects ou consécutifs ou à des dommages directs illimités pouvant survenir

à l’occasion de votre utilisation de la Base de données. Par conséquent, NAVTEQ ne sera en aucun cas

responsable des dommages consécutifs ou indirects y compris, notamment, la perte de profit, de

données ou l’impossibilité d’utiliser la Base de données, subis par vous ou tout tiers, résultant de votre

utilisation de la Base de données, et ceci, que l’action soit intentée sur un fondement contractuel ou

délictuel ou fondée sur une garantie, même si NAVTEQ a été avisé de l’éventualité de tels dommages.

En tout état de cause, la responsabilité de NAVTEQ pour tout dommage direct sera limitée au prix de

votre copie de la Base de données.

LA GARANTIE LIMITEE AINSI QUE LA LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE PREVUES DANS LE

PRESENT CONTRAT SONT SANS PREJUDICE DE VOS DROITS SI VOUS AVEZ ACQUIS LA BASE

DE DONNEES DANS UN CADRE AUTRE QUE PROFESSIONNEL.

AVERTISSEMENTS

La Base de données reflète la réalité telle qu’elle existait avant que vous ne receviez la Base de

données. Elle contient des données et informations provenant de services publics administratifs et

d’autres sources qui peuvent contenir des erreurs ou des omissions. Par consé-quent, la Base de

données peut contenir des informations rendues incomplètes ou inexactes au cours du temps ou en

raison des circonstances et de la nature des sources utilisées.

La Base de données ne contient ou ne reflète aucune information sur, notamment, la sécurité du

voisinage, la proximité de services de police ou d’assistance d’urgence, les travaux de construction, la

fermeture de routes ou de voies de circulation, les limitations de vitesse et autres restrictions concernant

les automobiles, la déclivité ou le degré d’inclinaison des routes, les limitations de hauteur, de poids ou

autres restrictions concernant les ponts, les conditions de circulation routière, les événements

particuliers, les embouteillages routiers ou les durées de voyage.

LOI APPLICABLE

Ce contrat est régi par le droit du pays dans lequel vous résidez lors de l’acquisition de la Base de

données. Si à ce moment vous résidez en dehors de l’Union européenne ou de la Suisse, le droit

applicable sera celui en vigueur dans le pays de l’Union européenne ou en Suisse si vous avez acquis

la Base de données dans l’un de ces pays. Dans tous les autres cas, ou si le pays dans lequel vous avez

acquis la Base de données ne peut être déterminé, le droit des Pays-Bas sera applicable. Le tribunal

compétent du ressort dans lequel vous résidez le jour où vous avez fait l’acquisition de la Base de

données sera seul compétent pour tout litige découlant de ou en relation avec ce contrat, sans préjudice

pour NAVTEQ du droit d’intenter une action devant le tribunal du lieu de votre résidence au moment du

litige.

574 MAX983HD

LEGGERE ATTENTAMENTE IL PRESENTE CONTRATTO DI LICENZA PER L’UTENTE

FINALE PRIMA DI UTILIZZARE IL DATABASE NAVTEQ

NOTA PER L’UTENTE

QUESTO È UN CONTRATTO DI LICENZA – E NON UN CONTRATTO DI VENDITA – FRA LEI

(UTENTE FINALE) E LA NAVTEQ B.V. PER LA SUA COPIA DEL DATABASE DELLA MAPPA DI

NAVIGAZIONE NAVTEQ, COMPRENDENTE IL RELATIVO SOFTWARE PER COMPUTER, I

SUPPORTI E LA DOCUMENTAZIONE STAMPATA ESPLICATIVA PUBBLICATA DA NAVTEQ (NEL

PROSIEGUO COLLETTIVAMENTE DENOMINATI “IL DATABASE”). IN SEGUITO ALL’UTILIZZO DEL

DATABASE, LEI CONVIENE E ACCETTA TUTTE LE CLAUSOLE E LE CONDIZIONI DEL PRESENTE

CONTRATTO DI LICENZA PER L’UTENTE FINALE (“CONTRATTO”). QUALORA LEI NON SIA

D’ACCORDO CON LE CLAUSOLE DI QUESTO CONTRATTO, RESTITUISCA SENZA INDUGIO IL

DATABASE, UNITAMENTE A TUTTO IL MATERIALE E ALLA DOCUMENTAZIONE CHE LO

ACCOMPAGNANO, AL SUO FORNITORE PER IL RIMBORSO.

DIRITTI DI PROPRIETÀ

Il Database nonché i diritti di autore e di proprietà intellettuale o diritti connessi che vi sono collegati sono

di proprietà della NAVTEQ o dei Suoi licenziatori. La proprietà dei supporti nei quali il Database è

contenuto resta in capo alla NAVTEQ e/o al Suo fornitore, fino a che Lei non abbia pagato integralmente

ogni somma dovuta alla NAVTEQ e/o al Suo fornitore in base al presente contratto o in base a contratti

simili, in esecuzione dei quali i beni Le sono stati forniti.

CONCESSIONE DELLA LICENZA

NAVTEQ Le concede una licenza non esclusiva per l’uso personale del Database o, se del caso, per

l’uso nell’ambito delle attività interne della Sua impresa. Questa licenza non include il diritto di concedere

sublicenze.

LIMITAZIONI ALL’USO

L’uso del Database è limitato al sistema specifico per il quale è stato creato. Ad eccezione di quanto

esplicitamente permesso da leggi obbligatorie (per esempio, leggi nazionali basate sulla Direttiva

Europea in materia di software n. 91/250, e la Direttiva sui Database, n. 96/9), Lei si impegna a non

estrarre o riutilizzare parti sostanziali del contenuto del Database, né a riprodurre, copiare, modificare,

adattare, tradurre, disassemblare, decompilare, deingegneri-zzare qualsiasi parte del Database.

Qualora Lei desideri ottenere informazioni sulla interoperabilità nel significato attribuito dalla (legge

nazionale basata sulla) Direttiva Comunitaria sul software, Lei dovrà offrire alla NAVTEQ una

opportunità ragionevole di fornirle tali informazioni a condizioni ragionevoli, inclusi i costi, quali

determinate da NAVTEQ.

CESSIONE DELLA LICENZA

Le è fatto divieto di trasferire il Database a terzi, tranne nel caso in cui esso sia installato nel sistema per

il quale è stato creato o quando Lei non abbia trattenuto alcuna altra copia del Database e, a condizione

che il cessionario accetti tutte le clausole e le condizioni di questo contratto e lo confermi per iscritto a

NAVTEQ. I set di CD possono essere venduti o ceduti esclusivamente come set completi e come forniti

da NAVTEQ. I CD che li compongono non possono essere venduti separatamente.

GARANZIA LIMITATA

NAVTEQ garantisce che, salvo quanto stabilito nell’avvertenza di cui in calce, per un periodo di dodici

mesi dalla data di acquisto della Sua copia del Database, le prestazioni dello stesso saranno conformi

ai criteri di accuratezza e completezza di NAVTEQ in vigore alla data in cui Lei ha acquistato il Database;

questi criteri Le saranno messi a disposizione da NAVTEQ a Sua richiesta. Se le prestazioni del

Database non corrispondono a questa garanzia limitata, NAVTEQ farà ogni ragionevole sforzo per

prestazione del Database in conformità alle garanzie qui assunte, Lei avrà l’opzione tra ricevere una

restituzione ragionevole del prezzo pagato per il Database oppure risolvere questo contratto. Ciò

costituirà l’intera respons-abilità di NAVTEQ e il Suo unico rimedio contro NAVTEQ. Ad eccezione di

quanto esplicitamente previsto in questa clausola, NAVTEQ non garantisce né fa alcuna affermazione

riguardo l’uso o i risultati dell’uso del Database in termini di correttezza, accuratezza, affidabilità od altro.

NAVTEQ non garantisce che il Database sia o sarà senza errori. Nessuna informazione orale o scritta

CONTRATTO DI LICENZA ALL'UTENTE FINALE

575

MAX983HD

e nessun consiglio fornito da NAVTEQ, dal Suo fornitore o da qualsiasi altra persona costituiranno una

garanzia o in qualsiasi modo un ampliamento dell’ambito della garanzia limitata sopra descritta. La

garanzia limitata accordata in questo contratto non incide né pregiudica alcun diritto derivante dalla

legge, che Lei possa vantare in relazione alla garanzia legale contro i difetti occulti.

Se Lei non ha acquistato il Database direttamente da NAVTEQ, Lei può avere un diritto, se previsto dalla

legge, nei confronti della persona dalla quale Lei ha acquistato il Database, in aggiunta ai diritti concessi

da NAVTEQ con questo contratto, secondo il diritto della giurisdizione in cui Lei risiede. Questa garanzia

di NAVTEQ non inciderà su tali pretese legali e Lei potrà far valere tali diritti in aggiunta ai diritti di

garanzia qui riconosciuti.

LIMITAZIONE DELLA RESPONSABILITÀ

Il prezzo del Database non comprende alcun compenso per la copertura del rischio relativo a danni

conseguenti, indiretti o diretti illimitati, che possano derivare in relazione all’uso che Lei fa del Database.

Di conseguenza, in nessun caso NAVTEQ sarà responsabile per alcun danno conseguente o indiretto,

inclusa senza tassatività la perdita di profitto, di dati o dell’utilizzo, subìti da Lei o da qualsiasi terzo e

derivanti dall’uso da Lei fatto del Database, fatti valere con una azione contrattuale od extra contrattuale

oppure basati su una azione in garanzia, anche qualora NAVTEQ sia stata avvertita della possibilità di

tali danni. In ogni caso la responsabilità di NAVTEQ per i danni diretti è limitata al costo dalla Sua copia

del Database.

LA GARANZIA LIMITATA E LA LIMITAZIONE DELLA RESPONSABILITÀ STABILITE IN QUESTO

CONTRATTO NON INCIDONO NÉ PREGIUDICANO I SUOI DIRITTI LEGALI, QUALORA LEI ABBIA

ACQUISITO IL DATABASE NON NELL’ESERCIZIO DI UNA ATTIVITÀ PROFESSIONALE.

AVVERTENZA

Il Database rispecchia le condizioni esistenti prima che Lei abbia ricevuto il Database e comprende dati

ed informazioni dagli organismi pubblici od altre fonti, che possono contenere errori od omissioni. Di

conseguenza il Database può contenere informazioni non accurate od incomplete a causa del

trascorrere del tempo, di mutate circostanze e della natura delle fonti utilizzate. Il Database non

comprende né rispecchia – tra l’altro – informazioni sulla sicurezza del territorio; l’applicazione della

legge; assistenza di emergenza; lavori di costruzioni; chiusura di strade o corsie; limitazioni relative al

tipo di veicolo o alla velocità; pendenze stradali o declivi; altezza, larghezza od altri limiti dei ponti;

condizioni delle strade o del traffico; eventi speciali; congestioni del traffico o durata del viaggio.

DIRITTO APPLICABILE

Questo contratto sarà disciplinato dalle leggi della giurisdizione in cui Lei risiede all’acquisto del

Database. Se in quel momento Lei risiede al di fuori dell’Unione Europea o della Svizzera si

applicheranno le norme dello Stato membro dell’Unione o della Svizzera dove Lei ha acquistato il

Database. In tutti gli altri casi, o se non può essere stabilito lo Stato nel quale Lei ha acquistato il

Database, si applicheranno le norme del diritto olandese. I Tribunali competenti nel luogo della Sua

residenza al momento dell’acquisto del Database avranno giurisdizione su ogni questione che sorga dal

o relativa a questo contratto, senza pregiudizio al diritto di NAVTEQ di iniziare l’azione nel Suo luogo di

residenza attuale.

576 MAX983HD

LEES DEZE GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST GOED DOOR VOORDAT U DE

NAVTEQ DATABASE GEBRUIKT

KENNISGEVING AAN DE GEBRUIKER

DIT IS EEN GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST - EN GEEN KOOPOVEREENKOMST – TUSSEN U

EN NAVTEQ B.V. MET BETREKKING TOT UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE NAVTEQ

WEGENKAARTDATABASE, INCLUSIEF VERWANTE COMPUTERSOFTWARE, DRAGERS EN

BIJBEHOREND SCHRIFTELIJK MATERIAAL TER UITLEG ZOALS DIT DOOR NAVTEQ WORDT

UITGEGEVEN (TEZAMEN ‘DE DATABASE’). DOOR HET GEBRUIK VAN UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE

DATABASE, STEMT U IN MET ALLE BEPALINGEN VAN DEZE GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST

(‘OVEREENKOMST’). INDIEN U NIET INSTEMT MET DE BEPALINGEN VAN DEZE

OVEREENKOMST, DIENT U UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE DATABASE ONMIDDELLIJK TE

RETOURNEREN AAN UW LEVERANCIER, TEGEN RESTITUTIE VAN DE LICENTIEVERGOEDING.

EIGENDOM

U erkent dat de Database, alsmede de auteursrechten en intellectuele eigendom, naburige rechten of

soortgelijke rechten daarop, berusten bij NAVTEQ of haar licentieverleners. De eigendom van de fysieke

dragers waarop de Database is vastgelegd berust bij NAVTEQ en/of uw leverancier, tot het moment dat

u de volledige vergoeding aan NAVTEQ of uw leverancier hebt betaald die u bent verschuldigd uit

hoofde van deze Overeenkomst of vergelijkbare overeenkomst(en) op basis waarvan u zaken hebt

ontvangen.

VERLENING VAN HET GEBRUIKSRECHT

NAVTEQ verleent u een niet-exclusief recht tot gebruik van de Database, voor uw eigen gebruik of,

indien van toepassing, voor intern gebruik binnen uw bedrijf. Het is u niet toegestaan ter zake van het

aan u verleende gebruiksrecht sublicenties te verlenen.

BEPERKINGEN OP HET GEBRUIK

De Database is uitsluitend bedoeld voor gebruik op het specifieke systeem waarvoor de Database

ontwikkeld is. Behoudens voor zover uitdrukkelijk toegestaan op grond van dwingendrechtelijke

wetgeving (zoals nationale wetgeving gebaseerd op de Europese Software Richtlijn (91/250/EEG) en

de Europese Databanken Richtlijn (96/9/EG)), zult u substantiële onderdelen van de inhoud van de

Database niet opvragen of hergebruiken, noch enig deel van de Database verveelvoudigen, kopiëren,

veranderen, aanpassen, vertalen, aan reverse engineering onderwerpen, decompileren of

disassembleren. Indien u de in (nationale wetgeving gebaseerd op) de Software Richtlijn bedoelde

informatie die vereist is om interoperabiliteit te bewerkstelligen wenst te verkrijgen, dient u NAVTEQ

redelijkerwijs in de gelegenheid te stellen u de bedoelde informatie te verschaffen, op redelijke

voorwaarden, waaronder begrepen een redelijke vergoeding.

OVERDRACHT VAN HET GEBRUIKSRECHT

Het is u niet toegestaan de Database over te dragen aan derden, behoudens wanneer de Database is

geïnstalleerd op het systeem waar het voor ontwikkeld is of wanneer u geen kopie van de Database

behoudt na de overdracht, en in ieder geval alleen indien degene aan wie wordt overgedragen alle

bepalingen van deze OVEREENKOMST aanvaardt, en dit schriftelijk aan NAVTEQ bevestigt. CD-sets

mogen uitsluitend worden overgedragen of verkocht als complete set zoals geleverd door NAVTEQ en

niet in delen daarvan.

BEPERKTE GARANTIE

NAVTEQ garandeert, met inachtneming van de waarschuwingen zoals hieronder uiteengezet, dat de

Database gedurende een periode van 12 maanden na verkrijging van uw exemplaar van de Database,

Volledigheid’ van NAVTEQ, geldend op de datum waarop u uw exemplaar van de Database hebt

verkregen; deze ’Criteria voor Nauwkeurigheid en Volledigheid’ worden u op uw verzoek ter beschikking

gesteld door NAVTEQ. Indien de Database niet functioneert in overeenstemming met deze beperkte

garantie, zal NAVTEQ zich redelijkerwijs inspannen om uw niet-werkende exemplaar van de Database

te repareren of te vervangen. Indien de Database na deze inspanningen niet functioneert in

overeenstemming met de garantie zoals hierboven beschreven, hebt u de keuze tussen het verkrijgen

van een redelijke vergoeding van de prijs die u hebt betaald voor de Database of ontbinding van deze

GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST MET EINDGEBRUIKERS

577

MAX983HD

Overeenkomst. Het voorgaande is NAVTEQ’s totale aansprakelijklheid en uw enige

verhaalsmogelijkheid jegens NAVTEQ. Behoudens voorzover uitdrukkelijk bepaald in dit artikel, verleent

NAVTEQ geen enkele garantie met betrekking tot het gebruik van de Database of de resultaten die u

met behulp van de Database kunt verkrijgen, in de zin van foutloosheid, nauwkeurigheid,

betrouwbaarheid of anderszins. NAVTEQ garandeert niet dat de Database foutloos is of zal zijn.

Mondelinge of schriftelijke informatie of adviezen die u door NAVTEQ, uw leverancier of door enige

andere persoon worden verstrekt, houden geen garanties in, binden NAVTEQ in geen enkel opzicht en

houden geen uitbreiding van de hierboven omschreven beperkte garantie in. De in deze Overeenkomst

omschreven beperkte garantie laat rechten die u kunt ontlenen aan eventueel toepasselijke bepalingen

van dwingend recht met betrekking tot verborgen gebreken onverlet.

Indien u de Database niet rechtstreeks van NAVTEQ hebt afgenomen, is het mogelijk dat u naast de

rechten aan u verleend door NAVTEQ in deze Overeenkomst, wettelijke verhaalsmogelijkheden hebt

tegen de persoon van wie u de Database hebt verkregen op grond van het toepasselijke recht in uw

jurisdictie. De beperkte garantie van NAVTEQ tast deze wettelijke verhaalsmogelijkheden niet aan en u

mag deze verhaalsacties uitoefenen naast een beroep op de garantie uit deze Overeenkomst.

BEPERKING VAN AANSPRAKELIJKHEID

De prijs van de Database is niet berekend op dekking van risico’s van gevolgschade, indirecte schade

of onbeperkte directe schade als gevolg van uw gebruik van de Database. Derhalve zal NAVTEQ in

geen geval jegens u aansprakelijk zijn wegens gevolgschade of indirecte schade, waaronder begrepen

maar niet beperkt tot schade in de vorm van gederfde inkomsten, verlies van gegevens of van gebruik

voor u of een derde voortvloeiend uit het gebruik van de Database, hetzij in een onrechtmatige

daadsactie, hetzij in een contractuele actie hetzij gebaseerd op een garantie, ook al was NAVTEQ op

de hoogte gesteld van de mogelijkheid van het intreden van zulke schade. In ieder geval is de

aansprakelijkheid van NAVTEQ voor directe schade beperkt tot het bedrag dat u hebt betaald voor het

verkrijgen van de Database.

DE BEPERKTE GARANTIE EN DE BEPERKING VAN AANSPRAKELIJKHEID, ZOALS OPGENOMEN

IN DEZE OVEREENKOMST LATEN ONVERLET ALLE RECHTEN DIE U KUNT ONTLENEN AAN

EVENTUEEL TOEPASSELIJKE DWINGENDRECHTELIJKE WETGEVING WANNEER U DE

DATABASE ANDERS DAN IN DE UITOEFENING VAN EEN BEDRIJF HEBT VERKREGEN.

WAARSCHUWINGEN

De Database is een weergave van de realiteit zoals die bestond voordat u de Database verkreeg en

deze is opgebouwd uit gegevens en informatie van de overheid en andere bronnen, die onjuist of

onvolledig kunnen zijn. Door verloop van tijd, gewijzigde omstandigheden of vanwege de aard van de

bronnen is het derhalve mogelijk dat de Database onjuiste of onvolledige gegevens of informatie bevat.

De Database bevat of geeft onder meer geen van de volgende categorieën informatie weer: veiligheid

van de omgeving; beschikbaarheid of nabijheid van politie; hulp in noodgevallen;

constructiewerkzaamheden; weg- en rijstrookafsluitingen; voertuig- en snelheidsbeperkingen;

helling(shoek) van de weg; beperkingen met betrekking tot onder andere maximale hoogte van

viaducten of maximaal gewicht op bruggen; weg- of verkeersomstandigheden; bijzondere

gebeurtenissen; verkeersopstoppingen of reistijd.

TOEPASSELIJK RECHT

Deze Overeenkomst wordt beheerst door het recht van het land waar u woont op de dag van verkrijging

van de Database. In het geval dat u op dat moment buiten de Europese Unie of Zwitserland woont, is

het recht van het land binnen de Europese Unie of Zwitserland waar u de Database hebt verkregen van

toepassing. In alle andere gevallen, of in het geval dat de plaats waar u de Database hebt aangeschaft

niet bepaalbaar is, is Nederlands recht van toepassing. De bevoegde rechter in uw woonplaats op de

dag van verkrijging van de Database is bevoegd geschillen die voortvloeien uit of samenhangen met

deze Overeenkomst te beoordelen, onverminderd het recht van NAVTEQ vorderingen voor te leggen

aan de rechter van de plaats waar u ten tijde van het desbetreffende geschil woont.

578 MAX983HD

ANTES DE UTILIZAR LA BASE DE DATOS NAVTEQ LEA DETENIDAMENTE EL

PRESENTE CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA USUARIOS FINALES

NOTIFICACIÓN PARA EL USUARIO

EL PRESENTE ES UN CONTRATO DE LICENCIA - Y NO UN CONTRATO DE COMPRAVENTA -

ENTRE USTED Y NAVTEQ B.V. POR SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE DATOS DE MAPAS DE

NAVEGACIÓN NAVTEQ, CON INCLUSIÓN DE LOS PROGRAMAS DE SOFTWARE

CORRESPONDIENTES, LOS MEDIOS PORTADORES DE INFORMACIÓN Y LA DOCUMENTACIÓN

ACLARATORIA IMPRESA PUBLICADA POR NAVTEQ B.V. (A DENOMINAR, EN CONJUNTO, “LA

BASE DE DATOS”). AL HACER USO DE SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE DATOS, ACEPTA Y ESTÁ

DE ACUERDO CON TODAS LAS CLAUSULAS DE ESTE CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA

USUARIOS FINALES (“CONTRATO”). SI NO ESTÁ DE ACUERDO CON LAS CLÁUSULAS DE ESTE

CONTRATO, DEVUELVA INMEDIATAMENTE A SU PROVEEDOR SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE

DATOS, JUNTO CON TODOS LOS ELEMENTOS QUE LO ACOMPAÑAN, PARA SU REEMBOLSO.

PROPIEDAD

La Base de datos y sus correspondientes derechos de autor, propiedad intelectual o derechos afines

son propiedad de NAVTEQ o de sus licenciadores. La propiedad de los medios portadores de la Base

de datos será conservada por NAVTEQ y/o por su proveedor hasta la fecha en que usted haya pagado

completamente el importe que adeude a NAVTEQ y/o a su proveedor en virtud del presente Contrato o

de un(os) contrato(s) similar(es) mediante el(los) cual(es) hubiese recibido los productos.

CONCESIÓN DE LICENCIA

NAVTEQ le concede una licencia no exclusiva de utilización de la Base de datos para su uso propio o,

si procede, para uso en las operaciones internas de su empresa. Esta licencia no incluye el derecho a

conceder sublicencias.

RESTRICCIONES DE USO

La Base de datos está restringida para uso en el sistema específico para el cual ha sido desarrollada.

Salvo en la medida en que las leyes obligatorias así lo permitan explícitamente (p.ej. las leyes

nacionales basadas en la Directiva europea sobre software (91/250) y la Directiva sobre bancos de

datos (96/9)), no podrá extraer ni reutilizar partes sustanciales del contenido de la Base de datos, ni

reproducir, modificar, adaptar, traducir, desensamblar, descompilar, ni usar técnicas de ingeniería

inversa en ninguna parte de la Base de datos. Si desea obtener la información de interoperabilidad a

que alude (la legislación nacional en la que se basa) la Directiva sobre software, deberá conceder a

NAVTEQ el plazo adecuado para suministrarle dicha información en un término razonable, incluidos los

costes, a determinar por NAVTEQ.

TRANSFERENCIA DE LA LICENCIA

No podrá transferir la Base de datos a terceros, salvo que ésta haya sido instalada en el sistema para

el cual ha sido desarrollada, o si no conserva ninguna copia de la Base de datos y, siempre que el

beneficiario de la transferencia se declare conforme con todos los términos y condiciones de este

Contrato y lo notifique por escrito a NAVTEQ. Los paquetes multidisco podrán ser transferidos o

vendidos únicamente como un paquete completo, tal como los suministra NAVTEQ, y no como un

subpaquete del mismo.

LIMITACIÓN DE LA GARANTÍA

Sujeto a lo dispuesto en el apartado Advertencias que se expone más adelante, NAVTEQ garantiza que

durante los doce meses siguientes a la adquisición de su copia de la Base de datos, ésta funcionará

sustancialmente de acuerdo con los Criterios de Precisión e Integridad de NAVTEQ vigentes a la fecha

en que usted ha adquirido dicho ejemplar de la Base de datos; a solicitud suya, la presente limitación

de garantía, NAVTEQ, dentro de los términos razonables, tomará las medidas pertinentes para reparar

o sustituir dicho ejemplar defectuoso de la Base de datos. Si las medidas tomadas no conducen al

funcionamiento de la Base de datos en conformidad con la garantía aquí descrita, usted podrá elegir

entre obtener una devolución razonable del precio pagado por la Base de datos o rescindir este

Contrato. Lo anterior constituye la responsabilidad total de NAVTEQ y su único recurso contra ella.

Salvo que haya sido dispuesto explícitamente en este artículo, NAVTEQ no concederá ninguna

CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA USUARIOS FINALES

579

MAX983HD

garantía, ni hará representaciones con respecto al uso de resultados o al uso de la Base de datos en

términos de perfección, exactitud, fiabilidad u otros conceptos. NAVTEQ no garantiza la perfección

presente ni futura de la Base de datos. Ninguna información o recomendación, oral o escrita, que haya

sido suministrada por NAVTEQ, por su proveedor o por cualquier otra persona, constituirá garantía ni,

en ninguna otra forma, contemplará una ampliación de la limitación de garantía anteriormente expuesta.

La limitación de garantía dispuesta en este Contrato no afecta o perjudica ningún derecho legal

estatutario que usted pueda derivar de la garantía legal con respecto a defectos ocultos.

Si no ha adquirido la Base de datos directamente de NAVTEQ es posible que, además de los derechos

concedidos por NAVTEQ en virtud del presente contrato, obtenga derechos legales estatutarios de la

persona de quien ha obtenido su Base de datos de acuerdo con la legislación vigente en su jurisdicción.

La anterior garantía de NAVTEQ no afectará dichos derechos legales y usted podrá mantener tales

derechos en adición a los derechos de garantía concedidos aquí.

LIMITACIÓN DE LA RESPONSABILIDAD

El precio de la Base de datos no incluye la cobertura por riesgo de daños consecuenciales, indirectos

o daños directos ilimitados derivados del uso que usted hace de la Base de datos. Por tanto, en ningún

caso, NAVTEQ asumirá responsabilidad alguna por daños consecuenciales o indirectos incluyendo, sin

limitación, los perjuicios por lucro cesante, pérdida de datos o falta de uso, derivados del uso de la Base

de datos en que incurra usted o un tercero ya sea en acción contractual, ilícita o en virtud de una

garantía, incluso si NAVTEQ hubiese sido notificada de la posibilidad de que ocurriesen dichos

perjuicios. En cualquier caso, la responsabilidad de NAVTEQ por daños directos estará limitado al

precio de su ejemplar de la Base de datos.

LA LIMITACIÓN DE LA GARANTÍA Y LA LIMITACIÓN DE LA RESPONSABILIDAD TAL COMO

CONSTAN EN EL PRESENTE CONTRATO, NO AFECTAN O PERJUDICAN SUS DERECHOS

LEGALES ESTATUTARIOS EN CASO DE HABER ADQUIRIDO LA BASE DE DATOS EN FORMA

DIFERENTE A LA EXPLOTACIÓN DE UNA EMPRESA.

ADVERTENCIAS

La Base de datos reproduce la realidad tal como ésta existía previa a la fecha en que usted la ha

adquirido y comprende información y datos provenientes de la administración pública y de otras fuentes

los cuales pueden contener errores u omisiones. En consecuencia, la Base de datos puede incluir

información incorrecta e incompleta debido al paso del tiempo, la alteración de las circunstancias y a la

naturaleza de las fuentes empleadas. La Base de datos no contiene ni refleja información sobre, por

ejemplo, la seguridad de la zona, el cumplimiento de la ley, la asistencia en casos de emergencia, obras

en construcción, cierres de vías o carriles, restricciones de velocidad o de vehículos, declive de la vía y

grado de la pendiente, limitaciones con respecto a la altura o peso permitido en puentes, condiciones

viales o de tráfico, acontecimientos especiales, atascos o duración del viaje.

LEGISLACIÓN APLICABLE

El presente Contrato se regirá por las leyes de la jurisdicción donde usted resida en la fecha de

adquisición de la Base de datos. Si en la citada fecha reside fuera de la Unión Europea o de Suiza, se

aplicará la legislación de la jurisdicción de la Unión Europea o de Suiza donde haya adquirido la Base

de datos. En todos los demás casos, o si no es posible establecer la jurisdicción donde ha adquirido la

Base de datos, se aplicará la legislación de los Países Bajos. El juez competente en su lugar de

residencia en la fecha de adquisición de la Base de datos deberá estar facultado para pronunciarse

sobre cualquier conflicto derivado del presente Contrato o relacionado con él, sin detrimento del

derecho de NAVTEQ a presentar reclamaciones judiciales en el lugar donde usted resida en dicho

momento.

580 MAX983HD

LÆS VENLIGST DENNE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE OMHYGGELIGT INDEN DU

BEGYNDER AT BRUGE NAVTEQ DATABASE

MEDDELELSE TIL BRUGEREN

DETTE ER EN LICENSAFTALE - OG IKKE EN SALGSAFTALE- MELLEM DIG OG NAVTEQ B.V.

VEDRØRENDE DIN KOPI AF NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE HERUNDER TILKNYTTET

COMPUTERSOFTWARE, MEDIER OG SUPPLERENDE TRYKT MATERIALE UDGIVET AF NAVTEQ

(”DATABASEN”). VED AT BRUGE DATABASEN, ACCEPTERER DU ALLE VILKÅR OG

BETINGELSER I DENNE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE (”SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALEN”).

SÅFREMT DU IKKE KAN ACCEPTERE BETINGELSERNE I NÆRVÆRENDE

SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE, SKAL DU STRAKS RETURNERE DATABASEN SAMMEN MED

ALLE TILKNYTTEDE EMNER TIL FORHANDLEREN MOD REFUNDERING AF KØBESUMMEN.

EJENDOMSRET

Databasen samt ophavsrettigheder og intellektuelle ejendomsrettigheder eller naborettigheder deri ejes

af NAVTEQ eller dennes licensgivere. Ejendomsretten til de medier, der indeholder Databasen,

bibeholdes af NAVTEQ og/eller leverandøren, indtil du har betalt alle i henhold til nærværende

slutbrugerlicensaftale eller lignende aftale(r), og efter hvilke varerne er leveret til dig, de fulde beløb der

skal betales til NAVTEQ og/eller leverandøren.

LICENSUDSTEDELSE

NAVTEQ udsteder dig en ikke-eksklusiv licens til at bruge Databasen til personligt brug, eller hvis

relevant, til brug i din virksomheds interne drift. Denne licens indbefatter ikke retten til at udstede

underlicenser.

BEGRÆNSNINGER I BRUGEN

Databasen er begrænset til brug i det pågældende system, for hvilket den blev oprettet. Med undtagelse

af det i de præceptive love (dvs. nationale love baseret på Rådets direktiv 91/250 om retlig beskyttelse

af edb programmer og Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets direktiv 96/9 om retlig beskyttelse af databaser)

udtrykkeligt tilladte omfang, må du ikke uddrage eller genanvende væsentlige dele af Databasen indhold

ej heller duplikere, kopiere, modificere, justere, oversætte, demontere, dekompilere, foretage reverse

engineering af nogen del af Databasen. Dersom du ønsker interoperabilitet, som defineret i (nationale

love der er baseret på) direktivet om retlig beskyttelse af edb programmer, skal du give NAVTEQ rimelig

lejlighed til at frembringe nævnte informationer på rimelige betingelser herunder også omkostninger,

som skal fastsættes af NAVTEQ.

OVERDRAGELSE AF LICENS

Du har ikke ret til at overdrage Databasen til tredjepersoner, undtagen hvis den er installeret på det

system, for hvilket den var oprettet, eller hvis du ikke tilbageholder nogen kopi af Databasen og forudsat

at erhververen accepterer alle vilkår og betingelser i denne slutbrugerlicensaftale og skriftligt bekræfter

dette over for NAVTEQ. Multi-disk sæt kan kun overdrages eller sælges som de af NAVTEQ leverede

komplette sæt og ikke som undersæt deraf.

BEGRÆNSET GARANTI

Med forbehold for nedenstående advarsler garanterer NAVTEQ, for en periode af 12 måneder efter du

har købt en kopi af Databasen, at den i det væsentlige vil yde i overensstemmelse med NAVTEQ’s

kriterier for nøjagtighed og fuldstændighed, der eksisterede på købsdatoen for Databasen. Du kan få

udleveret disse kriterier efter anmodning. Dersom Databasen ikke yder i overensstemmelse med

nærværende begrænsede garanti, vil NAVTEQ gøre alle rimelige bestræbelser for at reparere eller

udskifte din uoverensstemmende kopi af Databasen. Dersom disse bestræbelser ikke fører til, at

Databasen yder i overensstemmelse med de heri anførte garantier, har du valget mellem enten at

slutbrugerlicensaftale. Dette udgør NAVTEQ’s samlede ansvar og dit eneste retsmiddel mod NAVTEQ.

Med undtagelse af hvad der udtrykkeligt er anført i nærværende afsnit, garanterer NAVTEQ ikke eller

fremsætter nogen anbringender med hensyn til brugen af resultaterne af brugen af Databasen ud fra

dennes rigtighed, korrekthed, pålidelighed eller på anden vis. NAVTEQ garanterer ikke, at Databasen

er eller vil være fejlfri. Ingen mundtlige eller skriftlige informationer eller henstillinger givet af NAVTEQ,

leverandøren eller nogen anden person danner nogen garanti eller på nogen måde udvider rammerne

SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE

581

MAX983HD

af den herover beskrevne begrænsede garanti. Den i slutbrugerlicensaftalens anførte begrænsede

garanti har ingen indflydelse på eller skader nogen lovfæstede rettigheder, du måtte have i henhold til

den lovfæstede garanti mod skjulte mangler.

Hvis du ikke købte Databasen direkte fra NAVTEQ, har du måske lovfæstede rettigheder mod den

person, fra hvilken du købte Databasen, udover de herunder af NAVTEQ afgivne rettigheder i

overensstemmelse med bestemmelserne i din jurisdiktion. NAVTEQ’s ovenstående garanti har ingen

indflydelse på sådanne lovfæstede rettigheder, og sådanne rettigheder kan du gøre gældende foruden

de heri givne garantirettigheder.

BEGRÆNSNING AF ANSVAR

Databasens pris indbefatter ikke nogen betaling for accept af risiko for sekundære, indirekte eller

ubegrænsede indirekte skader, der måtte opstå i forbindelse med din brug af Databasen. I

overensstemmelse hermed påtager NAVTEQ sig intet ansvar for sekundære eller indirekte skader

herunder også og uden begrænsning tab af indtægt, data eller brug du eller nogen tredjemand måtte

lide, som følge af din brug af Databasen, enten det er søgsmål inden for kontrakt eller uden for kontrakt

baseret på en garanti, selv om NAVTEQ er blevet oplyst om muligheden for sådanne erstatningskrav.

Under alle omstændigheder er NAVTEQ’s ansvar for direkte skader begrænset til købsprisen for din kopi

af Databasen.

DEN BEGRÆNSEDE GARANTI OG DET BEGRÆNSEDE ANSVAR ANFØRT I NÆRVÆRENDE

SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE HAR INGEN INDFLYDELSE PÅ ELLER ER TIL SKADE FOR DINE

LOVFÆSTEDE RETTIGHEDER, HVIS DU HAR KØBT DATABASEN PÅ ANDEN VIS END I ET

FORRETNINGSFORLØB.

ADVARSLER

Databasen reflekterer virkeligheden, som den var, inden du modtog Databasen, og den indeholder data

og informationer fra offentlige myndigheder og andre kilder, som kan indeholde fejl og udeladelser. Som

følge deraf kan Databasen indeholde fejlagtige eller ufuldstændige informationer, på grund af tidens

gang, ændrede forhold og arten af de anvendte kilder. Databasen indeholder ikke eller reflekterer

informationer om bl.a. nabolagssikkerhed, retshåndhævelse, nødhjælp, byggearbejde, gade- eller

vejlukninger, køretøjs eller hastighedsrestriktioner, gade-/vejhældning eller niveau, brohøjde, vægt eller

andre begrænsninger, vej- eller trafikforhold, særlige begivenheder, trafikpropper eller rejsetid.

GÆLDENDE LOV

Lovene i den jurisdiktion, hvori du bor på købstidspunktet af database, gælder for nærværende aftale.

Hvis du på det tidspunkt opholder dig uden for Den Europæiske Union eller Schweiz, er det loven i den

jurisdiktion inden for Den Europæiske Union eller Schweiz, hvor du købte Databasen, der gælder. I alle

andre tilfælde, eller hvis jurisdiktionen på det sted, du købte Databasen, ikke kan defineres, er det lovene

i Holland der gælder. De kompetente retter på dit bopælssted på det tidspunkt, du købte Databasen, har

jurisdiktion over enhver tvist, der måtte opstå som følge af eller vedrørende nærværende aftale uden

skade for NAVTEQ’s ret til at rejse krav på dit nuværende bopælssted.

582 MAX983HD

QUEIRA POR FAVOR LER ATENTAMENTE ESTE ACORDO DE LICENÇA DO

UTILIZADOR FINAL ANTES DE UTILIZAR A BASE DE DADOS NAVTEQ

AVISO PARA O UTILIZADOR

O PRESENTE DOCUMENTO É UM ACORDO DE CONCESSÃO DE LICENÇA - E NÃO UM ACORDO

PARA EFEITOS DE VENDA - ENTRE O UTILIZADOR E A NAVTEQ B.V., NO QUE RESPEITA À CÓPIA

ADQUIRIDA DA BASE DE DADOS DE NAVEGAÇÃO E CARTOGRAFIA DA NAVTEQ, INCLUINDO O

PROGRAMA DE COMPUTADOR E O MEIO DE SUPORTE QUE LHE ESTÃO ASSOCIADOS, BEM

COMO A DOCUMENTAÇÃO EXPLICATIVA PUBLICADA PELA NAVTEQ (CONJUNTAMENTE

DESIGNADOS POR “A BASE DE DADOS”). AO UTILIZAR A BASE DE DADOS, EM QUALQUER

CIRSCUNSTÃNCIA, O CLIENTE ESTARÁ A MANIFESTAR A SUA ACEITAÇÃO E CONCORDÂNCIA

RELATIVAMENTE A TODOS OS TERMOS E CONDIÇÕES DO PRESENTE ACORDO DE LICENÇA

DO UTILIZADOR FINAL (DORAVANTE DESIGNADO POR “ACORDO”). CASO NÃO CONCORDE

COM OS TERMOS CONSTANTES DESTE ACORDO, QUEIRA DE IMEDIATO EFECTUAR A

DEVOLUÇÃO DA BASE DE DADOS, JUNTAMENTE COM TODOS OS OUTROS ARTIGOS QUE A

ACOMPANHAM, AO SEU FORNECEDOR, PARA QUE SE PROCEDA AO REEMBOLSO.

PROPRIEDADE

A Base de Dados, assim como os direitos de autor e de propriedade intelectual, ou os direitos conexos sobre

a mesma, são propriedade da NAVTEQ ou dos seus licenciantes. A propriedade dos meios de suporte que

contêm a Base de Dados é retida pela NAVTEQ e/ou pelo seu fornecedor até que tenham sido pagas, na

sua totalidade, quaisquer quantias devidas à NAVTEQ e/ou ao seu fornecedor em conformidade com o

presente Acordo ou qualquer outro acordo semelhante ao abrigo do qual os produtos lhe sejam fornecidos.

CONCESSÃO DE LICENÇA

A NAVTEQ concede-lhe uma licença não exclusiva de utilização da Base de Dados para fins pessoais

ou, caso tal se aplique, para uma utilização no âmbito das operações levadas a cabo internamente pela

sua empresa. Na presente licença não está incluído o direito à concessão de sublicenças.

RESTRIÇÕES DE UTILIZAÇÃO

A utilização da Base da Dados é limitada ao sistema específico para o qual foi criada. Excepto na

medida em que tal seja expressamente permitido pelas disposições legais de aplicação obrigatória (por

exemplo, legislação nacional baseada na Directiva n° 91/250/CE relativa ao regime de protecção

jurídica dos programas de computador e na Directiva n° 96/9/CE relativa à protecção jurídica das Bases

de Dados), o utilizador não deverá extrair ou reutilizar partes significativas do conteúdo da Base de

Dados, nem reproduzir, copiar, modificar, adaptar, traduzir, desmontar ou decompor, nem efectuar

operações de inversão de engenharia de qualquer parte da Base de Dados. Se desejar obter

informação sobre a sua interoperabilidade nos termos a que se refere a Directiva Europeia relativa a

Programas de Computador (Directiva em cuja legislação nacional está baseada), deverá, pois,

conceder à NAVTEQ a oportunidade de facultar a referida informação segundo os meios considerados

razoáveis, incluindo os custos, que serão determinados pela NAVTEQ.

TRANSFERÊNCIA DE LICENÇA

Não é permitida a transferência da Base de Dados a terceiros, excepto nos casos em que a mesma se

encontre instalada no sistema para o qual foi criada ou em que o cliente não conserve qualquer cópia

da Base de Dados para si, e na medida em que o transmissário expresse o seu consentimento em

relação a todos os termos e condições do presente Acordo e o confirme por escrito à NAVTEQ. Os

conjuntos de multi-discos somente poderão ser transferidos ou vendidos como um conjunto completo,

tal como fornecidos pela NAVTEQ, e não como um subconjunto daquele.

GARANTIA LIMITADA

A NAVTEQ oferece a garantia de que, sujeita às Advertências abaixo descritas e por um período de 12

meses após ter adquirido a sua cópia da Base de Dados, a mesma irá funcionar substancialmente de

acordo com os Critérios de Exactidão e Integralidade da NAVTEQ existentes à data de aquisição da

Base de Dados, sendo que estes critérios podem ser disponibilizados pela NAVTEQ mediante

solicitação do utilizador. No caso de a Base de Dados não funcionar de acordo com a presente garantia

limitada, a NAVTEQ realizará os esforços que se afigurem adequados para proceder à reparação ou

ACORDO DE LICENÇA DO UTILIZADOR FINAL

583

MAX983HD

substituição da cópia da Base de Dados que não esteja a funcionar devidamente. Se os referidos

esforços não conduzirem a um desempenho da Base de Dados que esteja em consonância com as

garantias aqui explicitadas, o utilizador poderá optar entre receber uma quantia racional a título de

reembolso pelo preço pago pela Base de Dados ou rescindir o presente Acordo. As opções

mencionadas constituem responsabilidade integral da NAVTEQ o único meio de recurso do utilizador

em relação à NAVTEQ. Salvo em caso de indicação expressa nesse sentido na presente secção, a

NAVTEQ não proporciona garantias nem realiza quaisquer representações no que se refere à utilização

ou aos resultados da utilização da Base de Dados em termos da sua correcção, exactidão, fiabilidade,

ou quaisquer outras. A NAVTEQ não garante que a Base de Dados se encontre presentemente, ou

futuramente, isenta de erros. Nenhuma informação ou conselho prestado, oralmente ou por escrito, pela

NAVTEQ, pelo seu fornecedor ou por qualquer outra pessoa, deverá ser de molde a constituir uma

garantia ou, de qualquer outra forma, alargar o âmbito da garantia limitada acima descrita. A garantia

limitada constante do presente Acordo não deverá considerar-se como afectando ou prejudicando

quaisquer direitos que, nos termos previstos pela lei, o utilizador possa invocar em virtude da garantia

legal contra defeitos ocultos.

Caso não tenha adquirido a Base de Dados directamente à NAVTEQ, poderá ter direitos estatutários a

serem exercidos contra o intermediário junto do qual adquiriu a Base de Dados, complementarmente

aos direitos que pela presente lhe são conferidos pela NAVTEQ, em conformidade com a lei da sua

jurisdição. A garantia da NAVTEQ, supracitada, não deverá afectar os referidos direitos estatutários,

pelo que o utilizador poderá reivindicar tais direitos para além dos direitos que lhe assistem ao abrigo

da garantia concedida no presente Acordo.

LIMITAÇÃO DE RESPONSABILIDADE

O preço da Base de Dados não inclui qualquer valor relativo à suposição de risco de danos directos

ilimitados, indirectos ou consequenciais, que possam advir da sua incorrecta utilização da Base de

Dados. Do mesmo modo, sob nenhuma circunstância deverá a NAVTEQ ser responsável por quaisquer

danos indirectos ou consequenciais, nestes se incluindo, e não se limitando, por perdas de rendimento,

dados, ou utilização, em que incorra o cliente ou um terceiro, em resultado da sua utilização da Base

de Dados, quer seja no quadro de uma acção contemplada no contrato ou extra-negocial, ou baseada

numa garantia, mesmo no caso de a NAVTEQ ter sido informada acerca da possibilidade de ocorrência

de tais danos. Em quaisquer circunstâncias, a responsabilidade por danos directos imputável à

NAVTEQ é limitada ao preço da sua cópia da Base de Dados.

A GARANTIA LIMITADA E A LIMITAÇÃO DE RESPONSABILIDADE, DESCRITAS NO PRESENTE

ACORDO, NÃO AFECTAM NEM PREJUDICAM OS SEUS DIREITOS ESTATUTÁRIOS NO CASO DE

TER ADQUIRIDO A BASE DE DADOS DE OUTRA FORMA QUE NÃO NO DECURSO DE UMA

TRANSACÇÃO COMERCIAL.

ADVERTÊNCIAS

A Base de Dados reflecte a realidade tal como existia até ao momento em que a recebeu e é composta

por dados e informações provenientes de entidades governamentais e outras fontes, podendo conter

erros e omissões. Assim sendo, a Base de Dados poderá conter informação inexacta ou incompleta

devido à passagem do tempo, à alteração de circunstâncias, bem como à natureza das fontes utilizadas.

A Base de Dados não inclui ou incide sobre informações referentes, entre outros aspectos, ao grau de

segurança nas imediações, à execução da lei, à assistência em situações de emergência, obras de

construção, estradas ou ruas vedadas à circulação, restrições de velocidade ou relativas a veículos,

declive ou nivelamento de estradas, bem como altura, peso ou outros limites relativos a pontes, condições

de estradas ou de trânsito, eventos especiais, congestionamento do tráfego, ou tempo de viagem.

LEI VIGENTE

O presente Acordo deverá ser regido pelas leis da jurisdição do local de residência do utilizador à data

de aquisição da Base de Dados. Caso resida, de momento, fora da União Europeia ou Suíça, será

aplicável a lei da jurisdição, pertencente à União Europeia ou Suíça, na qual tenha adquirido a Base de

Dados. Nos restantes casos, ou perante a impossibilidade de definir a jurisdição do local onde foi

adquirida a Base de Dados, será aplicável a legislação em vigor nos Países Baixos. Aquando da

aquisição da Base de Dados, serão as instâncias competentes no seu local de residência que deverão

exercer a sua jurisdição relativamente a qualquer litígio decorrente do presente Acordo, ou com este

relacionado, sem prejuízo do direito da NAVTEQ a intentar uma acção judicial naquele que seja então

o seu local de residência.

584 MAX983HD

LÄS DETTA LICENSAVTAL FÖR SLUTANVÄNDARE NOGGRANT INNAN NI

ANVÄNDER NAVTEQ DATABAS

MEDDELANDE TILL ANVÄNDARE

DETTA ÄR ETT LICENSAVTAL - OCH INTE ETT AVTAL FÖR FÖRSÄLJNING - MELLAN ER OCH

NAVTEQ B.V. FÖR ERT EXEMPLAR AV NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABAS, INKLUDERANDE

TILLHÖRANDE PROGRAMVARA, MEDIA OCH TRYCKT MANUAL UTGIVEN AV NAVTEQ

(GEMENSAMT BENÄMNDA "DATABASEN"). GENOM ATT ANVÄNDA DATABASEN, ACCEPTERAR

NI OCH SAMTYCKER TILL ALLA VILLKOR OCH BESTÄMMELSER I DETTA LICENSAVTAL FÖR

SLUTANVÄNDARE ("AVTAL"). OM NI INTE SAMTYCKER TILL VILLKOREN I DETTAAVTAL,

RETURNERA OMGÅENDE DATABASEN, TILLSAMMANS MED ALLA ANDRA ÅTFÖLJANDE

ARTIKLAR TILL ER LEVERANTÖR FÖR ÅTERBETALNING.

ÄGANDERÄTT

Databasen och upphovsrätter, immateriell egendom eller närliggande rättigheter däri ägs av NAVTEQ

eller dess licensgivare. Äganderätten till de media som innehåller Databasen kvarligger hos NAVTEQ

och/eller Er leverantör till dess att Ni erlagt samtliga belopp som skall erläggas till NAVTEQ och/eller Er

leverantör i enlighet med detta Avtal eller liknande avtal enligt vilka varor tillhandahålls Er.

BEVILJANDE AV LICENS

NAVTEQ beviljar Er en icke-exklusiv licens att använda Databasen för Ert personliga bruk, eller om

tillämpligt, för användande inom Ert företags interna verksamhet. Denna licens omfattar inte rätten att

bevilja underlicenser.

BEGRÄNSNING AV ANVÄNDNING

Databasen får endast användas i det specifika system för vilket den framställts. Förutom till den del det

uttryckligen tillåts av tvingande lag (t ex nationella lagar baserade på det Europeiska

Datorprogramdirektivet (91/250) och Databasdirektivet (96/9)), får Ni ej göra utdrag ur eller återanvända

betydande delar av innehållet i Databasen och ej heller reproducera, kopiera, modifiera, anpassa,

översätta, demontera, dekompilera eller tillbakaassemblera någon del av Databasen. Om Ni önskar

erhålla samkörbarhetsinformation såsom avses i (den natio-nella lagen baserad på) det Europeiska

Datorprogramdirektivet, skall Ni ge NAVTEQ skälig möjlighet att tillhandahålla sagda information på

skäliga villkor, inkluderande kostnader, vilka fastställs av NAVTEQ.

ÖVERLÅTELSE AV LICENS

Ni får inte överlåta Databasen till tredje part, förutom som installerad i det system för vilket den skapades

eller under förutsättning att Ni inte behåller någon kopia av Databasen och förutsatt att mottagaren

samtycker till alla villkor och bestämmelser i detta Avtal och skriftligen bekräftar detta till NAVTEQ. Set

med flera skivor får endast överföras eller säljas som ett komplett set så som det levereras av NAVTEQ

och inte som delar av ett set.

BEGRÄNSAD GARANTI

NAVTEQ garanterar, med förbehåll för Varningarna nedan, för en tidsperiod på 12 månader efter

anskaffandet av Ert exemplar av Databasen, att den fungerar väsentligen i enlighet med NAVTEQs

exakthets- och fullständighetsnorm i dess lydelse vid det datum då Ni anskaffade Databasen; dessa

normer kan ni på begäran få av NAVTEQ. Om Databasen inte fungerar i enlighet med denna

begränsade garanti kommer NAVTEQ att vidta skäliga försök att reparera eller byta ut Ert icke

överensstämmande exemplar av Databasen. Om dessa försök inte leder till att Databasen fungerar i

enlighet med garantierna uppställda i detta avtal, kan Ni välja att antingen erhålla skälig återbetalning av

den köpeskilling Ni betalade för Databasen eller att häva detta Avtal. Detta är NAVTEQs hela

ansvarsskyldighet och Er enda rätt till gottgörelse från NAVTEQ. Förutom såsom uttryckligen är

föreskrivet i detta avsnitt, garanterar NAVTEQ inte eller gör någon utfästelse beträffande användandet

av resultaten från nyttjandet av Databasen vad avser riktighet, exakthet, tillförlitlighet eller annorledes.

NAVTEQ garanterar inte att Databasen är eller kommer att vara felfri. Ingen muntlig eller skriftlig

information tillhandahållen eller råd tillhandahållet av NAVTEQ, Er leverantör eller någon annan person

ger upphov till en garanti eller ökar på något sätt omfattningen av den ovan beskrivna begränsade

garantin. Den begränsade garantin enligt detta Avtal påverkar eller begränsar inte någon lagstadgad

LICENSAVTAL FÖR SLUTANVÄNDARE

585

MAX983HD

rättighet som Ni kan ha enligt i lag föreskriven garanti mot dolda fel.

Om Ni inte anskaffade Databasen direkt från NAVTEQ kan Ni ha ytterligare lagstadgade rättigheter

gentemot den person från vilken Ni anskaffade Databasen, utöver de rättigheter som Ni erhållit från

NAVTEQ enligt denna bestämmelse, i enlighet med lagen i Er jurisdiktion. NAVTEQs ovanstående

garanti påverkar inte sådana lagstadgade rättigheter och Ni kan utöva sådana rättigheter i tillägg till

garantierna i detta avtal.

ANSVARSBEGRÄNSNING

Priset för Databasen inkluderar inte någon ersättning för övertagande av risken för följdskador, indirekta

eller obegränsade direkta skador vilka kan uppstå i samband med Ert användande av Databasen.

Följaktligen skall NAVTEQ inte i något fall vara ansvarigt för några följdskador eller indirekta skador,

inkluderande utan begränsning, förlust av inkomst, data eller användning som åsamkats Er eller tredje

part härrörande från Ert användande av Databasen, vare sig avseende inomobligatoriska eller

utomobligatoriska anspråk eller baserade på garanti, även om NAVTEQ har underrättats om möjligheten

av sådana skador. NAVTEQs ansvar för direkta skador är i samtliga fall begränsat till priset för Ert

exemplar av Databasen.

DEN BEGRÄNSADE GARANTIN OCH ANSVARSBEGRÄNSNINGEN ENLIGT DETTA AVTAL

PÅVERKAR ELLER BEGRÄNSAR INTE ERA LAGSTADGADE RÄTTIGHETER OM NI HAR

ANSKAFFAT DATABASEN ANNORLEDES ÄN VID UTÖVANDE AV FÖRETAGSVERKSAMHET.

VARNING

Databasen återger verkligheten såsom den existerade innan Ni erhöll Databasen och den innehåller

data och information från myndigheter och andra källor, vilka kan innehålla fel och utelämnanden.

Följaktligen kan Databasen innehålla oriktig och ofullständig information på grund av tidens gång,

förändrade omständigheter och beroende på beskaffenheten hos de använda källorna. Databasen

inkluderar eller återger inte information om - bland annat - traktens säkerhet; upprätthållande av lag och

ordning; hjälp i nödsituationer; byggnadsarbeten; väg- eller gatuavstängningar; fordons- eller

hastighetsbegränsningar; väglutning eller grad; brohöjd; vikt eller andra begränsningar; väg- eller

trafikförhållanden; särskilda evenemang, trafikstockning eller restid.

GÄLLANDE LAG

Detta Avtal skall lyda under lagarna i den jurisdiktion i vilken Ni är bosatt vid det datum då Ni anskaffade

Databasen. Skulle Ni vid denna tidpunkt vara bosatt utanför den Europeiska Unionen eller Schweiz skall

lagen i den jurisdiktion inom den Europeiska Unionen eller Schweiz där Ni anskaffade Databasen gälla.

I alla andra fall, eller om den jurisdiktion där Ni anskaffade Databasen inte kan bestämmas, skall

nederländsk lag gälla. Behörig domstol på Er hemort vid tidpunkten då Ni anskaffade Databasen skall

ha jurisdiktion över tvist härrörande från eller i samband med detta Avtal, utan förfång för NAVTEQs

rättigheter att framställa krav på Er då tillämpliga hemort.

586 MAX983HD

VENNLIGST LES DENNE LISENSAVTALEN FOR SLUTTBRUKERE NØYE FØR DU TAR

DATABASEN NAVTEQ I BRUK

MERKNAD TIL BRUKEREN

DETTE ER EN LISENSAVTALE - OG IKKE EN AVTALE OM SALG - MELLOM DEG OG NAVTEQ B.V.

FOR DIN KOPI AV 'THE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE', INKLUDERT TILKNYTTET

DATAPROGRAMVARE, MEDIER OG FORKLARENDE TRYKT DOKUMENTASJON UTGITT AV

NAVTEQ (SAMLET KALT “DATABASEN”). VED Å BRUKE DATABASEN, GODTAR DU ALLE

VILKÅRENE I DENNE LISENSAVTALEN FOR SLUTTBRUKERE (“AVTALEN”). HVIS DU IKKE

GODTAR VILKÅRENE I DENNE AVTALEN, MÅ DU SNAREST SENDE DATABASEN OG ALLE

ELEMENTER SOM FØLGER MED DEN TILBAKE TIL LEVERANDØREN FOR Å FÅ DEN

REFUNDERT.

EIERSKAP

Databasen samt opphavsretter og åndelige eiendomsrettigheter eller underliggende rettigheter i disse

tilhører NAVTEQ eller deres rettighetsinnehavere. Mediene Databasen ligger på forblir NAVTEQs og/

eller din leverandørs eiendom inntil du har betalt hele beløpet som tilfaller NAVTEQ og/eller din

leverandør i overensstemmelse med denne Avtalen eller tilsvarende avtale(r) om levering av varen til

deg.

TILDELING AV LISENS

NAVTEQ tildeler deg en lisens uten enerett for din personlige bruk av Databasen eller, hvis relevant, for

intern bruk av den i ditt foretak. Denne lisensen omfatter ikke noen rett til å tildele underlisenser.

BRUKSBEGRENSNINGER

Databasens bruk er begrenset til det bestemte systemet den ble opprettet for. Unntatt i den utstrekning

det eksplisitt tillates av de regelverk man er pålagt å forholde seg til (dvs. nasjonale lovverk basert på

det europeiske programvaredirektivet (91/250) og Databasedirektivet (96/9)), har du ikke rett til å trekke

ut eller gjøre ny bruk av vesentlige deler av innholdet i Databasen og heller ikke reprodusere, kopiere,

endre, tilpasse, oversette, demontere eller dekompilere den eller ta fra hverandre programkoden i noen

del av Databasen. Hvis du ønsker å oppnå samspillinformasjon i den betydningen som fremgår av (de

nasjonale lover basert på) det europeiske programvaredirektivet, skal du gi NAVTEQ rimelig anledning

til å fremskaffe slik informasjon på fornuftige vilkår, inkludert priser, som skal fastsettes av NAVTEQ.

OVERFØRING AV LISENS

Du har ikke rett til å overføre Databasen til tredjeparter, unntatt når den er installert i det systemet den

ble opprettet for eller når du selv ikke beholder noen kopi av Databasen og under forutsetning av at den

du overfører den til godtar alle vilkår i denne Avtalen og bekrefter dette skriftlig til NAVTEQ. Sett med

flere disker kan kun overføres eller selges som ett komplett sett slik det ble levert av NT, og ikke som

noe delsett av dette.

BEGRENSET GARANTI

NAVTEQ garanterer at, med forbehold for advarslene angitt nedenfor, over et tidsrom på 12 måneder

etter at du har kjøpt din kopi av Databasen, vil denne i alt vesentlig ha den ytelse som fremgår av

NAVTEQs 'Kriterier for nøyaktighet og fullstendighet' i kraft på den datoen du kjøpte Databasen. Disse

kriteriene er tilgjengelige fra NAVTEQ på forespørsel. Skulle Databasen ikke gi den ytelsen som

overensstemmer med denne begrensede garantien, skal NAVTEQ gjøre sitt beste innen rimelighetens

grenser for å reparere eller skifte ut din uoverensstemmende kopi av Databasen. Hvis disse forsøkene

ikke fører til at Databasen gir den ytelsen som tilsvarer garantiene i dette dokumentet, vil du ha valget

mellom enten å motta en rimelig refusjon av beløpet du betalte for Databasen eller å oppheve denne

Avtalen. Dette skal være NAVTEQs fulle ansvar og ditt eneste rettsmiddel mot NAVTEQ. Med unntak

bruk av resultatene av bruken av Databasen hva angår dennes korrekthet, nøyaktighet, pålitelighet eller

på annen måte. NAVTEQ garanterer ikke at Databasen er eller kommer til å være feilfri. Ingen muntlig

eller skriftlig informasjon eller rådgivning gitt av NAVTEQ, din leverandør eller noen annen part skal

anses å utgjøre en garanti eller på noen måte utvide omfanget av den begrensede garantien beskrevet

ovenfor. Den begrensede garantien gitt i denne AVTALEN påvirker ikke og er uten noen prejudise for

de eventuelle lovfestede juridiske rettigheter du måtte ha under den juridiske garantien mot skjulte

LISENSAVTALE FOR SLUTTBRUKERE

587

MAX983HD

defekter.

Hvis du ikke kjøpte Databasen direkte fra NAVTEQ, kan du ha lovfestede rettigheter i forhold til den

personen du kjøpte Databasen fra, i tillegg til de rettigheter NAVTEQ har gitt deg med dette dokumentet,

i henhold til lovverket i din rettskrets. Ovenstående garanti fra NAVTEQ skal ikke påvirke slike lovfestede

rettigheter og du skal ha rett til å gjøre dem gjeldende i tillegg til de garantirettigheter du har fått i dette

dokumentet.

ANSVARSBEGRENSNING

Prisen på Databasen inkluderer ingen hensyntagen til overtagelse av erstatningsansvar for følgeskader,

indirekte skader eller ubegrensede direkte skader som måtte oppstå i forbindelse med din bruk av

Databasen. Følgelig skal NAVTEQ under ingen omstendigheter ha erstatningsansvar for noen

følgeskader eller indirekte skader, inkludert uten begrensning tap av inntekt, data eller bruk, som måtte

ramme deg eller en eventuell tredjepart som følge av bruken av Databasen, det være seg i

kontraktsmessige eller ikke-kontraktsmessige forhold (uaktsomhet) eller basert på en garanti, selv om

NAVTEQ er blitt informert om muligheten for et slikt skadeansvar. I alle fall er NAVTEQs

erstatningsansvar begrenset til prisen på din kopi av Databasen.

DEN BEGRENSEDE GARANTIEN OG ANSVARSFRASKRIVELSEN UTTRYKT I DENNE AVTALEN

PÅVIRKER IKKE OG ER UTEN PREJUDISE FOR DINE LOVFESTEDE RETTIGHETER HVIS DU HAR

KJØPT DATABASEN PÅ EN ANNEN MÅTE ENN VED EN FORRETNINGSTRANSAKSJON.

ADVARSLER

Databases gjenspeiler virkeligheten slik den var før du mottok Databasen og omfatter data og

informasjon fra statlige og andre kilder som kan inneholde feil og utelatelser. Følgelig kan Databasen

inneholde uriktig eller ufullstendig informasjon på grunn av tidsforløp, endrede omstendigheter og de

anvendte kildenes art. Databasen inkluderer eller gir ikke informasjon om - blant annet - sikkerhet i

nærmiljøet, lovhåndheving, nødhjelp, konstruksjonsarbeider, stengte veier og gater, kjøretøy- eller

fartsbegrensninger, veibanens fall eller stigning, brohøyde, vekt- eller andre begrensninger, vei- eller

trafikkforhold, spesielle hendelser, trafikkorker eller reisetid.

GJELDENDE LOV

Denne avtalen skal rette seg etter lovene i rettskretsen der du bor på den datoen Databasen blir kjøpt.

Skulle du på dette tidspunkt bo utenfor den Europeiske Union eller Sveits, er det loven i den rettskretsen

innenfor den Europeiske Union eller Sveits hvor du kjøpte Databasen som kommer til anvendelse. I alle

andre tilfeller, eller hvis den rettskrets hvor du kjøpte Databasen ikke kan defineres, skal loven i

Nederland anvendes. De kompetente domstoler på ditt hjemsted på det tidspunkt du kjøpte Databasen

skal ha domsmakt i eventuelle tvister som måtte oppstå på grunn av eller i forbindelse med denne

avtalen, uten prejudise for NAVTEQs rett til å reise krav mot deg på ditt den gang gjeldende hjemsted.

588 MAX983HD

PROSÍME, PŘEČTĚTE SI PEČLIVĚ TUTO SMLOUVU O LICENCI KONCOVÉHO

UŽIVATELE ŘRED TÍM, NEŽ POUŽIJETE DATABÁZI NAVTEQ

OZNÁMENÍ UŽIVATELI

TOTO JE SMLOUVA O LICENCI – A NIKOLI SMLOUVA O PRODEJI – MEZI VÁMI A SPOLEČNOSTÍ

NAVTEQ B.V. NA VAŠI KOPII DATABÁZE NAVIGOVATELNÝCH MAP NAVTEQ, VČETNĚ

SOUVISEJÍCÍHO PROGRAMOVÉHO VYBAVENÍ, NOSIČŮ A VYSVĚTLUJÍCÍ TIŠTĚNÉ

DOKUMENTACE PUBLIKOVANÉ SPOLEČNOSTÍ NAVTEQ (SOUHRNNĚ „DATABÁZE“). POUŽITÍM

DATABÁZE PŘIJÍMÁTE A SOUHLASÍTE SE VŠEMI PODMÍNKAMI TÉTO SMLOUVY O LICENCI

KONCOVÉHO UŽIVATELE (DÁLE „SMLOUVA“) A SOUHLASÍTE S NIMI. NESOUHLASÍTE-LI S

PODMÍNKAMI TÉTO SMLOUVY, NEPRODLENĚ VRAŤTE DATABÁZI SPOLU SE VŠEMI DALŠÍMI

DOPROVODNÝMI POLOŽKAMI SVÉMU DODAVATELI K REFUNDACI.

VLASTNICTVÍ

Databáze a vlastnická práva a duševní vlastnictví nebo hraničící práva v nich jsou ve vlastnictví

společnosti NAVTEQ nebo osob, které jí poskytují licence. Vlastnictví nosičů, na nichž je obsažena

Databáze, si ponechává NAVTEQ a/nebo Váš dodavatel, dokud plně neuhradíte společnosti NAVTEQ

a/nebo Vašemu dodavateli jakékoli dlužné částky podle této Smlouvy nebo podobné smlouvy

(podobných smluv), podle níž (nichž) je Vám poskytováno zboží.

UDĚLENÍ LICENCE

Společnost NAVTEQ Vám uděluje nevýlucnou licenci k užívání Databáze pro Vaše osobní užití nebo,

připadá-li to v úvahu, k internímu použití ve Vašem podnikání. Tato licence nezahrnuje právo udělit

sublicence.

OMEZENÍ UŽÍVÁNÍ

Databáze je omezena na užití v konkrétním systému, pro který byla vytvořena. S výjimkou rozsahu

výslovně povoleného závaznými právními předpisy (například národními zákony založenými na

Evropské směrnici o software (91/250) a Směrnici o Databázích (96/9)) nesmíte vyjímat nebo znovu

používat podstatné části obsahu Databáze, ani reprodukovat, kopírovat, upravovat, přizpůsobovat,

převádět, rozebírat, rozčleňovat, obráceně konstruovat jakoukoli část Databáze. Přejete-li si získat

informace o vzájemné provozuschopnosti /interoperabilitě/, jak je míněna v (národních zákonech

založených na) Evropské směrnici o software, musíte dát společnosti NAVTEQ odpovídající příležitost,

aby poskytla řečené informace za přiměřených podmínek, včetně nákladů, které určí NAVTEQ.

PŘEVOD LICENCE

Databázi nesmíte převést na třetí strany s výjimkou případu, kdy je instalována v systému, pro který byla

vytvořena, nebo když si neponecháte žádnou kopii Databáze a za předpokladu, že nabyvatel souhlasí

se všemi podmínkami této Smlouvy a potvrdí to písemně společnosti NAVTEQ. Soubory o více discích

mohou být převáděny nebo prodávány pouze jako úplný soubor, jak jej dodal NAVTEQ, a nikoli jako

jejich dílčí soubor.

OMEZENÁ ZÁRUKA

Společnost NAVTEQ zaručuje, že, s výhradou Varování uvedených níže, po období 12 měsíců po nabytí

Vaší kopie Databáze bude tato fungovat podstatně v souladu s Kritérii společnosti NAVTEQ pro

přesnost a úplnost, existujících k datu, kdy jste Databázi nabyli; tato kritéria můžete na svou žádost od

NAVTEQ získat. Nefunguje-li Databáze v souladu s touto omezenou zárukou, společnost NAVTEQ

vynaloží přiměrené úsilí k opravě nebo výměně Vaší nevyhovující kopie Databáze. Nepovede-li toto úsilí

k fungování Databáze v souladu se zárukami zde uvedenými, budete mít možnost bud’ obdržet

přiměřenou náhradu ceny, kterou jste zaplatili za Databázi, nebo odstoupit od této Smlouvy. Toto je

úplná odpovednost spolecnosti NAVTEQ a Váš jediný opravný prostredek proti NAVTEQ. S výjimkou

toho, co je výslovně stanoveno v tomto oddíle, společnost NAVTEQ nezaručuje ani nečiní žádná

prohlášení ohledně užití výsledků užívání Databáze co do správnosti, přesnosti, spolehlivosti nebo

jinak. Společnost NAVTEQ nezaručuje, že Databáze je nebo bude bez chyb. Žádné ústní nebo písemné

informace nebo rady poskytnuté ze strany NAVTEQ, Vašeho dodavatele nebo jakékoli jiné osoby

netvoří záruku ani žádným způsobem nerozšiřují rozsah omezené záruky výše popsané. Omezená

záruka stanovená v této Smlouvě se nedotýká, ani není k újmě jakýchkoli statutárních zákonných práv,

SMLOUVA O POSKYTNUTÍ LICENCE KONCOVÉMU UŽIVATELI

589

MAX983HD

která můžete mít ze zákonného ručení proti skrytým vadám.

Pokud jste nenabyl(a) Databázi od NAVTEQ přímo, můžete mít zákonná statutární práva vůči osobě, od

níž jste Databázi nabyl(a), dodatkem ke zde uvedeným právům zaručovaným společností NAVTEQ,

podle zákona Vaší jurisdikce. Výše uvedená záruka společnosti NAVTEQ se nedotkne takových

zákonných práv a můžete taková práva uplatňovat dodatkem k záručním právům zde uděleným.

OMEZENÍ ODPOVĚDNOSTI

Cena Databáze nezahrnuje žádné protiplnění za uvažovaná rizika následných, nepřímých nebo

neomezených přímých škod, které mohou vzniknout v souvislosti s Vaším užíváním Databáze.

Společnost NAVTEQ tudíž v žádném případě nenese odpovědnost za jakékoli následné nebo nepřímé

škody, zejména ušlé příjmy, údaje nebo užití, utrpěné Vámi nebo jakoukoli třetí stranou, které vyplývají

z Vašeho užívání Databáze, at již při žalobě ze smlouvy nebo deliktu nebo na základě záruky, a to i

tehdy, byla-li společnost NAVTEQ vyrozuměna o možnosti takových škod. V každém případě je

odpovědnost spolecnosti NAVTEQ za přímé škody omezena cenou Vaší kopie Databáze.

OMEZENÁ ZÁRUKA A OMEZENÍ ODPOVĚDNOSTI UVEDENÉ V TÉTO SMLOUVĚ SE NEDOTÝKÁ ANI

NENÍ K ÚJMĚ VAŠICH ZÁKONNÝCH PRÁV V PŘÍPADĚ, KDY JSTE NABYL(A) DATABÁZI JINAK NEŽ

V PRŮBĚHU PODNIKÁNÍ.

VAROVÁNÍ

Databáze odráží skutečnost existující předtím, než jste obdržel(a) Databázi, a zahrnuje údaje a

informace od státních orgánů a jiných zdrojů, které mohou obsahovat chyby a opomenutí. Databáze

tudíž může obsahovat nepřesné nebo neúplné informace následkem uplynutí času, měnících se

okolností, a rovněž vzhledem k povaze užívaných zdrojů. Databáze nezahrnuje ani neodráží informace

o - mimo jiné - bezpečnosti blízkého okolí; vymáhání práva; pomoci při stavu nouze; stavebních

pracech; uzávěrách silnic nebo jízdních pruhů; omezeních týkajících se vozidel nebo rychlosti; stoupání

nebo sklonu vozovky; výšce mostů, hmotnosti nebo jiných omezeních; silničních nebo dopravních

podmínkách; zvláštních událostech; dopravních zácpách; nebo jízdní době.

ROZHODNÉ PRÁVO

Tato Smlouva se řídí zákony jurisdikce, v níž máte pobyt k datu pořízení Databáze. Pokud byste v té

době měl(a) pobyt mimo Evropskou unii nebo Švýcarsko, uplatní se právo jurisdikce v rámci Evropské

unie nebo Švýcarska, kde jste si pořídil(a) Databázi. Ve všech dalších případech, nebo nemůže-li být

definována jurisdikce, kde jste si pořídil(a) Databázi, uplatní se zákony Nizozemska. Soudy kompetentní

v místě Vašeho pobytu v době, kdy jste si pořídil(a) Databázi,

590 MAX983HD

TÄMÄ KÄYTTÖOIKEUSSOPIMUS ON LUETTAVA HUOLELLISESTI ENNEN NAVTEQ-

TIETOKANNAN KÄYTTÖÄ

TIEDOKSI KÄYTTÄJÄLLE

TÄMÄ ON KÄYTTÄJÄN JA NAVTEQ B.V:N VÄLINEN KÄYTTÖOIKEUSSOPIMUS - EI

MYYNTISOPIMUS - JOKA KOSKEE KÄYTTÄJÄN HANKKIMAA TIEKARTTATIETOKANNAN

KOPIOTA, MUKAAN LUKIEN SIIHEN KUULUVA TIETOKONEOHJELMISTO, TIETOVÄLINEET JA

NAVTEQIN JULKAISEMA KIRJALLINEN OPASTUSAINEISTO (YHDESSÄ ”TIETOKANTA”).

KÄYTTÄMÄLLÄ TIETOKANTAA KÄYTTÄJÄ HYVÄKSYY KAIKKI TÄMÄN LOPPUKÄYTTÄJÄN

KÄYTTÖOIKEUSSOPIMUKSEN (”SOPIMUS”) EHDOT. JOS KÄYTTÄJÄ EI HYVÄKSY TÄMÄN

SOPIMUKSEN EHTOJA, HÄNEN ON VÄLITTÖMÄSTI PALAUTETTAVA TIETOKANTA

KOKONAISUUDESSAAN JÄLLEENMYYJÄLLE HYVITYSTÄ VASTAAN.

OMISTUSOIKEUS

Tietokanta sekä siihen liittyvät tekijänoikeudet ja immateriaalioikeudet tai muut lähioikeudet ovat

NAVTEQin tai sen lisenssinantajien omaisuutta. Tietovälineet, jotka sisältävät tietokannan, pysyvät

NAVTEQin ja/tai ohjelmistotoimittajan omistuksessa, kunnes käyttäjä on suorittanut NAVTEQille ja/tai

ohjelmistotoimittajalle koko summan, jonka tämä sopimus tai muut vastaavat sopimukset, joiden

perusteella hän on vastaanottanut tuotteet, velvoittaa hänet maksamaan.

KÄYTTÖOIKEUDEN MYÖNTÄMINEN

NAVTEQ myöntää käyttäjälle ei-yksinomaisen oikeuden tietokannan henkilökohtaiseen käyttöön tai

soveltuvissa tapauksissa käyttäjän yrityksen sisäiseen käyttöön. Tämä käyttöoikeus ei sisällä oikeutta

myöntää alilisenssejä.

KÄYTÖN RAJOITUKSET

Tietokanta on tarkoitettu käytettäväksi vain siinä tietyssä järjestelmässä, jota varten se on tehty. Ellei

pakottavasta lainsäädännöstä (esimerkiksi EU:n ohjelmistodirektiiviin (91/250/ETY) ja

tietokantadirektiiviin (96/9/EY) perustuvista kansallisista laeista) muuta seuraa, käyttäjä ei saa kopioida

tai käyttää uudelleen tietokannan sisällön olennaisia osia eikä toisintaa, kopioida, muuttaa, muuntaa,

kääntää, palauttaa assembler- tai lähdekielelle tai aukikoodata mitään tietokannan osaa. Jos käyttäjä

haluaa saada EU:n ohjelmistodirektiivissä (tai siihen perustuvassa kansallisessa lainsäädännössä)

tarkoitettuja yhteentoimivuustietoja, hänen tulee antaa NAVTEQille riittävä tilaisuus toimittaa kysytyt

tiedot kohtuullisin, NAVTEQin määräämin ehdoin, joihin sisältyy kohtuullinen korvaus.

KÄYTTÖOIKEUDEN SIIRTÄMINEN

Käyttäjä ei saa siirtää tietokantaa kolmannelle osapuolelle, paitsi kun se on asennettuna järjestelmään,

jota varten se on tehty, tai kun käyttäjälle ei jää siirron jälkeen yhtään tietokannan kopiota, ja joka

tapauksessa edellyttäen että siirronsaaja hyväksyy kaikki tämän sopimuksen ehdot ja vahvistaa tämän

kirjallisesti NAVTEQille. Useita CD-ROM-levyjä sisältävät sarjat saa siirtää tai myydä vain kokonaisena

sarjana, kuten NAVTEQ on ne toimittanut, ei osina.

RAJOITETTU TAKUU

NAVTEQ takaa jäljempänä esitettyjen varoitusten sisältämin varauksin, että tietokanta toimii 12

kuukauden ajan siitä, kun käyttäjä on hankkinut oman kopionsa, täyttäen olennaisin osin NAVTEQin

tarkkuus- ja täydellisyyskriteerit, sellaisina kuin kriteerit ovat voimassa hankintapäivänä. NAVTEQ

toimittaa kriteerit käyttäjälle pyynnöstä. Jos tietokanta ei toimi tämän rajoitetun vastuun edellyttämällä

tavalla, NAVTEQ pyrkii mahdollisuuksien mukaan korjaamaan tai vaihtamaan tietokannan

puutteellisesti toimivan kopion. Jos nämä toimet eivät johda siihen, että tietokanta toimisi esitetyn takuun

mukaisesti, käyttäjä voi valintansa mukaan joko saada kohtuullisen korvauksen maksamastaan

hankintahinnasta tai purkaa tämän sopimuksen. NAVTEQin vastuuvelvollisuus rajoittuu tähän eikä

nimenomaisesti annettua takuuta lukuun ottamatta NAVTEQ ei anna mitään takuita tietokannan tai sen

avulla saatavien tulosten virheettömyydestä, tarkkuudesta, luotettavuudesta tai muista ominaisuuksista.

NAVTEQ ei takaa että tietokanta on tällä hetkellä tai tulevaisuudessa virheetön. Mikään NAVTEQin,

ohjelmistotoimittajan tai muun henkilön antama suullinen tai kirjallinen informaatio tai ohje ei luo mitään

takuuta eikä laajenna millään lailla edellä kuvatun rajoitetun takuun kattavuutta. Tässä sopimuksessa

esitetty rajoitettu takuu ei vaikuta piilovikoja koskeviin oikeuksiin, joita pakottava lainsäädäntö

LOPPUKÄYTTÄJÄN KÄYTTÖOIKEUSSOPIMUS

591

MAX983HD

mahdollisesti takaa käyttäjälle.

Jos käyttäjä ei ole hankkinut tietokantaa suoraan NAVTEQilta, hänellä saattaa olla NAVTEQin

takaamien oikeuksin lisäksi kansallisen lainsäädännön takaamia oikeuksia siihen henkilöön nähden,

jolta hän on hankkinut tietokannan. Edellä esitetty NAVTEQin takuu ei vaikuta näihin lakisääteisiin

oikeuksiin ja käyttäjä voi vedota niihin edellä myönnettyjen takuuoikeuksien lisäksi.

VASTUUNRAJOITUKSET

Tietokannan hintaan ei sisälly mitään katetta sellaisten välillisten tai seurannaisvahinkojen tai

rajoittamattomien välittömien vahinkojen varalta, jotka ovat seurausta tietokannan käytöstä. Tästä

seuraa, että NAVTEQ ei missään tapauksessa vastaa välillisistä tai seurannaisvahingoista, mukaan

lukien muun muassa liikevaihdon, tietojen tai käyttömahdollisuuden menetykset, jotka kohdistuvat

käyttäjään tai kolmanteen osapuoleen ja aiheutuvat tietokannan käytöstä, riippumatta siitä tapahtuvatko

vahingot sopimuksen piirissä, sopimusta loukaten tai takuuseen perustuen, vaikka NAVTEQille olisi

etukäteen ilmoitettu tällaisten vahinkojen mahdollisuudesta. Kaikissa tapauksissa NAVTEQin

korvausvastuu välittömien vahinkojen tapauksessa rajoittuu käyttäjän hankkiman tietokannan hintaan.

TÄSSÄ SOPIMUKSESSA ESITETTY RAJOITETTU TAKUU JA VASTUUVELVOLLISUUDEN

RAJOITUS EIVÄT VAIKUTA KÄYTTÄJÄN LAKISÄÄTEISIIN OIKEUKSIIN, JOS TIETOKANTA ON

HANKITTU MUUTA TARKOITUSTA KUIN AMMATINHARJOITUSTA VARTEN.

VAROITUKSIA

Ajan tuomista muutoksista, olosuhteiden muuttumisesta, käytetyistä lähteistä ja kattavan

maantieteellisen tiedon keruun luonteesta johtuen tietokanta saattaa sisältää epätarkkoja tai

epätäydellisiä tietoja ja antaa virheellisiä tuloksia. Tietokanta ei sisällä tietoja muun muassa

tieympäristön turvallisuudesta, poliisin saatavillaolosta, avunannosta hätätapauksissa, tietöistä, teiden

tai kaistojen sulkemisesta, ajoneuvo- tai nopeusrajoituksista, teiden jyrkkyydestä ja kaltevuudesta,

alikulkukorkeuksista, paino- tai muista rajoituksista, tie- tai liikenneolosuhteista, erikoistapahtumista,

ruuhkista tai matkustusajoista.

SOVELLETTAVA LAKI

Tähän sopimukseen sovelletaan sen maan lakia, jossa käyttäjällä on kotipaikka tietokannan

hankintapäivänä. Jos käyttäjän kotipaikka on sillä hetkellä Euroopan unionin tai Sveitsin ulkopuolella,

sovelletaan sen maan lakia, jossa käyttäjä hankki tietokannan. Muissa tapauksissa, tai jos tietokannan

hankintapaikkaa ei voida määritellä, sovelletaan Alankomaiden lakia. Tästä sopimuksesta aiheutuvat tai

siihen liittyvät erimielisyydet ratkaistaan siinä tuomioistuimessa, joka on toimivaltainen käyttäjän

kotipaikassa tietokannan hankintahetkellä, tämän rajoittamatta NAVTEQin oikeutta nostaa kanne

käyttäjän kulloisenkin kotipaikan tuomioistuimessa.

592 MAX983HD

This system contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer by an affiliate of

Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,

reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in

violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal

action.

Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows Logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

This product is loaded with MatrixEngine® of NETDIMENSION CORPORATION for the 3D contents

drive.

Austria “Der Location- und Event-Code wurde von der ASFINAG und dem BMVIT zur

Verfügung gestellt”

Belgium “Traffic Information is provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the

Ministèrie de l´Equipement et des Transports”

Croatia ©EuroGeographics

France “source: Géoroute ®IGN France & BD Carto ®IGN France”

Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden

entnommen”

Great Britain “© Based upon Crown Copyright material.”

Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia

numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione”

Poland ©EuroGeographics

Portugal “Source: IgeoE - Portugal”

Slovenia ©EuroGeographics

Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG”

Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden”

Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie”

Publisher / Clarion Co., Ltd. http://www.clarion.com

Manufacturer / ZENRIN CO., LTD.

ZENRIN EUROPE B.V.

©Geographia Corporation

593

MAX983HD

Map Coverage

07Q4

Country Detailed

Coverage

(%)

Western

Europe

Austria 100.0%

Belgium, Netherlands, Luxemburg 100.0%

Denmark 100.0%

Finland 100.0%

France, Andorra, Monaco 100.0%

Germany 100.0%

Ireland 100.0%

Italy, San Marino, Vatican city state 100.0%

Norway 100.0%

Portugal 100.0%

Spain 100.0%

Sweden 100.0%

Switzerland, Liechtenstein 100.0%

United Kingdom 100.0%

Eastern

Europe

Croatia 41.0%

Czech Republic 54.0%

Bulgaria 14.0%

Estonia 29.0%

Greece 43.0%

Hungary 42.0%

Latvia 32.0%

Lithuania 16.0%

Poland 32.0%

Romania 11.0%

Slovakia 13.0%

Slovenia 24.0%

as of December 2007

Owner’s manual (Audio, Visual, General & Installation)

Mode d’emploi (Audio, vidéo, fonctionnement général et installation)

Benutzerhandbuch (Lyd visuel, generelt og installation)

Manuale dell’utente (Audio, video, generali e installazione)

Gebruikershandleiding (Audio, visueel, algemeen en installatie)

Guía de usuario (Imagen, sonido, general e instalación)

Ägarhandbok (Ljud, Sikt, Allmänt & Installation)

Manual do utilizador (Áudio, Visual, Geral e Instalação)

Brugervejledning (Audio, Video, Allgemein und Installation)

HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIESYSTEEM

SISTEMA DE NAVEGACIÓN HDD

NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED HÅRDDISK

SISTEMA DE NAVEGAÇÃO COM HDD

(UNIDADE DE DISCO RÍGIDO)

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

QY-5003E-B

2008/5(Y-YI)

MAX983HD

Clarion Co., Ltd.

Printed in Hungary / Imprimé en Hongrie / Gedruckt in Ungarn /

Stampato in Ungheria / Gedrukt in Hongrarije / Impreso en Hungría /

Tryckt i Ungern / Impresso na Hungria / Trykt i Ungarn

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

1. Preface

Safety Precautions

When using this system, follow the precautions listed below. After reading this manual, be sure to keep

it in a handy place (such as the glove box of your car).

CAUTION

•Do not use this unit without installing in the

vehicle properly. It may cause an injury or

electric shock.

•This appliance contains a laser system and

is classified as a “CLASS 1 LASER

PRODUCT”.

To use this model properly, read this

Owner’s Manual carefully and keep this

manual for your future reference. In case of

any trouble with this player, please contact

your nearest “AUTHORIZED service

station”. To prevent direct exposure to the

laser beam, do not try to open the

enclosure.

•While driving, set the volume so that sound

from outside the vehicle can be heard.

Driving without hearing sound from the

outside of the vehicle may cause a traffic

incident.

INFORMATION FOR USERS

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS TO THIS

PRODUCT NOT APPROVED BY THE

MANUFACTURER WILL VOID THE

WARRANTY.

WARNING

•For your safety, the driver should not watch the DVD video/TV/VTR or operate the controls

while driving. Please note that watching and operating the DVD video/TV/VTR while driving

are prohibited by law in some countries. Also, while driving, keep the volume to a level at

which external sounds can be heard.

•Do not disassemble or modify this unit.

It may cause an accident, fire, or electric shock.

•Do not use this unit when a trouble exists, such as no screen content appears or no sound

is audible. It may cause an accident, fire, or electric shock. For that case, consult your

authorised dealer or a nearest service centre.

•In case of a problem, such as foreign materials have entered in the unit, the unit gets wet, or

smoke or strange smells come out of the unit, etc., stop using this unit immediately, and

consult your authorised dealer or a nearest service centre. Using it in that condition may

cause an accident, fire, or electric shock.

•Use a fuse with the same specification only when replacing the fuse. Using a fuse with a

different specification may cause a fire.

•For the installation of this unit or a change in the installation, ask your authorised dealer or

a nearest service centre for safety. Professional skills and experiences are required to do so.

4MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

About This Manual

The following two manuals are provided to this system:

●Owner’s Manual (Audio, Visual,

General&Installation) (This Book)

This manual (hereinafter referred to as “Audio

Manual”) explains the functions and operation

procedures of the AV features. In addition, the

general precautions and other information on

using this system are also explained in this

manual.

●Navigation System Operation Manual

This manual (hereinafter referred to as

“Navigation Manual”) explains the functions and

operation procedures of the navigation features.

Note:

•This manual is described on the assumption that

the default Skin data has been applied. When the

other Skin data is applied, the screen design and

shapes of icons will be different from the contents

listed in this manual.

•Please be aware that the device may be different

from the manual according to the changes of the

specifications.

Symbols used in this manual

Notes on Handling

• In no event shall Clarion be liable for any incidental damage (including, but not limited to, loss of the

business profit or change/loss of the data) caused from use or inability to use of this product.

About this system

●Important

• To prevent discharge of the car battery, use

this system with the engine of the vehicle

running.

• The housing of this unit may become hot

because this unit has a high-speed CPU. Be

careful to handle the unit during navigating or

immediately after turning the power off.

• Turn off the power of the vehicle when

connecting or disconnecting wires. Doing this

while the power of the vehicle is turned on may

cause a trouble or malfunction.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism. Even in

the event that trouble arises, never open the

case, disassemble the unit, or lubricate the

rotating parts.

Note:

•When using this unit first time after purchasing, or

not used for long periods of time, it might take

about 5 to 15 minutes until the current location is

determined using GPS. Moreover, even when

using it often, it may take about 2 to 3 minutes until

the current location is determined according to the

GPS measuring situation.

•For vehicles equipped with an intelligent key, do

not bring the intelligent key close to this unit. This

system may not operate correctly.

•If electrical equipment that generates a strong

electrical noise is used near this unit, the screen

may be disturbed and noise may be generated. In

this case, keep away such electrical equipment or

refrain from using it.

•When the inside of the car is very cold and the

player is used soon after switching on the heater,

moisture may form on the disc (DVD/CD) or the

optical parts of the player and proper playback may

not be possible. If moisture forms on the disc

(DVD/CD), wipe it off with a soft cloth. If moisture

forms on the optical parts of the player, do not use

the player for about one hour. The condensation

will disappear naturally allowing normal operation.

•Driving on extremely bumpy roads which cause

severe vibration may cause the sound to skip.

•TV broadcast reception (when the optional TV

tuner is connected)

When receiving the TV broadcast, the strength of

the signals changes since the car is moving, so in

some cases it may not be possible to receive clear

pictures.

•TV signals are strongly linear, so reception is

affected by buildings, mountains and other

obstacles.

•External factors such as electric train lines, a

high voltage lines, and signal devices may

disturb the picture or cause noise.

*If the reception is poor, switch to a station with

good reception.

Note: : Lists what should be noted when

operating or referential information.

[ ] button : Indicates a button on this unit.

[ ] key : Indicates a menu item on the

screen.

➜: Indicates a title and page number

on which recommended reference

information is described.

Notes on Handling

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

About the hard disk drive

●Important

• Data saved to the hard disk drive may get lost

in case of a breakdown, malfunction, or other

trouble of this unit. It is recommended that you

back up your important data to a personal

computer by using SD cards*1.➜ “Backing up

User Data” (P. 72)

• Never detach the hard disk drive by yourself. In

case data*1 stored on the hard disk drive gets

erased or destroyed due to this action, no

repair covered by warranty can be granted.

• Operation of this system may be limited to

protect the hard disk drive if the temperature is

extremely high or low. In such a case, please

wait until temperature becomes normal again.

• Though certain buzzing can be heard when the

hard disk drive is working, this is not a

malfunction.

*1: You can back up the following data: the data

of the Stored Locations, the route data, the

data registered in Favourite/Frequent list, the

setting data of the Settings menu.

The recorded music data, Playlist data, and

data imported using SD cards (Skin, Image,

Album Information, Extra POI) cannot be

backed up.

About the liquid crystal panel

For a longer service life, be sure to read the

following notes.

●Important

• The operation panel will operate properly in a

temperature range of 0 to 60°C.

• Do not allow any liquids on the set from drinks,

umbrellas, etc. Doing so may damage the

internal circuitry.

• Do not disassemble or modify the set in any

way. Doing so may result in damage.

• Subjecting the operation panel to shocks may

result in breakage, deformation or other

damage.

• Do not let cigarettes burn the display. Doing so

may damage or deform the cabinet.

• If a problem should occur, have the set

inspected at your store of purchase.

• Do not insert objects or poke in the space

between the operation panel and the main unit

when the panel is tilted.

• In extremely cold weather, the display

movement may slow down and the display may

darken, but this is not a malfunction. The

display will work normally when the

temperature increases.

• Small black and shiny spots inside the liquid

crystal panel are normal for LCD products.

• The touchkeys on the display operate when

slightly touched. Do not press the touchkey

screen with strong force.

• Do not push the case surrounding the touchkey

panel with strong force. This may cause

malfunctioning of the touchkeys.

Cleaning the unit

●Cleaning the cabinet

Use a soft, dry cloth and gently wipe off the dirt.

For tough dirt, apply some neutral detergent

diluted in water to a soft cloth, wipe off the dirt

gently, then wipe again with a dry cloth.

Do not use benzene, thinner, car cleaner, etc., as

these substances may damage the cabinet or

cause the paint to peel. Also, leaving rubber or

plastic products in contact with the cabinet for

long periods of time may cause stains.

●Cleaning the liquid crystal panel

The liquid crystal panel tends to collect dust, so

wipe it off occasionally with a soft cloth. The

surface is easily scratched, so do not rub it with

hard objects.

6MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Notes on Data Stored in This System

If you transfer or resell this unit to a third party or abandon this unit, note the following matters, deal with

them under your own appropriate management.

●For your privacy protection

Initialize (delete) all data (address data, etc.)

including private information stored in the hard

disk and the memory by the procedures

described in this manual. For details, see

“Resetting to the Factory Settings” (P. 72).

About the registered marks etc.

• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorised by

Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless it is authorised by

Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

• Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry

standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please

visit www.gracenote.com.

the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,

#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under licence

from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,

and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

•“iPod” is for legal or rightholder-authorised copying only. Do not steal musics.

• Windows Media™, and the Windows® logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

About the registered marks etc.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Gracenote® End User Licence Agreement

Version 20061005

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to

perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist,

track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases

(collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the

Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR

EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive licence to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licence terminates, you

agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become

liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc.

may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose

of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS”. Gracenote

makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any

Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the

Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that

functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not

obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote

may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE

RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

8MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Contents

1. Preface................................................................................................................................... 3

Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................................................3

About This Manual ...........................................................................................................................4

Notes on Handling............................................................................................................................4

Notes on Data Stored in This System ..............................................................................................6

About the registered marks etc. .......................................................................................................6

Contents...........................................................................................................................................8

2. Basic Operations.................................................................................................................. 9

Name and Function of the Controls..................................................................................................9

Menu Types and Operation............................................................................................................11

Turning the Power ON/OFF ...........................................................................................................12

Opening the Operation Panel and Adjusting the Angle..................................................................13

Switching the Operation Mode .......................................................................................................14

Turning the Audio OFF...................................................................................................................14

Turning the Monitor OFF ................................................................................................................14

Adjusting the Volume .....................................................................................................................14

Setting/Ejecting a Disc ...................................................................................................................15

Setting/Ejecting an SD Card...........................................................................................................17

Selecting Media Source .................................................................................................................18

2Zone Function ..............................................................................................................................19

3. Operations of Basic Features............................................................................................ 20

Radio Operations ...........................................................................................................................20

DVD Video Operations ...................................................................................................................25

MP3/WMA Operations....................................................................................................................33

Audio CD Operations .....................................................................................................................37

Music Catcher Operations..............................................................................................................40

Using Recent Album List ................................................................................................................46

4. Operations of Accessories................................................................................................ 47

TV Tuner Operations......................................................................................................................47

AUX Operations .............................................................................................................................50

iPod Operations..............................................................................................................................51

Telephone Operations....................................................................................................................56

CCD Camera Operations ...............................................................................................................59

Rear Monitor Operations ................................................................................................................60

Remote Control Operations............................................................................................................61

5. System Setting.................................................................................................................... 63

General Settings.............................................................................................................................63

Navigation Settings ........................................................................................................................66

Audio Settings ................................................................................................................................66

Adjusting the Monitor......................................................................................................................67

User Settings..................................................................................................................................68

Setting Stored Data ........................................................................................................................70

Importing Data Using the SD Card.................................................................................................70

Service Options ..............................................................................................................................72

Setting Safety Camera ...................................................................................................................73

6. Others.................................................................................................................................. 74

Voice Command Operations ..........................................................................................................74

Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................75

Error Messages..............................................................................................................................77

Specification...................................................................................................................................78

INSTALLATION AND WIRE CONNECTION MANUAL ............................................................ 79

Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................................79

Package Contents..........................................................................................................................81

Contents in the Accessory Bag (No. 1) 8....................................................................................81

Contents in the Accessory Bag (No. 2) 9....................................................................................81

Installing the Main Unit ...................................................................................................................82

Installing the GPS Antenna ............................................................................................................85

Installing the Microphone for Voice Control....................................................................................86

Connecting the Speed Sensor .......................................................................................................86

Wire Connection.............................................................................................................................87

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

2. Basic Operations

Name and Function of the Controls

Name of the Controls

Function of the Controls

[ NAVI] (Navi/AV) button

• Press this button to switch the screen between

the Navigation mode screen and AV mode

menu screen.

[7 OPEN/CLOSE] button

• Press this button to open/close the operation

panel.

• Keep pressing this button more than 2 seconds

to adjust the angle of the operation panel. The

angle of the operation panel is adjustable in the

range of 0° to 30°.

Sensor

• Receives the infrared signals sent from the

optional remote control unit (operating range:

30° in all directions).

[ INFO] button

• Press this button to display/hide the RDS TMC

menu screen in any mode.

• When the Antenna function is set to “Auto

Antenna” from the General menu in the Setting

mode, keep pressing this button more than 2

seconds to extend/collapse the antenna. Be

sure to collapse the antenna before entering in

a place with low ceiling such as a multistory car

park.

[ ] (Set) button

• Press this button to enter/exit the Setting mode

to perform the system setting.

• Keep pressing this button more than 1 second

to turn off the monitor (Monitor OFF).

Blinking LED

• When the Blinking LED function is set to “ON”

from the General menu in the Setting mode,

blinks when the power is turned off.

[SRC] (Source) button

• Press this button to display/hide the Source

menu screen.

• Keep pressing this button more than 1 second

to turn off the AV feature (Audio Off).

[R], [F] (Search) buttons

• In the Tuner and TV Tuner modes, use these

buttons to change to the previous/next preset

station.

• In the DVD Video mode, use these buttons to

select a chapter to be played.

Keep pressing a button during playback

performs the fast-backward/fast-forward

operation.

Keep pressing the [F] button during pausing

performs the slow playback.

• In the Audio CD, MP3/WMA, Music Catcher,

and iPod modes, use these buttons to select a

track to be played.

Keep pressing a button during playback

performs the fast-backward/fast-forward

operation.

[NAVI]

[7OPEN/CLOSE]

[INFO]

[ ]

[SRC]

[VOICE][+], [–]

[OUT][MENU]

[IN]

[MAP]

[R], [F]

Sensor

Blinking LED

(Set)

(Source)

(Search)

(Zoom Out)

(Zoom In)

(Volume)

(Navi/AV)

Name and Function of the Controls

10 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

[MAP] button

• Press this button to display the Map screen of

the current location in any mode.

• Keep pressing this button more than 1 second

to display the Turn-by Turn/Compass screen in

any mode.

[OUT] (Zoom Out) button

• Press this button to decrease the map scale

and to show a wider area of the map when the

map is displayed. Keep pressing this button to

enter the Free Zoom mode.

[IN] (Zoom In) button

• Press this button to increase the map scale and

to show a more detailed map when the map is

displayed. Keep pressing this button to enter

the Free Zoom mode.

[MENU] button

• Press this button to display/hide the

Destination menu screen in any mode.

[+], [–] (Volume) buttons

• Use these buttons to increase/decrease the

volume.

[VOICE] button

• Press this button to display the Voice

Command menu screen and activate the voice

command function.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Menu Types and Operation

This section explains the types of the typical menu screens on the touch panel and their operation.

Source menu

Pressing the [SRC] (Source) button when the AV

feature is turned on displays the Source menu

screen. You can change the media sources or

control the 2Zone function by touching the

desired menu item. ➜ “Selecting Media

Source” (P. 18), ➜ “2Zone Function” (P. 19).

AV mode menus

Selecting a media source from the Source menu

screen displays the AV mode menu screen of the

selected source mode. When the Navigation

mode screen is displayed, pressing the [ NAVI]

(Navi/AV) button displays the AV mode menu

screen of the current source mode.

Each source mode has the own AV mode menu,

and its menu items and their functions differ

depending on the source mode. For detailed

explanation on the AV mode menu of each

source mode, see the corresponding section.

As an example, the AV mode menu screen of the

Tuner mode is shown below.

AV Shortcut menus

When the Map screen of the current location is

displayed, touching the AV key displayed at

bottom left of the screen displays the AV Shortcut

menu of the current source mode on top of the

Map screen.

Each source mode (except for the AUX mode)

has the own AV Shortcut menu, and its menu

items and their functions differ depending on the

source mode. For detailed explanation on the AV

mode menu of each source mode, see the

corresponding section.

As an example, the AV Shortcut menu screen of

the Tuner mode is shown below.

When an AV operation is performed in the

Navigation mode, audio information concerning

the selected station, chapter, track, etc. is

displayed for a while at the bottom of the screen.

Recent Album menu

The recorded Albums recently selected from the

Music Search are displayed on the Recent Album

menu, and you can play them back by an easy

operation.

To display the Recent Album menu, touch the

[ ] key on the Music Search screen, the

Destination menu or the Navi Shortcut menu,

then touch the [ ] (Recent Album) key.

12 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Turning the Power ON/OFF

Note:

•Start the engine before using this unit.

•Be careful about using this unit for a long time

without running the engine. If you drain the car’s

battery too far, you may not be able to start the

engine and this can reduce the service life of the

battery.

Turning the power on

1. Start the engine. The illuminations on this unit

light up and the power is automatically turned

on.

Note:

•The power will be turned on even when the ignition

switch is set to ACC ON position.

●When the following Caution screen is

displayed

Touch the [OK] key. The system will resume the

last status when the power was turned off.

●When the following User Profile

screen is displayed

Touch your Profile key. The system will resume

the last status when the power was turned off.

• This screen is displayed when the “Select on

Opening” item is set to “ON” from the User

menu in the Setting mode.

Turning the power off

1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position.

Note:

•Do not turn off the power while recording an audio

CD or importing/exporting/deleting data. The data

processed may be broken.

Engine ON

position

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Opening the Operation Panel and Adjusting the Angle

Open the operation panel when setting/ejecting a disc or SD card.

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted depending on the mounting angle of the unit or light

coming into the car.

CAUTION

•Do not move the operation panel forcibly or

do not apply strong force to the operation

panel.

•When the operation panel is operating, be

careful not to get your hand or finger caught

between the operation panel and main unit

or its mechanical parts.

•The driver should not operate the operation

panel while driving.

Opening/closing the

operation panel

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button.

The operation panel will be opened or closed.

Note:

•The operation panel will close automatically when

leaving it open for a while.

•When the operation panel is open, the touch panel

cannot be operated.

Adjusting the angle of the

operation panel

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted

in the range of 0° to 30°.

1. Keep pressing the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button

more than 2 seconds.

Beeps will sound twice and the operation

panel will start moving.

2. When the operation panel is moved to your

desired angle, release the button.

The operation panel will stop.

*Once you adjust the angle of the operation

panel, the operation panel will return to the

adjusted angle even after it is open/closed.

Returning the operation panel

to the original angle

1. Keep pressing the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button.

It will move, and stop at 30°.

2. Keep pressing the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button

again.

It will move, and stop at 0°.

14 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Switching the Operation Mode

To switch between the Navigation screen and Audio screen, press the [ NAVI] (Navi/AV) button.

Turning the Audio OFF

You can turn off all of the AV features.

1. Keep pressing the [SRC] (Source) button

more than 1 second.

The AV features are turned off.

●Turning the AV features on

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button.

The AV features are turned on, and the

system resumes the last status of the AV

features.

Turning the Monitor OFF

You can turn off the monitor screen, and change it to a black screen.

1. Keep pressing the [ ] (Set) button more than

1 second.

The monitor screen is turned off.

●Turning the monitor on

1. Touch the monitor screen.

The monitor screen is turned on, and resumes

the last screen.

• You can also turn on the monitor by

pressing any button except for the

[7OPEN/CLOSE] and [+]/[–] (Volume)

buttons.

Adjusting the Volume

1. Press the [+]/[–] (Volume) buttons to adjust

the volume.

[+]: Increases the volume.

[–]: Decreases the volume.

• The volume level indicated at the bottom of

the screen is in a range from 0 (min.) to 33

(max.).

CAUTION

•When the system is turned on, starting and

stopping the engine with its volume raised

to the maximum level may harm your

hearings. Be careful about adjusting the

volume.

•While driving, keep the volume level at

which external sounds can be heard.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting/Ejecting a Disc

Playable discs

This DVD player can play the following discs.

About CD Extra discs

A CD Extra disc is a disc in which a total of two

sessions have been recorded. The first session is

Audio session and the second session is Data

session.

Your personally-created CDs with more than

second data sessions recorded cannot be played

on this DVD player.

Note:

•When you play a CD Extra disc, only the first

session will be recognised.

About playing a CD-R/RW disc

This player can play CD-R/RW discs previously

recorded in Audio CD format or format with MP3/

WMA files.

About playing a DVD-R/RW or

DVD+R/RW disc

This player can play DVD-R/RW and DVD+R/RW

discs previously recorded in DVD video format or

format with MP3/WMA files.

Discs that cannot be played back

This player cannot play DVD Audio, DVD-RAM,

Video CDs, Photo CDs, etc.

Note:

•It may not be possible to play back discs recorded

on some CD/DVD drive units. (Cause: disc

characteristics, cracks, dust/dirt, dust/dirt on

player’s lens, etc.)

•If a CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW, or DVD+R/RW disc

that has not been finalised is played, it will take a

long time to start playing. Also, it may not be

possible to play depending on its recording

conditions.

•You cannot play Super Audio CDs. Playback of the

CD player is not supported even if it is a hybrid

disc.

About MP3/WMA playback

This unit can play back CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW

and DVD+R/RW discs on which MP3/WMA

music data have been recorded. ➜ “MP3/WMA

Operations” (P. 33).

Note on region numbers

The DVD video system assigns a region number

to DVD video players and DVD discs by sales

area.

The DVD video region number is marked on the

disc jacket as shown below.

Notes on handling discs

Handling

• New discs may have some roughness around

the edges. If such discs are used, the player

may not work or the sound may skip. Use a

ball-point pen or the like to remove any

roughness from the edge of the disc.

• Never stick labels on the surface of the disc or

mark the surface with a pencil or pen.

• Never play a disc with any cellophane tape or

other glue on it or with peeling off marks. If you

try to play such a disc, you may not be able to

get it back out of the DVD player or it may

damage the DVD player.

• Do not use discs that have large scratches, are

misshapen, cracked, etc. Use of such discs

may cause malfunction or damage.

• To remove a disc from its storage case, press

down on the centre of the case and lift the disc

out, holding it carefully by the edges.

• Do not use commercially available disc

protection sheets or discs equipped with

stabilizers, etc. These may damage the disc or

cause breakdown of the internal mechanism.

Playable discs

DVD video discs Audio CDs

ALL

246

Ball-point pen

Roughness

Setting/Ejecting a Disc

16 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Storage

• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or any

heat source.

• Do not expose discs to excess humidity or

dust.

• Do not expose discs to direct heat from

heaters.

Cleaning

• To remove finger marks and dust, use a soft

cloth and wipe in a straight line from the centre

of the disc to the circumference.

• Do not use any solvents, such as commercially

available cleaners, anti-static spray, or thinner

to clean discs.

• After using special disc cleaner, let the disc dry

off well before playing it.

On Discs

• Exercise a good precaution when loading a

disc. The operation panel will close

automatically when leaving it open for a while.

• Never turn off the power and remove the unit

from the car with a disc loaded.

CAUTION

For your safety, the driver should not insert

or eject a disc opening the operation panel

while driving.

Setting a disc

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

2. Insert a disc into the centre of the insertion

slot with the label side facing up.

The disc will automatically be drawn into the

DVD player, and the operation panel will

automatically be closed.

●After setting a disc

The system will automatically be switched to the

relevant source mode according to the disc, and

start playing back the disc.

When a DVD video disc is set:

The system is switched to the DVD Video mode.

See “DVD Video Operations” (P. 25).

When an Audio CD is set:

The system is switched to the CD mode. See

“Audio CD Operations” (P. 37).

When a CD/DVD with MP3/WMA files is set:

The system is switched to the MP3/WMA mode.

See “MP3/WMA Operations” (P. 33).

Note:

•Never insert foreign objects into the disc insertion

slot.

•If the disc is not inserted easily, there may be

another disc in the mechanism or the unit may

require service.

•8 cm (single play) discs cannot be used.

CAUTION

For your safety, the driver should not insert

or eject a disc opening the operation panel

while driving.

Ejecting the disc

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

2. Press the [o] (EJECT) button to eject the

disc.

“

EJECT

” appears in the display, and the

source mode then switches to the Tuner mode.

• If a disc is left in the ejected position for 15

seconds, the disc is automatically reloaded

(Auto reload). In this case, however, the

source mode will remain set to the Tuner

mode.

Note:

•Do not eject the disc while recording the audio CD.

Eject the disc after the recording is completed or

after cancelling the recording.

•If you force a disc into the insertion slot before auto

reloading, this can damage the disc.

No/Non

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting/Ejecting an SD Card

In this system, SD cards are used for playing back MP3/WMA music data, importing/exporting data

(Skin, Image, Album Information, Extra POI), and backing up/restoring the user data (Stored Locations,

system settings, etc.).

Note:

•Use the SD memory cards formatted in FAT16 or VFAT format. The SDHC cards are cannot be used.

Setting an SD card

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

2. Confirming the orientation of the SD card,

insert the SD card surely into the SD card slot

until it stops.

3. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to close

the operation panel.

Note:

•Never insert foreign objects into the SD card slot.

•If the SD card is not inserted easily, there may be

another card in the mechanism or the unit may

require service.

CAUTION

For your safety, the driver should not insert

or eject an SD card opening the operation

panel while driving.

Ejecting the SD card

Note:

•Do not eject the SD card until the operation panel

is completely opened. Data in the SD card may be

broken.

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

When playing back music data in the SD card,

the “Stop” message will appear in the display

when the operation panel is completely

opened.

2. Push the head of the SD card slightly to eject

the SD card.

The SD card will be stuck out, and “NO

MEMORY CARD” will appear in the display.

3. Remove the SD card, then press the

[7OPEN/CLOSE] button to close the

operation panel.

18 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Selecting Media Source

You can change the media source to be played from the Source menu screen.

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the desired Source key you wish to

change to.

The system is switched to the corresponding

source mode.

When you pressed the [SRC] (Source) button

from the AV mode, the corresponding AV

mode menu screen will be displayed.

When you pressed it from the Navigation

mode, the previous screen will be displayed.

Available media sources

*1: These Source keys are displayed only when the corresponding device is connected to this unit.

Key name Corresponding source

mode Refer to Description

FM/AM Tuner mode ➜ P. 20 —

DVD/CD DVD Video mode ➜ P. 25 The source mode differs depending on the

data format of the disc set in the DVD

player.

When no disc is set in the DVD player,

“NO DISC” will be displayed.

Audio CD mode ➜ P. 37

MP3/WMA mode ➜ P. 33

Music Catcher Music Catcher mode ➜ P. 40 —

SD Card SD Card mode

(MP3/WMA mode)

➜ P. 33 When no SD card is set in the SD card

slot, “NO MEMORY CARD” will be

displayed.

TV*1 TV Tuner mode ➜ P. 47 Available only when the TV tuner unit is

connected via CeNET.

AUX AUX mode ➜ P. 50 Available only when the TV tuner is not

connected via CeNET.

iPod*1 iPod mode ➜ P. 51 Available only when the iPod is

connected.

Telephone*1 Telephone mode ➜ P. 56 Available only when the Bluetooth

Interface Box is connected via CeNET.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

2Zone Function

About the 2Zone Function

The 2Zone function is a function that assigns

separate source output to the Front zone (this

unit) and Rear zone (the optional rear monitor) by

simultaneously playing two sources in this

system. Therefore, the rear passengers are

allowed to enjoy a different video source from the

source played on the monitor of this unit.

• The source sounds of the Front zone are

output from the speakers of the vehicle side,

and those of the Rear zone are from the

optional infrared headphone systems.

• Controlling a source assigned to the Rear zone

can be made by using the optional remote

control unit. To control it from this unit, once

assign the same source to the Front zone, then

control it.

Note:

•When a voice interrupt of the navigation system

arises during the 2Zone function is turned on, the

sound of the Front zone is muted, and the sound of

the Rear zone is output normally.

When it arises during the 2Zone function is turned

off, the audio signals to the 4ch speakers are

attenuated, and the voice from the navigation

system is output from the front two speakers.

•You cannot operate the 2Zone function during the

voice interrupt of the navigation system.

•When the same source is assigned for Front and

Rear zone, operations in a zone are also applied

for another zone.

•The 2Zone function is disabled when the

Telephone mode is selected.

•When a telephone interrupt arises while the 2Zone

function is turned on, the 2Zone function is

automatically turned off, and it does not resume

the 2Zone ON status even when the interruption is

finished (only when the TV tuner is connected).

Assignable media sources for Front/

Rear zone

●For Front zone

All the sources except for the Telephone mode

can be assigned for the Front zone.

●For Rear zone

The following sources can be assigned:

• DVD video mode

• TV Tuner mode

•AUX mode

Setting the 2Zone function

• The factory default setting is off.

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [2Zone] key to turn the 2Zone

function on.

The zone select keys are displayed at right of

the [2Zone] key.

3. Touch the desired Source key you wish to

assign for the Rear zone, and perform

operations for the source mode.

4. Touch the [Rear] key to switch to the Rear

zone, and touch the same Source key

previously selected.

5. Touch the [Front] key to switch to the Front

zone, and touch the desired Source key you

wish to assign for the Front zone.

6. To turn the 2Zone function off, press the

[SRC] (Source) button and touch the [2Zone]

key.

20 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

3. Operations of Basic Features

Radio Operations

In addition to the ordinal tuner functions, this unit has a built-in RDS decoder system that supports

broadcast stations transmitting RDS data.

Using this system, the following functions are available:

• TA (Traffic Announcement) function

• AF (Alternative Frequency) function

• REG (Regional Programme) function

• PTY (Programme Type) function

Note:

•When you store a station without broadcasting RDS data to the preset memory, store the station after

receiving more than 10 seconds. If you store such a station within 10 seconds, it will be stored as an RDS

station, and the RDS tracking function will work when tuning in.

Selecting the Tuner mode

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [FM/AM] key to select the Tuner

mode.

The Tuner mode screen is displayed.

Tuner mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

Radio operations

Listening to the radio

1. Touch the [Band] key to select the radio band.

Each time touching this key, the radio

reception band changes in the following

order:

FM1 ➜ FM2 ➜ AS ➜ AM (MW/LW) ➜

FM1 ...

2. Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset

key pane to tune in the preset station.

• The “AS” is a special FM band used by the

Auto Store function.

• Press the [R] or [F] (Search) button to

tune in the previous or next preset station.

• From the AV Shortcut menu, touch [P.ch]

keys to tune in the previous or next preset

station.

Seek tuning

There are 2 types of seek tuning: DX Seek and

LO Seek.

The DX Seek can tune in to receivable broadcast

stations, and the LO Seek can tune in to only

broadcast stations with a good reception

condition.

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Tune in to a station.

•If “TA” is displayed on the screen, TP

stations are automatically sought.

Frequency

Preset key pane

Information pane

Band

Radio Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

DX Seek:

Touch the [k] or [K] key to automatically

seek a station.

When the [K] key is touched, the station is

sought in the direction of higher frequencies;

if the [k] key is touched, the station is sought

in the direction of lower frequencies.

• When the DX Seek tuning starts, “DX Seek”

appears on the Information pane.

LO Seek:

If you keep touching the [k] or [K] key more

than 1 second, the Local Seek tuning is

carried out.

The broadcast stations with good reception

sensitivity are automatically selected.

• When the Local Seek tuning starts, “LO

Seek” appears on the screen.

Manual tuning

There are 2 ways available: Quick tuning and

step tuning.

When you are in the step tuning mode, the

frequency changes one step at a time. In quick

tuning mode, you can quickly tune the desired

frequency.

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Touch and hold the [Band] key for more than

1 second to switch to the manual tuning

mode.

“Manual” appears on the screen, and the

manual tuning is now available.

3. Tune into a station.

Quick tuning:

Touch and hold the [K] or [k] key for more

than 1 second to tune in a station.

Step tuning:

Touch the [K] or [k] key to manually tune in

a station.

Recalling a preset station

There are total of 24 preset positions (6 FM1, 6

FM2, 6 AS, 6 AM) to store individual radio

stations in memory.

There are 3 ways available to recall the preset

station.

●From the Tuner mode screen

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset

key pane to recall the preset station.

●From the AV Shortcut menu

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Touch [P.ch] keys to tune in the previous or

next preset station.

• You can also use the [R] and [F]

(Search) buttons instead of the [P.ch] keys.

Manual memory

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Select the desired station with the seek

tuning, manual tuning, or preset tuning.

3. Touch and hold one of the Preset key for more

than 2 seconds to store the current station into

the preset memory.

Radio Operations

22 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Preset scan

The Preset Scan receives the stations stored in

the preset memory in order. This function is

useful when searching for the desired station in

memory.

1. Touch the [PS] key to start the Preset Scan.

The unit starts scanning each station for 7

seconds sequentially.

2. When the desired station is tuned in, touch the

[PS] key again to continue receiving that

station.

Auto store

The Auto Store is a function for storing up to 6

stations that are automatically tuned in

sequentially. If 6 receivable stations cannot be

received, a previously stored station remains

unoverwritten at the memory position.

1. Select the desired band by touching the

[Band] key.

2. Touch and hold the [AS] key for more than 2

seconds.

A beep sounds and the stations with good

reception are stored automatically to the

preset channels.

Even if you select FM1 or FM2, the received

stations are stored into the memory for AS.

Displaying radio text

When the station receiving broadcasts text data,

you can display the data on the screen.

1. Touch the [Display] key on the Tuner mode

screen.

The received radio text is displayed on the

screen.

TA (Traffic Announcement)

function

In the TA standby mode, when a traffic

announcement broadcast starts, the traffic

announcement broadcast is received as top

priority regardless of the function mode, so you

can listen to it. The Traffic Programme (TP)

automatic tuning is also available.

Setting TA standby mode

1. Touch the [TA] key.

“TA” will be displayed at the bottom of the

screen, and the system will automatically

search for a TP station (TP SEEK). When an

RDS broadcast station with traffic

announcement programmes is received, “TP”

will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

The [TA] key is also provided on the RDS

TMC menu screen displayed by pressing the

[INFO] button.

Note:

•If no TP station is received, this system continues

the search operation. Performing the above

procedure again makes the “TA” go off, and stops

TP station searching.

●When a Traffic Announcement

broadcast starts

“TA” indication displayed at the bottom of the

screen will blink If you touch the [TA] key while a

Traffic Announcement broadcast is being

received, the Traffic Announcement broadcast

reception is cancelled, and the system goes into

the TA standby mode.

Cancelling TA standby mode

1. When “TA” is displayed on the screen, touch

the [TA] key.

“TA” on the screen goes off, and the TA

standby mode is cancelled.

The [TA] key is also provided on the RDS

TMC menu screen displayed by pressing the

[INFO]button.

Auto store function for TP stations

You can automatically store up to 6 TP stations

into the preset memory. If the number of TP that

can be received is less than 6, the broadcast

stations already stored in memory are left without

being overwritten.

When “

” is displayed on the screen, touch

and hold the [

] key for more than 2 seconds.

The TP stations with a good reception

condition are stored into the preset memory.

• Even if you select FM1 or FM2, TP stations

are stored into the memory for AS.

Radio Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

AF (Alternative Frequency)

function

The AF function switches to a different frequency

on the same network in order to maintain

optimum reception.

Switching ON/OFF the AF function

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the AF item to

turn the function on or off.

• When the AF function is ON, “AF” will be

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

• If the reception of the current broadcast

station deteriorates durably, “PI Searching”

is displayed on the screen, and this unit

searches for the same programme on

another frequency.

REG (Regional Programme)

function

When the REG function is ON, the optimum

regional station can be received. When this

function is OFF, if the regional station area is

switched as you drive, a regional station for that

region is received.

Note:

•This function is disabled when a national station

such as BBC R2 is being received.

•The REG function ON/OFF setting is enabled only

when the AF function is ON.

Switching ON/OFF the REG function

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the REG item

to turn the function on or off.

Manually tuning a regional station in

the same network

Note:

•This function can be used when a regional

broadcast of the same network is received.

•This function is enabled only when the AF function

is ON and the REG function is OFF.

1. Touch your desired Preset key to call out a

regional station.

2. Each time you touch the same Preset key, this

unit switches from a local station to the other

on the same network.

PTY (Programme Type)

function

This function enables you to listen to a broadcast

of the specified programme type when the

broadcast starts, even if the system operates in a

mode other than the Tuner mode.

• Some countries do not yet have PTY

broadcast.

• In the TA standby mode, a TP station has

priority over a PTY broadcast station.

Selecting PTY

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Preset] key of the PTY Select

item.

The system enters into the PTY select mode.

3. Touch your desired PTY item key to select the

programme type.

• The following table shows the factory

default settings stored for the Preset keys:

4. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

●Cancelling PTY standby mode

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [OFF] key of the PTY item.

“PTY” goes off, and the PTY standby mode is

cancelled.

●Cancelling PTY interrupt broadcast

1. Touch the [

] key during receiving the PTY

interrupt broadcast. The PTY interrupt is

cancelled, and the system returns to PTY

standby mode. The [

] key is also provided

on the RDS TMC menu screen displayed by

pressing the [ INFO] button.

Preset

number

PTY item

ENGLISH Contents

1 News News

2 Info Information

3 Pop M Pop music

4 Sport Sport

5 Classics Classics

6 Easy M Easy listening

music

Radio Operations

24 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

PTY seek

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Preset] or [Item] key of the PTY

Select item.

3. Touch your desired Programme Type key.

4. Touch a Seek key.

If you touch the [K] key or [x] button, this unit

seeks a PTY broadcast moving up the

frequencies.

If you touch the [k] key or [X] button , it

seeks moving down the frequencies.

• If no station with the selected PTY

broadcast can be received, the unit returns

to the previous mode.

PTY preset memory

1. Touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Item] key of PTY Select item.

The PTY select mode is turned on.

3. Touch your desired Programme Type key to

select.

4. Touch the [Preset] key to display the Preset

screen.

Keep touching your desired Preset key on the

Preset screen more than 2 seconds to store

the selected programme type into the preset

channel memory.

• The 29 types of PTY listed below can be

selected.

Emergency broadcast

If an emergency broadcast is received, all the

function mode operations are stopped. “Alarm”

appears on the screen and the emergency

broadcast can be heard.

●Cancelling an emergency broadcast

1. Touch the [TA] key. The emergency

broadcast reception is cancelled.

Volume setting of TA,

emergency broadcast (Alarm)

and PTY

The volume for TA, Alarm and PTY interrupts can

be set during TA, Alarm or PTY interrupt.

• The factory default setting is “15”.

1. Use the [+] and [–] (Volume) buttons to set the

volume to the desired level (00 to 33) during a

TA, Alarm or PTY interrupt.

• When the TA, Alarm, or PTY interrupt ends,

the volume returns to the level before the

interrupt.

PTY item

ENGLISH Contents

News News

Affairs Current Affairs

Info Information

Sport Sport

Educate Education

Drama Drama

Culture Culture

Science Science

Varied Varied

Pop M Pop Music

Rock M Rock Music

Easy M Easy Listening Music

Light M Light Classical Music

Classics Serious Classical

Music

Other M Other Music

Weather Weather

Finance Finance

Children Children’s

Programmes

Social Social Affairs

Religion Religion

Phone In Phone In

Travel Travel

Leisure Leisure

Jazz Jazz Music

Country Country Music

Nation M National Music

Oldies Oldies Music

Folk M Folk Music

Document Documentary

PTY item

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

DVD Video Operations

About the DVD video features

This unit provides the following functions in

addition to the high image quality and sound

quality of DVD video.

Note:

•The functions described in this section differ

depending on the DVD video disc. Refer to the

instructions provided with the DVD video.

•Some disc functions may operate differently from

those described in this manual.

Multi-sound function

DVD video can store up to 8 languages for one

film; select the language of your preference.

• The languages stored on the disc are indicated

by the icon shown below.

Multi-angle function Multi-sound

function

A DVD video that is recorded from multiple

angles allows you to select the angle of choice.

• The number of recorded angles is indicated by

the icon shown below.

Subpicture (subtitles) function

A DVD video can record subtitles for up to 32

languages and you can select the language of

the subtitles you wish to see.

• The number of recorded subtitle languages is

indicated by the icon shown below.

Multi-story function

When a DVD video contains more than one story

for a film, you can select the story you wish to

enjoy. The operation procedures vary with the

disc; observe the instructions for selecting a story

provided during playback.

Dolby

Manufactured under licence from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Menu screens

Menus can be called up during DVD video

playback to perform menu selection.

Selecting the DVD Video mode

1. Set a DVD video disc to the DVD player.

The system will automatically read the disc

data, change to the DVD Video mode, and

start playback after a while.

➜ “Setting/Ejecting a Disc” (P. 15)

Note:

•For your safety, this system has a safety function

which turns off the picture when the car is moving,

so only the audio can be heard. The picture can

only be watched when the car is stopped and the

parking brake is applied.

WARNING

•Some videos may be recorded at a higher

volume level than desired. Increase the

volume gradually from the minimal

setting after the video has started.

•For your safety, the driver should not

watch the video or operate the controls

while driving. Please note that watching

and operating the video while driving are

prohibited by law in some countries.

DVD Video Operations

26 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

●When a DVD video disc is already set

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [DVD/CD] key to select the DVD

Video mode.

The system changes to the DVD Video mode,

and starts playback from the previous

position.

DVD Video mode screen

Touching the screen during the playback

displays the following DVD Video mode screen.

• If you do not operate the menu for 5 seconds,

the DVD Video mode screen will automatically

be hidden, and it returns to the playback

screen.

• To close the DVD Video mode screen within 5

seconds, touch the [Close] key.

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

Changing the DVD System

Settings

Note:

•If the Setup operation is performed in the middle of

DVD video play, the disc will restart from the

beginning.

Selecting the DVD Setup menu

1. Touch the screen to display the DVD Video

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Option] key to display the Option

menu.

3. Touch the [Setup] key to display the DVD

Setup menu.

Touch the [C] key to display the next menu.

Touch the [c] key to return to the previous

menu.

4. Perform setting for the desired setting items.

See the following sections for detail.

• In the following sections, only the details of

settings are described, the procedures to

select items are skipped.

5. Touch the [Back] key.

Information pane

Chapter No.

Title No.

DVD Video Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting up the screen size

Set the screen size according to the optional rear

monitor which is connected to this unit.

1. Touch the [TV Display] key.

2. Touch the [Wide], [NPS], or [NLB] key to

change the screen size to “Wide”, “NPS”, or

“NLB”.

• The factory default setting is “Wide”.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

●When watching through a wide type of

the rear view monitor (16:9)

Wide:

●When watching through a

conventional type of the rear view

monitor (4:3)

NPS:

The leftmost and rightmost areas of the screen

are cut off.

This function allows displaying the important

part of image fully on the screen. In some

cases, image is displayed while being panned

(scrolled).

NLB:

A black zone is created in the top and bottom

areas of the screen.

This method displays Cinema Scope and Vista

Vision images without cutting them off by

creating a black zone on the top and bottom

gaps.

Setting up the angle mark display

You can set up so that the angle mark appears on

scenes where the angles can be switched.

1. Touch the [Angle] key.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key to turn the Angle

function “ON” or “OFF”.

• The factory default setting is “OFF”.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Setting up the disc menu language

1. Touch the [Menu Language] key.

2. Touch the desired Language key you wish to

set.

• The factory default setting is “English”.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Setting up the audio language

1. Touch the [Audio Language] key.

2. Touch the desired Language key you wish to

set.

• The factory default setting is “English”.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Setting up the subtitle language

1. Touch the [Subtitle Language] key.

2. Touch the desired Language key you wish to

set.

• To turn off the subtitle, select the [OFF] key.

• The factory default setting is “English”.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Setting up the password for setting

up of the parental level

1. Touch the [Password] key.

2. Touch the ten-key (0 to 9) to input a 4-digit

password.

• Input the old password, and touch the [OK]

key.

• The factory default setting is “0000”.

• Input a new password, and touch the [OK]

key.

• Input the same new password again, and

touch the [OK] key.

Note:

•When a disc with view restrictions is inserted, you

will be prompted to input a password. The disc will

not be viewable until the correct password is

entered.

DVD Video Operations

28 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting up the country code

Set up the country number for setting up of the

parental level.

1. Touch the [Locale] key.

2. Touch the ten-key (0 to 9) to input a 4-digit

country code (see the following table).

• The factory default setting is “7166” (U.K.).

3. Touch the [OK] key.

●Country code list

Country Input code

ALBANIA 6576

ANDORRA 6568

AUSTRIA 6584

BAHRAIN 6672

BELGIUM 6669

BOSNIA AND

HERZEGOVINA 6665

BULGARIA 6671

CROATIA (local name:

Hrvatska) 7282

CYPRUS 6789

CZECH REPUBLIC 6790

DENMARK 6875

EGYPT 6971

FINLAND 7073

FRANCE 7082

(FRANCE, METROPOLITAN) 7088

GERMANY 6869

GREECE 7182

HUNGARY 7285

ICELAND 7383

IRAN (ISLAMIC REPUBLIC

OF) 7382

IRAQ 7381

IRELAND 7369

ISRAEL 7376

ITALY 7384

JAPAN 7480

JORDAN 7479

KUWAIT 7587

LEBANON 7666

LESOTHO 7683

LIECHTENSTEIN 7673

LUXEMBOURG 7685

MACEDONIA, THE FORMER

YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF 7775

MALTA 7784

MONACO 7767

NETHERLANDS 7876

(NETHERLANDS ANTILLES) 6578

NORWAY 7879

OMAN 7977

POLAND 8076

PORTUGAL 8084

QATAR 8165

ROMANIA 8279

SAN MARINO 8377

SAUDI ARABIA 8365

SLOVAKIA (Slovak Republic) 8375

SLOVENIA 8373

SOUTH AFRICA 9065

SPAIN 6983

SWAZILAND 8390

SWEDEN 8369

SWITZERLAND 6772

SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC 8389

TURKEY 8482

UNITED ARAB EMIRATES 6569

UNITED KINGDOM 7166

Vatican City State 8665

YEMEN 8969

YUGOSLAVIA 8985

FAROE ISLANDS 7079

GIBRALTAR 7173

GREENLAND 7176

SVALBARD AND JAN

MAYEN ISLANDS 8374

Country Input code

DVD Video Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting up the parental level

You can change the level of parental lock

(audiovisual restriction).

This function allows cutting scenes that are

unfavourable for children or replacing them

automatically with other scenes prepared in

advance. For example, by replacing scenes of

radical violence or portrayals of sex with safe

scenes, you can make a trouble-free story as if it

were so from the beginning.

1. Touch the [Parental Level] key.

The Password input screen is displayed.

2. Touch the ten-key (0 to 9) to input a 4-digit

password, and touch the [OK] key.

• The factory default setting of the password

is “0000”.

3. Touch the desired Level key to select level 1

to 8, or “No Parental”.

• The factory default setting is “No Parental”.

4. Touch the [Back] key.

The relationship between DVD video category

codes and parental level are shown in the table

below. Use this table when setting the parental

level.

• The contents that the parental level restricts

vary with the country code.

DVD Video Operations

Watching a DVD Video

After disc loading, the play mode is automatically

engaged.

• When playback is not started, touch the [6]

key.

• Operations may differ depending on the story

of the disc.

●When the menu screen is displayed

For general DVD-Video discs, the DVD menu

screen may appear.

After the DVD menu screen is displayed, select

an item in the operations described as follows.

Selecting the screen size

You can change the screen size to suit to the

playback film.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD Video mode screen, touch

the [ ] key.

2. Touch the [Wide], [Cinema], or [Normal] key

to set the desired screen size.

• The factory default setting is “Wide”.

Wide:

The image is expanded so that the rectangle

of the image fits to the screen. The aspect

ratio of the image may be changed.

Cinema:

The image is expanded so that the left and

right edges of the image fit to the screen. The

top and bottom areas of the image may be cut

off.

Normal:

The image is expanded so that the top and

bottom edges of the image fit to the screen.

DVD menu operations

• These operations cannot be performed from

the AV Shortcut menu screen.

●Showing the DVD menu

1. Showing the DVD Video mode screen, touch

the [Top Menu] or [Menu] key during

playback.

The DVD menu appears.

• The displayed contents for each key differ

depending on the DVD software.

• An example shown below is the DVD menu

display:

●Operating the DVD menu (Direct

Touch)

1. Touch the desired menu item displayed on the

screen.

The function assigned to the menu item will be

activated.

LEVEL7 NC-17 (NO ONE 17 AND UNDER

ADMITTED)

LEVEL6 R (RESTRICTED)

LEVEL4 PG-13 (PARENTS STRONGLY

CAUTIONED)

LEVEL3 PG (PARENTAL GUIDANCE

SUGGESTED)

LEVEL1 G (GENERAL AUDIENCES)

DVD Video Operations

30 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

●Operating the DVD menu (Key Pad)

When the menu items are hard to select

correctly, you can also operate them by

displaying the Key Pad panel.

• When the Key Pad is displayed, Direct Touch

operation of the button items is disabled.

1. Press the [OUT] (Zoom Out) or [IN] (Zoom In)

button.

The Cursor-Key Pad panel is displayed on the

screen.

• Touching the [Num] key changes the panel

to the Numeric-Key Pad.

2. Select the desired menu item using either the

Cursor-Key or the Num-Key according to the

menu contents.

3. Touch the [ENT] key to specify the selected

menu item.

4. Touch the [Back] key to hide the Key Pad

panel.

Stopping playback

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

and hold the [6] key for more than 1 second

during playback.

Playback is stopped.

2. To resume playback, touch the [6] key.

Playback resumes from the scene where

playback is stopped.

Pausing playback

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [6] key during playback.

Playback pauses.

2. To resume playback, touch the [6] key

again.

Playback resumes.

Slow playback

1. Touch the [6] key during playback to pause

playback, then touch and hold the [Chapter]

key.

While touching the key, slow playback

continues at 1/3 speed.

Releasing the key resumes the normal

playback.

• The [F] (Search) button can also be used

instead of the [Chapter] key.

• Slow playback cannot be performed in the

backward direction. In addition, audio

cannot be reproduced during slow

playback.

Fast forward and fast backward

1. Touch and hold a [Chapter] key during

playback.

[x] key: Fast forward

[X] key: Fast backward

The playback speed becomes 5-times faster

at first and then 10-times faster 3 seconds

later.

Releasing the key resumes the normal speed

playback.

• The [R] and [F] (Search) buttons can

also be used instead of the [Chapter] keys.

• No audio is reproduced during fast forward

and fast backward operation.

• The fast forward and fast backward speed

may differ depending on the disc.

Skipping chapters (searching)

“Chapter” means a small segment to divide the

“Title” (film) which is recorded on the disc.

1. Touch a [Chapter] key during playback.

Chapters are skipped as many as the times

touching the key, and playback starts.

• Touching the [x] key starts playback from

the beginning of the next chapter.

• Touching the [X] key starts playback from

the beginning of the current chapter.

When touching this key again within about 3

seconds, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous chapter.

• The [R] and [F] (Search) buttons can

also be used instead of the [Chapter] keys.

Chapter Chapter Chapter

updown

Current

location

DVD Video Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Skipping titles (searching)

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Title] key during playback.

Titles are skipped as many as the times

touching the key, and playback starts.

• Touching the [K] key starts playback from

the beginning of the next title.

• Touching the [k] key starts playback from

the beginning of the previous title.

Searching with a chapter/title

number

You can locate the beginning of a scene using

the chapter numbers or title numbers recorded

on the DVD Video disc.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Search] key.

The Key Pad screen appears with the chapter

number input mode. Touching the [Title] key

turns the Key Pad to the title number input

mode.

Title:

A large segment to divide the data area of the

disc.

Chapter:

A small segment to divide the data area of the

Title.

3. Input the number of the title/chapter that you

want to play back with the [0] to [9] key.

4. Touch the [OK] key.

Playback starts from the scene of the input

title number or chapter number.

• If the input title/chapter number does not

exist or searching with a title/chapter

number is not allowed, the screen image will

not change.

Scan playback

Scans and plays back all chapters recorded on

the disc, the first 10 seconds for each.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Chapter] key of the Scan item,

then touch the [Back] key.

The “C.SCN” will be displayed.

After scan playback of all chapters on the

disc, chapter scanning through the same disc

is performed again.

Depending on the disc, the menu may appear

again after scan playback of all chapters

within the title.

3. To return to the normal playback at the

currently played chapter, touch the screen to

show the DVD video mode screen, and touch

the [X] key.

Repeat playback

This operation plays back the current chapter

repeatedly.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Chapter] key of the Repeat item,

then touch the [Back] key.

The “C.RPT” will be displayed.

3. Perform the same operation to turn off the

repeat playback.

Switching among languages

On discs in which two or more audios or audio

languages have been recorded, you can switch

among the audio languages during playback.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Audio] key during playback.

• Each time you touch the key, you can switch

among audio languages.

• Depending on the disc, up to 8 audios may

be recorded. For details, see the mark of the

disc ( : Indicates that 2 audios have

been recorded).

• When the power is turned on and the disc is

changed to a new one, the language set as

the factory default is selected. If that

language has not been recorded, the

language is specified on the disc.

DVD Video Operations

32 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

• Depending on the disc, switching may be

completely impossible or impossible on

some scenes.

• It may take time to switch among audios.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Switching subtitles

On DVD discs in which two or more subtitle

languages have been recorded, you can switch

among the subtitle languages during playback.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Showing the DVD video mode screen, touch

the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [Subtitle] key during playback.

Each time you touch the key, you can switch

among subtitles.

• Depending on the disc, up to 32 kinds of

subtitles may be recorded. For details, see

the mark of the disc ( : Indicates that 2

kinds of subtitles have been recorded).

• Depending on the disc, switching may be

completely impossible or impossible on

some scenes.

• It may take time to switch among subtitles.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

●To turn off subtitles

1. Repeat touching the [Subtitle] key until “0/X

OFF” is displayed on the screen.

Subtitles are turned off.

Switching angles

On DVD discs in which video images have been

recorded in two or more angles, you can switch

among the angles during playback.

This operation can be performed when the

“Setting up the angle mark display” function

(see page 27) is set to “ON”.

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Touch the [ ] (Angle) key during playback.

Each time you touch the key, you can switch

among angles.

• Depending on the disc, up to 9 angles may

be recorded. For details, see the mark of the

disc ( : Indicates multi-angle).

• Depending on the disc, angles may switch

smoothly or switch with a momentary still

image.

• When the power is turned on and the disc is

changed to a new one, the language set at

the time of factory shipment is selected. If

that language has not been recorded, the

language is specified on the disc.

• Depending on the disc, switching may be

completely impossible or impossible on

some scenes.

• It may take time to switch among angles.

• Depending on the disc, scenes recorded in

two or more angles may be played back.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

MP3/WMA Operations

This system can play MP3/WMA data recorded on a disc or saved in an SD card.

About the MP3/WMA files

What is MP3/WMA?

MP3 and WMA are the audio compression

methods which have penetrated into PC users

and become a standard format.

MP3 is an audio compression method and

classified into audio layer 3 of MPEG standards.

WMA is an audio compression method

developed by Microsoft Corporation.

These features compress the original audio data

to about 10 percent of its initial size with a high

sound quality. This means that about 10 music

CDs can be recorded on a CD-R/RW disc to

allow a long listening time without having to

change CDs.

Displaying MP3/WMA Tag titles

Tag information such as title, artist and album

title can be displayed for an MP3/WMA file

containing the Tag information.

Note:

•This system does not completely support the ID3

version 2.x tag format. These tags may not be

displayed.

Precautions on the MP3/MWA data

• Files other than MP3/WMA data cannot be

played. In addition, some files may not be

played because of the encoding format. When

a file cannot be played, the next file is played

instead.

• Some noise may occur depending on the type

of encoder software used to encode the data.

• You can apply the VBR (variable bit rate)

format when encoding, but setting the value of

VBR to within ranges from 32 kbps to 320 kbps

is recommended. In case of data recorded in

VBR, the displayed play time may be slightly

different from the actual play time.

• Tag information entered with 2-byte characters

may not be displayed properly on the display.

• Files that the DRM (Digital Rights

Management) function is set cannot be played.

• Add a file extension “.MP3” or “.mp3” to an

MP3 file, and “.WMA” or “.wma” to a WMA file

using single byte characters. If you add other

file extension or forget to add the file extension,

the file cannot be played.

Precautions when preparing a disc/

SD card

●Logical format (File system)

Specify the following formats as the file system.

Otherwise, normal playback may not be possible.

For a disc:

Specify “ISO9660 level 1” or “level 2” (without

including expansion format) as the writing format

when writing MP3/WMA files on a disc.

For an SD card:

Use the SD cards formatted in FAT16 or V-FAT

format to store MP3/WMA files.

●Folder structure

• The folder hierarchy must be within 8

hierarchical levels. Otherwise, playback will be

impossible.

• You can store the MP3 files and WMA files

together in a folder.

●Number of files or folders

For a disc:

• The maximum allowable number of folders is

255 (including root directory).

• The maximum allowable number of files in a

disc is 512.

• The maximum allowable number of files in a

folder is 255.

For an SD card:

• The maximum allowable number of folders is

99 (including root directory).

• The maximum allowable number of files in a

card is 255.

• The maximum allowable number of files in a

folder is 99.

●Folder representation in the Folder list

• Only folders containing MP3/WMA files (1 to

4 in illustration) are displayed on the list.

Folders containing no MP3/WMA file are not

displayed.

• Folder hierarchy is ignored, and unified into 1

level.

• Folders are arranged in the order of the folder

creation.

MP3/WMA Operations

34 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Selecting the MP3/WMA mode

The MP3/WMA mode is actually separated in CD

mode or SD Card mode, and the selecting

methods differ depending on the media source.

Selecting the CD mode

1. Set a disc which the MP3/WMA data is

recorded to the DVD player.

The system will automatically read the disc

data, change to the CD mode (MP3/WMA

mode), and start playback after a while.

➜ “Setting/Ejecting a Disc” (P. 15)

●When a disc is already set

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [DVD/CD] key to select the CD

mode.

The system changes to the CD mode (MP3/

WMA mode), and starts playback from the

previous position.

Selecting the SD Card mode

1. Set an SD card which the MP3/WMA data is

stored to the SD card slot.

➜ “Setting/Ejecting an SD Card” (P. 17)

2. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

3. Touch the [SD Card] key to select the SD

Card mode.

The system changes to the SD Card mode

(MP3/WMA mode), and starts playback after

a while.

Note:

•When the operation panel is opened while playing

back music data in the SD card, the playback will

be stopped and the “Stop” message will appear in

the display.

MP3/WMA mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

MP3/WMA operations

Selecting a track to play

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Display the desired Track key on the Track list

pane by touching the [{] or [}] key, touch the

Track key to play back the track.

Playback of the specified track starts.

WARNING

•Some tracks may be recorded at a higher

volume level than desired. Increase the

volume gradually from the minimal

setting after the playback has started.

WARNING

•Some tracks may be recorded at a higher

volume level than desired. Increase the

volume gradually from the minimal

setting after the playback has started.

Folder name Track list pane

Information pane

File type

MP3/WMA Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Skipping a track (searching)

1. Press the [R] or [F] (Search) button

during playback.

Tracks are skipped, as many as the times

pressing the button, and playback starts.

• Pressing the [F] button starts playback

from the beginning of the next track.

• Pressing the [R] button starts playback

from the beginning of the current track.

When pressing this button again within

about 2 seconds, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous track.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

• These functions perform in the current

folder only.

Fast forward and fast backward

1. Keep pressing the [R] or [F] (Search)

button during playback.

The playback speed becomes 10-times

faster.

Releasing the button resumes the normal

speed playback.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

Skipping the current folder

1. Touch a [Folder] key during playback.

The tracks of the current folder are skipped

and playback starts from the first track of the

next or previous folder.

Selecting a folder/track from the List

screen

1. Touch the [List] key.

The Folder list screen is displayed.

2. When the desired folder is not displayed,

touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

3. Touch the desired Folder key.

The Track list screen appears.

4. Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list, and

touch the desired Track key.

The corresponding track is started playback.

5. Touch the [Back] key.

Displaying Tag information of a

track

1. Touch the [List] key to display the Folder list

screen.

2. Touch the desired Folder key.

The Track list screen appears.

3. Touch the desired track key you wish to

display the Tag information, then touch the

[ ] key displayed at the right of the Track

key.

The Tag information of specified track is

displayed.

4. Touch the [Back] key.

Scrolling titles

When a title or other information displayed on the

screen is longer than the text area, you can

confirm the entire text by scrolling it.

1. Displaying the text you wish to scroll, touch

the [ ] key displayed at the right of the text

area.

The text will scroll once.

MP3/WMA Operations

36 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Other various play functions

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Touch the [Option] key.

The Option menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch a touch key of the function you want to

play.

Folder scan playback:

Touch the [Folder] key of the Scan item.

• This operation scans and plays back the

first tracks of all folders in the disc/card, the

first 10 seconds for each.

•“F.SCN” is displayed on the information

pane.

Track scan playback:

Touch the [Track] key of the Scan item.

• This operation scans and plays back all

tracks recorded in the disc/card, the first 10

seconds for each.

•“T.SCN” is displayed on the information

pane.

Folder repeat playback:

Touch the [Folder] key of the Repeat item.

• This operation plays back tracks in the

current folder repeatedly.

•“F.RPT” is displayed on the information

pane.

1 track repeat playback

Touch the [1 Track] key of the Repeat item.

• This operation plays back the current track

repeatedly.

•“T.RPT” is displayed on the information

pane.

All track random playback:

Touch the [All Track] key of the Random

item.

• This operation plays back tracks recorded

in the disc/card in no particular order.

•“T.RDM” is displayed on the information

pane.

1 folder random playback:

Touch the [1 Folder] key of the Random item.

• This operation plays the tracks in the

current folder in a random order.

•“F.RDM” is displayed on the information

pane.

3. To cancel the play, touch the same touch key

to cancel the function.

4. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Audio CD Operations

This system can display the track information (Album title, Track title, Artist name, and Genre) of the

currently played disc by using the Album Information data stored in this system.

In addition, this system can record the audio data of the disc by compressing into ATRAC3 format, and

store them as the Music Catcher data. ➜ “Recording tracks from a CD” (P. 39), ➜ “Music Catcher

Operations” (P. 40)

●About the track information of the

recorded data

When the track information can be obtained from

the Album Information data, this data is used as

the track information. If not, the album title is

named using the recording date and a

consecutive number (such as “2008. 6. 10-001”),

and the track title is named such as “Track 01”.

You can edit this information in the Music

Catcher mode. ➜ “Editing album/track

information” (P. 42)

Note:

•This system can play back/record the CDDA discs,

and cannot play back/record the DTS CD discs.

Some discs with CCCD or the other format may be

able to play back.

•The Gracenote Media Database can be imported

into the hard disk drive by using the SD card. ➜

“Importing Data Using the SD Card” (P. 70)

Selecting the Audio CD mode

1. Set an audio CD to the DVD player.

The system will automatically read the disc

data, change to the Audio CD mode, and start

playback after a while. ➜ “Setting/Ejecting a

Disc” (P. 15)

And also, recording data into the Music

Catcher will be automatically started when the

CD is not recorded in the Music Catcher.

• You can change the setting so that the

recording is not performed automatically but

performed manually. ➜ “Switching the CD

Recording mode” (P. 66)

Note:

•While recording the CD, no operation for the disc

can be made unless cancelling the recording. If

you cancel recording, you can restart the recording

by the manual operation. ➜ “Recording tracks

from a CD” (P. 39)

●When an audio CD is already set

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [DVD/CD] key to select the Audio

CD mode.

The system changes to the Audio CD mode,

and starts playback from the previous

position.

Audio CD mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

WARNING

•Some CDs may be recorded at a higher

volume level than desired. Increase the

volume gradually from the minimal

setting after the playback has started.

Album title Track list pane

Information pane

Track title/Recording status

Audio CD Operations

38 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Audio CD operations

Selecting a track to play

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Display the desired Track key on the Track list

pane by touching the [{] or [}] key, then

touch the Track key to play back the track.

Playback of the specified track starts.

Skipping a track (searching)

1. Press the [R] or [F] (Search) button

during playback.

Tracks are skipped, as many as the times

pressing the button, and playback starts.

• Pressing the [F] button starts playback

from the beginning of the next track.

• Pressing the [R] button starts playback

from the beginning of the current track.

When pressing this button again within

about 2 seconds, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous track.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

Fast forward and fast backward

1. Keep pressing the [R] or [F] (Search)

button during playback.

The playback speed becomes 5-times faster at

first and then 20-times faster 3 seconds later.

Releasing the button resumes the normal

speed playback.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

Selecting a track from the List

screen

1. Touch the [List] key.

The Track list screen appears.

2. Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list, and

touch the desired Track key.

The corresponding track is started playback.

• Tracks with the icon indicate that the

track has been recorded in the Music

Catcher.

• Tracks with the [ ] key indicate the track

information can be displayed using the

Album Information data or logged data in

the Music Catcher.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Displaying track information of a

track

1. Touch the [List] key to display the Track list

screen.

2. Touch the desired track key you wish to

display the track information, then touch the

[ ] key displayed at the right of the Track

key.

The track information of specified track is

displayed.

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Scrolling titles

When a title or other information displayed on the

screen is longer than the text area, you can

confirm the entire text by scrolling it.

1. Displaying the text you wish to scroll, touch

the [ ] key displayed at the right of the text

area.

The text will scroll once.

Other various play functions

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Touch the [Option] key.

The Option menu screen is displayed.

Audio CD Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

2. Touch a touch key of the function you want to

play.

Track scan playback:

Touch the [Track] key of the Scan item.

• This operation scans and plays back all

tracks recorded in the disc, the first 10

seconds for each.

•“T.SCN” is displayed on the information

pane.

Track repeat playback:

Touch the [Track] key of the Repeat item.

• This operation plays back the current track

repeatedly.

•“T.RPT” is displayed on the information

pane.

Track random playback:

Touch the [Track] key of the Random item.

• This operation plays back tracks recorded

in the disc in no particular order.

•“T.RDM” is displayed on the information

pane.

3. To cancel the play, touch the same touch key

to cancel the function.

4. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Recording tracks from a CD

With the factory default setting, all tracks on a CD

are automatically recorded when the first time

setting the disc into the DVD player. You can also

change this setting to the setting of which the

recording is not performed automatically, but it is

performed manually.

●Recordable number of albums or

tracks

• Up to 500 albums can be recorded.

• Up to 99 tracks can be included in an album.

• Up to 4000 tracks can be recorded.

• Up to 16 GB HDD space can be used for audio

data.

●Setting the manual recording mode

For the setting operation, see “Switching the CD

Recording mode” (P. 66).

●Recording tracks

• This operation cannot be performed when all

the tracks on the CD is already recorded.

1. Set the audio CD you wish to record into the

DVD player.

The Audio CD mode screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [REC] key.

The Rec Mode screen is displayed.

3. Touch the desired key you wish to perform.

[All Tracks]:

Start recording of all the tracks in the CD.

[Current Track]:

Start recording of the track currently played

back.

[Selected Tracks]:

The Select Track screen is displayed. Touch

the desired Track keys you wish to record,

then touch the [OK] key to start recording of

the specified track.

40 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Music Catcher Operations

What is the Music Catcher?

The audio data recorded from the audio CDs are

stored in the Music Catcher. By selecting the

Music Catcher mode, you can manage the great

number of recorded audio data efficiently, and

can play back these data.

●Recordable number of albums or

tracks

• Up to 500 albums can be recorded.

• Up to 99 tracks can be included in an album.

• Up to 4000 tracks can be recorded.

• Up to 16 GB HDD space can be used for audio

data.

About the Music Search function

You can search the audio data to be played back

narrowing by the Album title, Artist name, Genre,

Album image, and/or Playlist title selected from

the list screens.

About the Playlist

Playlist is a list of tracks to be played back. You

can create a playlist collecting your favourite

numbers.

• You can create up to 100 playlists.

• Up to 99 tracks can be listed in a playlist

selecting the tracks at random.

Selecting the Music Catcher

mode

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [Music Catcher] key to select the

Music Catcher mode.

The system changes to the Music Catcher

mode, and starts playback from the previous

position.

Music Catcher mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

Basic operations of the Music

Catcher

Note:

•The operations described in this section operate

only upon the selected albums/playlists by using

the Music Search function. ➜ “Searching tracks

(Music Search)” (P. 43)

Selecting a track to play

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Display the desired Track key on the Track list

pane by touching the [{] or [}] key, touch the

Track key to play back the track.

Playback of the specified track starts.

Album/Playlist title Track list pane

Information pane

Track name

Music Catcher Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Skipping a track (searching)

1. Press the [R] or [F] (Search) button

during playback.

Tracks are skipped as many as the times

pressing the button, and playback starts.

• Pressing the [F] button starts playback

from the beginning of the next track.

• Pressing the [R] button starts playback

from the beginning of the current track.

When pressing this button again within

about 2 seconds, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous track.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

• These functions perform in the current

album/playlist only.

Fast forward and fast backward

1. Keep pressing the [R] or [F] (Search)

button during playback.

The playback speed becomes 5-times faster

at first and then 10-times faster 3 seconds

later.

Releasing the button resumes the normal

speed playback.

• To perform this operation from the AV

Shortcut menu screen, use the [Track] keys

instead of the [R] and [F] (Search)

buttons.

Skipping the current album/playlist

1. Touch a [Album] or [Playlist] key during

playback.

The tracks of the current album/playlist are

skipped and playback starts from the first

track of the next or previous album/playlist.

Selecting an album/playlist or track

from the List screen

1. Touch the [List/Edit] key.

The Album list screen or Playlist list screen is

displayed.

2. When the desired album/playlist is not

displayed, touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the

list.

3. Touch the desired Album/Playlist key.

The Track list screen appears.

4. Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list, and

touch the desired Track key.

The corresponding track is started playback.

Touch the [Back] key.

Displaying information registered

for the album/playlist/track

1. Display the item key of the album/playlist/

track you wish to display information.

• Touch the [List/Edit] key to display the

Album list screen or Playlist screen.

• Moreover, touch desired Album/Playlist key

to display the Track list screen.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

2. Touch the [ ] key displayed at the right of

the desired item key.

The information of specified item is displayed.

Album information screen:

Playlist information screen:

Track information screen:

3. Touch the [Back] key.

Scrolling titles

When a title or other information displayed on the

screen is longer than the text area, you can

confirm the entire text by scrolling it.

1. Displaying the text you wish to scroll, touch

the [ ] key displayed at the right of the text

area.

The text will scroll once.

Music Catcher Operations

42 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Editing album/track

information

You can edit album/track information from the

information screens. ➜ “Displaying information

registered for the album/playlist/track” (P. 41)

Note:

•This operation is disabled while recording a CD or

loading/ejecting a disc. To edit the information of

the album/tracks currently recording, once exit the

Music Catcher mode, then enter again after the

recording completes.

1. Display the item key of the album/track you

wish to edit information.

• Touch the [List/Edit] key to display the

Album list screen.

• Moreover, touch desired Album key to

display the Track list screen.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

2. Touch the [ ] key displayed at the right of

the desired item key.

The information of specified item is displayed.

3. Perform the edit operation described below

according to the specified item.

4. When the setting is completed, touch the

[Back] key to return to the previous screen.

●Editing Album information

• By touching the [Get Info] key, you can obtain

these information automatically from the Album

Information data stored in the hard disk drive if

they are listed.

1. Touch the [Album] key, edit the displayed

album title by touching the characters on the

screen, then touch the [OK] key.

[]

Deletes the last entered character.

[Back]

Returns to the previous screen.

[Lower]

Displays lower case characters input

keyboard.

[Upper]

Displays upper case characters input

keyboard.

[All Clear]

Deletes all characters entered so far.

[A-Z]

Displays the alphabetic input keyboard.

[Accent]

Displays the accent characters input

keyboard.

[0-9]

Displays the number input keyboard.

[Symbols]

Displays the symbol characters input

keyboard.

[OK]

Fixes the entered characters, and returns to

the previous screen.

2. Touch the [Artist] key, enter/edit the artist

name by touching the characters on the

screen, then touch the [OK] key.

Edit by the same way as the Album title entry.

3. Touch the [Genre] key, touch the desired

Genre key you wish to specify, then touch the

[Back] key.

4. Touch the [Image] key, touch the desired

image key, then touch the [Back] key.

• You can assign your imported image data

by touching the [User] key.

●Editing Track information

• By touching the [Get Info] key, you can obtain

these information automatically from the Album

Information data stored in the hard disk drive if

they are listed.

1. Touch the [Track] key, edit the track title by

touching the characters on the screen, then

touch the [OK] key.

Edit by the same way as the Album title entry.

2. Touch the [Artist] key, enter/edit the artist

name by touching the characters on the

screen, then touch the [OK] key.

Edit by the same way as the Album title entry.

Music Catcher Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Searching tracks (Music

Search)

You can search albums/playlists to play

narrowing by the following categories:

Albums:

The Album list of all the recorded albums is

displayed. You can select all the albums or a

desired album.

Artists:

You can narrow the listed album title by

specifying the artist name.

Genres:

You can narrow the listed album title by

specifying the genre and artist name.

Album Image:

The Album list with the assigned image is

displayed. You can select a desired album by

looking the image.

Playlists:

The list of all the playlists registered is displayed.

You can select all the playlists or a desired

playlist.

Displaying the Music Search screen

1. Touch the [Search] key.

The Music Search screen is displayed.

• This screen can also be opened by touching

[Music Search] key from the Destination

menu screen.

Note:

•This operation is disabled while recording the first

track of a CD or loading/ejecting a disc.

Searching by Album

1. Touch the [Albums] key on the Music Search

screen.

The Album list is displayed with the order of

recorded date.

2. Touch the desired Album key you wish to play

back.

• Selecting [All Albums] key specifies all the

album data recorded in this system. You

can change the album to play by the album

skip operation.

• Touching the [by Name] key sorts the list by

the alphanumerical order of the album title.

In this list, touching the alphabet key

displayed at the right of the screen scrolls

the list to the first item of which the initial

character of the album title matches to the

specified key character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

Searching by Artist

1. Touch the [Artists] key on the Music Search

screen.

The Artist list is displayed with the

alphanumerical order.

2. Touch the desired Artist key you wish to

search data.

The Album list of the specified artist is

displayed with the order of recorded date.

• Touching the alphabet key displayed at the

right of the screen scrolls the list to the first

item of which the initial character of the

artist name matches to the specified key

character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

3. Touch the desired Album key you wish to play

back.

• Selecting [All Albums] key specifies all the

album data of the specified artist. You can

change the album to play by the album skip

operation.

• Touching the [by Name] key sorts the list by

the alphanumerical order of the album title.

In this list, touching the alphabet key

displayed at the right of the screen scrolls

the list to the first item of which the initial

character of the album title matches to the

specified key character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

Music Catcher Operations

44 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Searching by Genre

1. Touch the [Genres] key on the Music Search

screen.

The Genre list is displayed.

2. Touch the desired Genre key you wish to

search data.

The Artist list of the specified genre is

displayed.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

3. Touch the desired Artist key you wish to

search data.

The Album list of the specified artist is

displayed with the order of recorded date.

• Selecting [All Artists] key specifies all the

artists of the specified genre.

• Touching the alphabet key displayed at the

right of the screen scrolls the list to the first

item of which the initial character of the

artist name matches to the specified key

character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

4. Touch the desired Album key you wish to play

back.

• Selecting [All Albums] key specify all the

album data of the specified artist. You can

change the album to play by the album skip

operation.

• Touching the [by Name] key sorts the list by

the alphanumerical order of the album title.

In this list, touching the alphabet key

displayed at the right of the screen scrolls

the list to the first item of which the initial

character of the album title matches to the

specified key character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

Searching by Album Image

1. Touch the [Album Image] key on the Music

Search screen.

The Album Image list is displayed.

2. Touch the desired Album key you wish to play

back.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

Searching by Playlist

1. Touch the [Playlists] key on the Music

Search screen.

The Playlist list is displayed with the order of

created date.

2. Touch the desired Playlist key you wish to

play back.

• Selecting [All Playlists] key specifies all the

playlists created in this system. You can

change the Playlist to play by the Playlist

skip operation.

• Touching the [by Name] key sorts the list by

the alphanumerical order of the playlist

name. In this list, touching the alphabet key

displayed at the right of the screen scrolls

the list to the first item of which the initial

character of the playlist name matches to

the specified key character.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

Creating a Playlist

You can create a playlist collecting your favourite

numbers.

1. Touch the [Search] key to display the Music

Search screen.

2. Touch the [Playlists] key to display the

Playlist list.

3. Touch the [New] key.

The name entry screen is displayed.

4. Enter the playlist name by touching the

characters on the screen, then touch the [OK]

key.

The Add Track screen is displayed.

[]

Deletes the last entered character.

[Back]

Returns to the previous screen.

[Lower]

Displays lower case characters input

keyboard.

[Upper]

Displays upper case characters input

keyboard.

[All Clear]

Deletes all characters entered so far.

Music Catcher Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

[A-Z]

Displays the alphabetic input keyboard.

[Accent]

Displays the accent characters input

keyboard.

[0-9]

Displays the number input keyboard.

[Symbols]

Displays the symbol characters input

keyboard.

[OK]

Fixes the entered characters, and proceed to

the Add Track screen.

5. Touch the [Album], [Artist], or [Genre] key to

specify the search category, select an album

by the similar operation as the Music Search

function.

The Add Track list screen is displayed.

6. Touch the desired Track keys you wish to add

to the playlist, then touch the [Add] key.

The specified tracks are added to the playlist,

and the display returns to the Add Track

screen.

• Touching the [OK] key adds the specified

tracks and completes creating the Playlist.

7. Repeat the operation of step 5 and 6 to add all

the tracks you wish to be included in the

playlist.

8. When adding tracks is completed, touch the

[Back] key to return to the previous screen.

Editing a Playlist

You can edit the playlist from the information

screens. ➜ “Displaying information registered

for the album/playlist/track” (P. 41)

1. Select the playlist you wish to edit information

using the Music Search function.

2. Touch the [List/Edit] key to display the

Playlist list screen.

From this screen, you can perform the

following operations.

●Deleting Playlists

3. Touch the [Delete] key.

The Playlist Delete screen is displayed.

4. Select the playlists you wish to delete by

touching the Playlist keys.

• Touching the [Select All] key selects all the

listed Playlist keys.

5. Touch the [OK] key.

A confirmation screen is displayed.

6. Touch the [Yes] key to delete the selected

playlist.

●Editing information of a Playlist

3. Touch the [ ] key displayed at the right of

the desired Playlist key.

The information screen of the specified

playlist is displayed.

4. Touch the [Playlist] key, edit the displayed

playlist name by touching the characters on

the screen, then touch the [OK] key.

• Edit by the same way as the Playlist name

entry.

5. Touch the [Image] key, touch the desired

Image key, then touch the [Back] key.

• You can assign your imported image data

by touching the [User] key.

6. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

●Editing track list of a Playlist

3. Touch the desired Playlist key you wish to edit

tracks.

The track list screen of the specified playlist is

displayed.

4. Touch the [Delete] key to delete desired

tracks.

• Delete tracks by the same way as deleting

playlists.

5. Touch the [Add] key to add tracks.

• Add tracks by the same way as creating a

playlist.

6. Touch the [Move] key, change the order of the

listed tracks, then touch the [OK] key.

• To move a track, touch the Track key you

wish to move, then specify the position to be

inserted by touching the corresponding

[Move] key.

• Touching the [Back] key cancels the

changes and returns to the previous screen.

46 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Using Recent Album List

What is Recent Album list?

The Recent Album list is one of the following 3

shortcut lists: (see the Navigation Manual for

details of the Favourite list and Frequent list)

•Favourite list: You can register your favourite

places.

•Frequent list: Destinations frequently entered

are automatically registered.

•Recent Album list: Albums recently selected

from the Music Search are automatically

registered.

You can display these lists by easy operation,

and can specify your desired item to set as the

destination or to be played back.

You can also customise these lists when its

Angle is set to 2D list screen.

Using the Recent Album list

Note:

•The Recent Album list is disabled when no music

data is recorded in the Music Catcher.

Displaying the Recent Album list

1. Press the [MENU] button, then touch the

[] key.

The Favourite list screen is displayed.

• The same operation can be made from the

Music Search screen or Navi Shortcut

menu.

2. Touch the [ ] (Recent Album) key to

display the Recent Album list (3D List screen).

Switching Angle

1. Touch the [ ] key to switch the viewing

angle of the list.

The 2D List screen is displayed.

Playing back albums

1. Touch the desired Album key you wish to

play.

The source mode is changed to the Music

Catcher mode, then playback starts from the

first track of the specified album.

• Touch the [N] or [n] key on the quarter

circle to scroll the list of the 3D List screen.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

4. Operations of Accessories

TV Tuner Operations

About the TV tuner

Watching TV requires a TV tuner. When an

optional TV tuner is connected through the

CeNET cable, this unit controls all TV tuner

functions.

●About the VTR input terminal

The TV tuner has a VTR input terminal to which

1 external device can be connected. Connect a

12V video cassette player (VCP) or video

cassette recorder (VCR) to the TV tuner input

terminal. Changing the TV tuner to the VTR

mode, you can display the VTR data on the

monitor of this unit.

Selecting the TV Tuner mode

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [TV] key to select the TV Tuner

mode.

The system changes to the TV Tuner mode,

and the TV screen is displayed.

TV Tuner mode screen

Touching the TV screen displays the following TV

Tuner mode screen.

• If you do not operate the menu for 5 seconds,

the TV Tuner mode screen will automatically

be hidden, and it returns to the playback

screen.

• To close the TV Tuner mode screen within 5

seconds, touch the [Close] key.

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

WARNING

•For your safety, the driver should not

watch the TV or operate the controls

while driving. Please note that watching

and operating the TV while driving are

prohibited by law in some countries.

Channel No.

Preset key pane

Information pane

Band

TV Tuner Operations

48 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Basic operations

Watching TV

Note:

•For your safety, this system has a safety function

which turns off the picture when the car is moving,

so only the audio can be heard. The picture can

only be watched when the car is stopped and the

parking brake is applied.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

Every touching this key toggles the TV band

between TV1 and TV2.

3. Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset

list pane to tune in the preset TV station.

Watching a video

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen, then touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [VTR] key of the TV/VTR item to

change to the VTR mode.

• To return to the TV mode, perform the same

operation again.

Seek tuning

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

3. Touch a [Seek] key to automatically seek a

station.

• Touching the [K] key to tune up the channel

to the next available TV station, and the [k]

key to tune down.

Manual tuning

There are 2 ways available: Quick tuning and

step tuning. When you are in the step tuning

mode, the channel changes one step at a time. In

quick tuning mode, you can quickly tune the

desired frequency.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired

band (TV1 or TV2).

3. Touch and hold the [Band] key for more than

1 second. “Manual” appears and manual

tuning is now available.

4. Tune into a station.

Quick tuning:

Touch and hold a [Seek] key for more than 1

second to tune in a station.

Step tuning:

Touch a [Seek] key to manually tune in a

station.

Recalling a preset station

A total of 12 TV stations can be stored (6-TV1

and 6-TV2).

There are 3 ways available to recall the preset

station.

●Using the Preset keys on the Preset

list pane

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

3. Touch the desired Preset key to recall a

stored TV station.

●From the AV Shortcut menu

1. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

2. Touch a [P.ch] key to tune in the previous or

next preset station.

• You can also use the [R] and [F]

(Search) buttons instead of the [P.ch] keys.

TV Tuner Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Manual memory

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

3. Tune in the desired TV station to be stored.

4. Touch and hold the desired Preset key for

more than 2 seconds to store the current

station into the preset memory.

Auto store

Auto store selects 6 TV stations automatically

and stores each one into a preset memory. If 6

stations cannot be received with good reception,

previously stored stations remain and only the

strong stations are stored into memory.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [Band] key to select the desired TV

band (TV1 or TV2).

3. Touch and hold the [AS] key for more than 2

seconds.

A beep sounds and the stations with good

reception are stored automatically to the

preset channels.

Preset scan

Preset scan shows each preset channel before it

automatically advances to the next preset. This

function is useful for searching for desired TV

station in memory.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen.

2. Touch the [PS] key to start preset scan. The

unit starts scanning each station for 7

seconds sequentially.

3. When the desired channel is received, touch

the [PS] key again.

Setting the TV functions

• These operations cannot be performed from

the AV Shortcut menu screen.

Selecting the screen size

You can change the TV screen size to suit to the

screen panel.

1. Showing the TV Tuner mode screen, touch

the [Wide] key.

2. Touch the [Wide], [Cinema], or [Normal] key

to set the desired screen size.

• The factory default setting is “Wide”.

Wide:

The image is expanded so that the rectangle

of the image fit to the screen. The aspect ratio

of the image may be changed.

Cinema:

The image is expanded so that the left and

right edges of the image fit to the screen. The

top and bottom areas of the image may be cut

off.

Normal:

The image is expanded so that the top and

bottom edges of the image fit to the screen.

Setting the TV diver

You can change the reception setting for the TV

antenna connected to the TV tuner.

• Normally use the TV diver with the “ON”

position.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen, then touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the TV DIVER

item to turn this function on and off.

[ON] :

Sets reception emphasising the visual.

[OFF] :

Sets the diver setting to OFF.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Setting the TV area

When you select the TV area (TV reception

area), the TV tuner area setting changes.

1. Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner

mode screen, then touch the [Option] key.

2. Touch the Area key of the TV Area item to

display a list of country name.

3. Touch the desired Country Name key to

select a country.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

4. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

50 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

AUX Operations

This function is available when the TV tuner is not connected via CeNET, and a visual device, such as

VTR, is connected to this unit by using the RCA pin lead.

Selecting the AUX mode

Note:

•For your safety, this system has a safety function

which turns off the picture when the car is moving,

so only the audio can be heard. The picture can

only be watched when the car is stopped and the

parking brake is applied.

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [AUX] key to select the AUX mode.

The screen of the connected visual device is

displayed.

• The black screen is displayed when no

visual device is connected.

Selecting the screen size

You can change the displayed screen size to suit

to the screen panel.

1. Touch the screen to display the menu, then

touch the [ ] key.

2. Touch the [Wide], [Cinema], or [Normal] key

to set the desired screen size.

• The factory default setting is “Wide”.

Wide:

The image is expanded so that the rectangle

of the image fits to the screen. The aspect

ratio of the image may be changed.

Cinema:

The image is expanded so that the left and

right edges of the image fit to the screen. The

top and bottom areas of the image may be cut

off.

Normal:

The image is expanded so that the top and

bottom edges of the image fit to the screen.

Changing the audio input level

The input audio level of AUX terminal can be

changed.

• The factory default setting is “High”.

1. Touch the screen to display the menu, then

repeat touching the [Sens] key to select the

level.

High: 16.25 dB

Mid: 3.75 dB

Low: 0 dB

WARNING

•For your safety, the driver should not watch the VTR, etc. or operate the controls while

driving. Please note that watching and operating the VTR, etc. while driving are prohibited by

law in some countries.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

iPod Operations

This unit can be used to control a connected Apple iPod (for the information on the compatible models,

see the Clarion homepage (http://www.clarion.com)). Use the optional connector cable to connect the

iPod.

Note:

•The unit will not operate, or may operate improperly with unsupported versions.

•For the information on the compatible models to the iPod video mode operations, see the Clarion homepage

(http://www.clarion.com).

•Some functions may not operate properly depending to the software version of the iPod. Use the iPod updated

with latest software downloaded from the Apple's website.

•When you connect the iPod which a great number of tracks are stored, it may take a long time to establish

the connection with the iPod or to control the iPod features.

Notes regarding use of Apple

iPod

• After the iPod has been connected to this unit,

the iPod’s buttons are disabled for operation.

• When the iPod mode has been selected with

2Zone function OFF, the following screen is

output to the rear monitor:

When audio data is played: black screen

When video data is played: video image

• The remote control unit cannot be used to

perform scan, repeat or random play.

• This unit can display the Podcast titles*1, Artist

names, Album titles, Song titles, Genre names,

Playlist titles, Composer names, and

Audiobooks titles*1 registered on the iPod.

When no data is present, the title display will

remain blank.

*1: Whether these functions are available or not

depends on the iPod version.

• The iPod is used with the equalizer function

turned OFF.

• Do not connect an iPod to this unit with a

headset connected to the iPod.

Selecting the iPod mode

1. Connect your iPod to this unit using the

optional connecter cable.

2. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

3. Touch the [iPod] key to select the iPod mode.

The system changes to the iPod mode, and

the iPod mode screen is displayed.

iPod mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

[6] key

Information pane

[R], [F] key

[MENU] key

iPod Operations

52 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Controlling the iPod

Operation keys

[MENU] key ([Menu] key on the AV Shortcut

menu)

• Displays the iPod Menu screen which is used

to access to the list screens of the Albums,

Tracks, Artists, Genres, Playlists, Podcasts,

Composers, and Audiobooks stored in the

iPod.

[R], [F] key ([X], [x] key on the AV

Shortcut menu)

• Use to perform track search operation. Touch

and hold the key to enable fast-forward or fast-

backward.

[6] key

• Use to perform playback and pause.

[Shuffle] key

• Use to switch the shuffle mode, in the order:

➜ Song Shuffle ➜ Album Shuffle ➜ Shuffle

OFF.

When the “Song Shuffle” is enabled, the

tracks in the current track list are played back

in random order, regardless of the order in

which they are recorded.

When the “Album Shuffle” is enabled, all of

the albums recorded in the iPod are selected in

random order, and tracks in the albums are

played back in the recorded order.

[Repeat] key

• Use to switch the repeat mode:

➜ 1-track Repeat ➜ All Repeat.

When “1-track Repeat” is enabled, the track

currently played back is played back

repeatedly.

When “All Repeat” is enabled, tracks in the

current track list are played back repeatedly.

[List] key

• Use to display the list of tracks currently

selected.

Note:

•This key is disabled while a shuffle mode is

specified.

[Option] key

• Use to change the playback speed while

playing the Audiobooks.

Information pane

*1: Displays status of Repeat, Shuffle play.

: 1-track Repeat

: All Repeat

: Song Shuffle

: Album Shuffle

*2: The title display shows, from top level down,

the Song title, Artist name, and Album title.

When a Podcast or Audiobooks which has

two or more chapters is played back, the

chapter title and chapter number are

displayed.

When the text is too long to be displayed, it

can be scrolled by touching the Information

pane.

Pausing playback

• This operation cannot be performed from the

AV Shortcut menu screen.

1. Touch the [6] key during playback.

Playback pauses.

2. To resume playback, touch the [6] key

again.

Playback resumes.

Play/Pause icon (6) display

Track No.

Play mode(*1)

Song title/

Artist name/

Album title(*2)

Progress/

Volume

indicator

Play time Remaining time

iPod Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Skipping a track (searching)

1. Touch the [R] or [F] key during playback.

Tracks are skipped, as many as the times the

button is pressed, and playback starts.

• Touching the [F] key starts playback from

the beginning of the next track.

• Touching the [R] key starts playback from

the beginning of the current track.

When this key is touched again within about

2 seconds, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous track.

• When a Podcast or Audiobooks which has

two or more chapters is played back,

touching the [R] or [F] key while

pausing moves the current location to the

beginning of the previous or next chapter.

• You can also use the [R] and [F]

(Search) buttons or the [Track] keys on the

AV Shortcut menu screen instead of the

[R] and [F] keys.

Fast forward and fast backward

1. Touch and hold the [X] or [x] key during

playback.

The playback speed becomes faster.

Releasing the key resumes the normal speed

playback.

• You can also use the [R] and [F]

(Search) buttons or the [Track] keys on the

AV Shortcut menu screen instead of the

[R] and [F] keys.

Track List operation

Touching the [List] key displays the following

Track List screen. The tracks to be played back

are listed in this screen.

Selecting the track of starting

playback

1. Displaying the Track List screen, touch the

desired Track key you wish to play.

The system starts playback from the specified

track.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

2. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Displaying the track information

1. Displaying the Track List screen, touch the

desired Track key you wish to display

information.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

2. Touch the [ ] key displayed at the right of

the Track key.

The track information of specified track is

displayed.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Scrolling titles

When a title or other information displayed on the

screen is longer than the text area, you can

confirm the entire text by scrolling it.

1. Displaying the text you wish to scroll, touch

the [ ] key displayed at the right of the text

area.

The text will scroll once.

iPod Operations

54 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

iPod Menu operation

You can specify the album to play by narrowing

the following categories:

Albums:

The album list of all the albums recorded in the

iPod is displayed.

Artists:

You can narrow the albums to be listed by

specifying the artist name.

Genres:

You can narrow the albums to be listed by

specifying the genre and artist name.

Composers:

You can narrow the albums to be listed by

specifying the composer name.

In addition to the above, you can specify the

playlist, podcast, or audiobook to be played back.

Displaying the iPod Menu screen

1. Touch the [MENU] key.

The following iPod Menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [ ] (Next) key to display the

next menu screen.

Selecting a list item from the list

screen

1. Touch the desired Category key from the iPod

Menu screen to display the corresponding list

screen.

2. Touch the desired list item on the screen to

specify it.

• When an album list or playilst is specified,

the screen returns to the iPod mode screen

and playback starts from the first track of the

specified album/playlist.

• When a list of podcasts or audiobooks is

specified, the screen returns to the iPod

mode screen and the specified track is

played back.

• When another list is specified, the next list

appears. Repeat this operation until you

select the album to be played back.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

iPod video mode operation

(only for the iPod with video

features)

When you connect an iPod with video features by

using the optional connector cable for iPod with

video, you can enjoy the video data and

slideshow data stored in the iPod showing them

on the display of this unit.

Note:

•For the information on the compatible models to

the iPod video mode operations, see the Clarion

homepage (http://www.clarion.com).

•Do not connect the iPod to this unit when a Video

Playlists item is selected on the iPod.

•Set the Video Settings of the iPod to “TV Out: On”

and “TV Signal: PAL” before playing the visual data

stored in the iPod.

1. Touch the [MENU] key to display the iPod

Menu screen.

2. Touch the [Video] key to change to the Video

mode. The screen will be changed to the iPod

mode screen with the small video screen

displayed on the information pane.

In this condition, the iPod is turned into the

normal operation mode, and you can control

the iPod using the original controls of the iPod

(iPod operation mode).

• In the iPod operation mode, the following

buttons on this unit and its remote control

unit are operative as well: [R], [F],

[6] (this unit), [R], [F], [6] (remote

control unit)

iPod Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Note:

•The [Video] key is displayed only when a fifth

generation iPod is connected to the unit.

3. Play back your desired video data or

slideshow data from the iPod.

The specified video data will be displayed on

the information pane.

4. Touch the information pane.

The video data will be displayed on the whole

screen.

Note:

•“Audio Only” is displayed when the motorcar is

moving.

5. To return to the iPod mode screen, touch the

screen.

6. To terminate the Video mode, touch the

[MENU] key, then touch the [Music] key.

The video playback is terminated, and the

system returns to the audio playback mode.

Note:

•Video data may not be played back according to

the status of the iPod.

Selecting the screen size

When in the Video mode, you can change the

screen size of the video image to suit to the

screen panel.

1. Touch the screen to display the iPod mode

screen, then touch the [ ] key.

2. Touch the [Wide], [Cinema], or [Normal] key

to set the desired screen size.

• The factory default setting is “Wide”.

Wide:

The image is expanded so that the rectangle

of the image fits to the screen. The aspect

ratio of the image may be changed.

Cinema:

The image is expanded so that the left and

right edges of the image fit to the screen. The

top and bottom areas of the image may be cut

off.

Normal:

The image is expanded so that the top and

bottom edges of the image fit to the screen.

3. Touch the information pane to display the

video image on the whole screen.

56 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Telephone Operations

This function is enabled when the optional Bluetooth Interface Box is connected to this unit via CeNET.

The following functions are available:

• Listening to your telephone calls on the car speakers.

• Making a call using the Ten-Key pad screen, or using the Phone Book or Dialled/Received/Missed

calls records in the selected mobile phone.

• Making a call from the POI Information screen or from the Edit screen of the Address Book if the

telephone number is registered.

Note:

•Depending on a mobile phone, you may need to perform the operation of the Object Push transfer on the

mobile phone.

•Some mobile phones may not be able to transfer the Phone Book and record data.

•The Phone Book and record data transmission may take a long time. The operations of sending calls are

disabled during the data transmission.

Selecting the Telephone mode

1. Press the [SRC] (Source) button to display the

Source menu screen.

2. Touch the [Telephone] key to select the

Telephone mode.

The system changes to the Telephone mode,

and the Telephone mode screen is displayed.

• You can also select the Telephone mode

from the Destination menu screen by

touching the [Telephone] key.

Note:

•When the 2Zone function is turned on, touching the

[Telephone] key cancels the 2Zone function.

Telephone mode screen

●AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen

Note:

•The keys to make a call are disabled when no

connection with a mobile phone is established.

•The [] icon is displayed at the bottom of the

screen when the connection with a mobile phone is

established. (It blinks during the connection

operation.)

Telephone settings

Registering your mobile phone

(Pairing)

You can register up to 5 mobile phones.

1. Turn on the power of the mobile phone you

wish to register.

2. Touch the [Phone Select] key to display the

Phone Select screen.

3. Touch the [Add] key to display the Add New

Device screen.

4. Touch one of item keys to specify the device

type.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

•

When the device type of your mobile phone

is not listed, select the [

General Device

] key.

5. Touch the [Search] or [Wait] key.

[Search]: The Interface Box starts searching

a mobile phone.

[Wait]: The Interface Box waits to be detected

by a mobile phone.

When mobile phones are detected, the

Device Select screen is displayed.

6. Touch the desired device key you wish to

specified mobile phone.

• For the Pass key code, see the operation

manual of the Bluetooth Interface Box. You

can also confirm the Pass key code by the

Bluetooth Device Information screen under

the Phone Settings menu.

• Perform the Object Push transfer operation

when your mobile phone requires it. For

details of the operation, see the operation

manual of your mobile phone.

When the pairing operation completes, the

registered mobile phone is set as the current

telephone, and the display returns to the

Phone Select screen.

• You can delete the registered mobile phone

by touching the [Delete] key on the Phone

Select screen.

Telephone Operations

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Selecting the mobile phone

1. Touch the [Phone Select] key to display the

Phone Select screen.

2. Touch the desired Telephone key you wish to

use.

The corresponding mobile phone is set as the

current telephone.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Setting the telephone features

1. Touch the [Phone Settings] key to display

the Phone Settings screen.

2. Perform setting for the desired item. See the

following sections for detail.

3. Touch the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

●Setting Automatic Connection

The Interface Box automatically reconnects the

mobile phone after the connection is lost or the

system is restarted.

• The factory default setting is “ON”.

1. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the Automatic

Connection item to set the function ON or

OFF.

●Setting Auto Answer

When a call comes in, the Interface Box

automatically connects the call approx. 8

seconds after the calling starts.

• The factory default setting is “ON”.

1. Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the Auto

Answer item to set the function ON or OFF.

●Setting Microphone Gain

You can adjust the input level of the microphone

in 3 levels.

1. Touch the [–] or [+] key of the Microphone

Gain item to adjust the input level.

●Setting Ring Tone Volume

This system can generate a ring tone if the ring

tone of the mobile phone cannot be used.

You can adjust the volume of the ring tone in 8

levels.

• The factory default setting is “0”(OFF)

1. Touch the [–] or [+] key of the Ring Tone

Volume item to adjust the volume level.

Note:

•Normally,set to “0” to use the ring tone of the

mobile phone, and adjust the volume from the

mobile phone.

●Confirming information of Interface

Box

You can confirm the various information

concerning the Bluetooth Interface Box.

1. Touch the [Info] key of the Bluetooth Device

Information item to display the information on

the screen.

●Setting Phone Speaker

You can select the output speaker of telephone

calls.

• The factory default setting is “Right”.

1. Touch the [C] key to display the next screen.

2. Touch the [Left] or [Right] key of the Phone

Speaker item to select the speaker.

[Left]: Telephone calls are heard from the

front left speaker.

[Right]: Telephone calls are heard from the

front right speaker.

Telephone operations

Making a call using the Ten-Key pad

1. Touch the [10Keys] key to display the Ten-

Key pad screen.

2. Enter the telephone number by using the Ten-

Key pad displayed on the screen.

3. Touch the [ ] key to call the entered

number.

• The following Telephone Interrupt screen is

displayed during phone call.

Telephone Operations

58 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

• Touch the [Private] key to talk using the

mobile phone cancelling the hands-free

function. To return to the hands-free mode,

touch the [HFS] key.

• Touch the [Mic Mute] key to turn off the

microphone so that the sound does not be

heard by the partner.

4. When the call is finished, touch the [ ] key

to hang up.

The display returns to the Telephone mode

screen.

Note:

•Depending on the mobile phone, the Telephone

Interrupt screen may be closed and the connection

with the Interface Box may be disconnected when

entering the Private mode.

Redialling

1. Touch the [Redial] key to call the last dialled

number.

The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed,

and calling starts.

• When the call is finished, touch the [ ]

key to hang up.

Note:

•When the dialed telephone number cannot be

transfered from the mobile phone, “Unknown” is

displayed instead of the number.

Using the Phone Book

The system will capture the phone book data

registered in the selected mobile phone. You can

use it to make a call from this unit.

Note:

•Some mobile phones may not be able to transfer

the Phone Book data.

•Only the Phone Book items with at least one

telephone number registered in the captured

Phone Book data are displayed on the Phone Book

screen.

1. Touch the [Phone Book] key to display the

Phone Book screen.

2. Touch the desired Name key you wish to dial.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

• When you touch the alphabet key at the

right of the screen, the list scrolls to the item

which starts with the specified character.

3. Touch the desired Number key you wish to

dial.

The confirming message will appear.

4. Touch the [Yes] key to call the specified

number.

The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed,

and calling starts.

• When the call is finished, touch the [ ]

key to hang up.

Using Dialled/Received/Missed

Calls records

The system will capture the Dialled/Received/

Missed calls record data in the selected mobile

phone. You can confirm it and use it to make a

call from this unit.

Note:

•Some mobile phones may not be able to transfer

the record data.

•Depending on the mobile phone, the record data

may not be updated correctly when a call is made

in the Private mode.

1. Touch the [Dialled Numbers], [Received

Calls], or [Missed Calls] key according to the

type of record list you wish to display.

The corresponding record list screen is

displayed.

• Touch the [c] or [C] key to scroll the list.

• Touch the [Back] key to return to the

previous screen.

2. Touch the desired Record key you wish to

dial.

The confirming message will appear.

3. Touch the [Yes] key to call the specified

number.

The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed,

and calling starts.

• When the call is finished, touch the [ ]

key to hang up.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

CCD Camera Operations

If the optional CCD rear camera is installed in this system, the rear view image is displayed on the screen

when the gear lever is put in the reverse gear position. In addition, this system can display guidelines on

the camera image, which helps you to perceive the size of the vehicle.

Note:

•The CCD camera image is not displayed on the

rear monitor.

Displaying the Guidelines on

the camera image

1. Touch the screen when the rear view image is

displayed.

The [Guide line] key is displayed.

• The [Guide line] key will disappear 3

seconds later.

2. Touch the [Guide line] key.

A confirmation screen is displayed.

3. Touch the [OK] key.

The guidelines are displayed on the screen

image.

• Touching the [Guide line] key turns the

guidelines display on/off.

Adjusting the guidelines

position

You can adjust the position of the guidelines so

that the size of the vehicle is represented.

1. Display the guidelines by the procedure

previously described.

2. Touch the [Setting] key.

The four control point appears on the

guidelines, and the control keys appear at the

bottom of the screen.

3. Select the control point you wish to adjust the

position by touching it, then move the control

point by using the [e], [E], [ ], or [ ] key.

[e], [E], [], []:

Touching these keys moves the selected

control point by 1 dot.

Touching and holding these keys moves the

selected control point by 5 dots.

[Camera]:

Hides/displays the camera image.

[Grid]:

Displays/hides the grid on the screen.

4. When the adjustment completes, touch the

[Back] key to quit the adjustment mode.

60 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Rear Monitor Operations

By installing the optional rear monitor in this system, the rear passengers can enjoy visual sources

played on the main unit (this unit). Moreover, they can enjoy the visual sources different from the media

sources played on the main unit by using the 2Zone function. ➜ “2Zone Function” (P. 19)

Note:

•When 2Zone function is turned on, use the optional

infrared headphone systems to listen to the Rear

zone sound.

●Media sources displayed on the rear

monitor

The following media sources played on the main

unit can be displayed on the rear monitor:

• DVD video

• TV Tuner

•AUX

Operations on the rear

monitor

Note:

•See also the operation manual of the rear monitor.

1. Turn on the power of the rear monitor.

2. Switch the Source modes of the rear monitor

so that the video image output from the main

unit is displayed.

3. Play your desired visual source on the main

unit.

• Control the visual source from the main unit

or using the optional remote control unit.

➜ “Remote Control Operations” (P. 61)

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Remote Control Operations

You can use the optional remote control unit to control the AV features of this unit.

Name of the Buttons

Inserting the Battery

1. Slide the rear cover in the direction of the

arrow, and remove it.

2. Insert the CR2025 battery bundled with the

remote control unit in the directions shown in

the figure, then close the rear cover.

Note:

Using battery improperly can cause it to explode.

Take note of the following points:

•Do not short-circuit, disassemble or heat battery.

•Do not dispose of battery into fire or flames.

•Dispose of spent battery properly.

[AUDIO]

[SUBTITLE]

[ANGLE]

[MENU]

[E], [e], [T], [t]

[RETURN]

[–], [+]

[R], [F]

[TOP MENU]

[ENT]

[SOURCE]

[BAND]

[6]

Signal transmitter

Operating range: 30° in all

directions

CR2025 battery

Rear side

Rear cover

Remote Control Operations

62 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Functions of the Buttons

• When the 2Zone function is ON, the controls

work upon the Rear zone only.

[AUDIO] button

• Press to set the Audio language. (in DVD Video

mode)

[SUB TITLE] button

• Press to display subtitles. (in DVD Video mode)

[ANGLE] button

• Press to set the Angle function of the DVD

video when the Angle mark is displayed. (in

DVD Video mode)

(Available only when the Angle function on the

DVD Setup menu is set to ON.)

[TOP MENU] button

• Press to display the Top Menu screen stored

on DVD video disc. Some discs are not

displayed the top menu screen. (in DVD Video

mode)

[MENU] button

• Press to display the Menu screen stored on

DVD video disc. (in DVD Video mode)

[ENT] button

• Press to fix the selected button item on the

Menu screen of a DVD video. (in DVD Video

mode)

[E], [e], [T], [t] buttons

• Press to select button items displayed on the

Menu screen of a DVD video. (in DVD Video

mode)

[SOURCE] button

• Press to switch the source modes such as FM/

AM mode, DVD/CD mode, etc. (in any mode;

only DVD Video, TV Tuner, and AUX modes

are selectable when 2Zone ON)

[RETURN] button

• Press to switch to the previous screen while the

Menu screen of a DVD video is being

displayed. However, it may occur that this

button operation dose not work on some discs.

(in DVD Video mode)

[BAND] button

• Switches reception bands. (in Tuner/TV Tuner

modes; disabled in Tuner mode when 2Zone

ON)

[–], [+] buttons

• Decreases or increases the volume. (in any

mode; disabled when 2Zone ON)

[6] button

• Press to play or pause video and audio media.

(in DVD Video/iPod modes; disabled in iPod

mode when 2Zone ON)

• Keep pressing more than 1 second to stop

video playback. (in DVD Video mode)

[R], [F] buttons

• Press to select the next lower or higher preset

station. (in Tuner/TV Tuner modes; disabled in

Tuner mode when 2Zone ON)

• Keep pressing more than 1 second to seek

down or up. (in Tuner/TV Tuner modes;

disabled in Tuner mode when 2Zone ON)

• Press to select the next lower or higher chapter

number. (in DVD Video mode)

• Press to select the next lower or higher track.

(in CD, MP3/WMA, Music Catcher, and iPod

modes; disabled when 2Zone ON)

• Keep pressing to perform fast-backward or

fast-forward playback. (in DVD Video, CD,

MP3/WMA, Music Catcher, and iPod modes;

enabled only in DVD Video mode when 2Zone

ON)

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

5. System Setting

You can set various settings of this system from the Setting menu.

Setting menu screen 1 Setting menu screen 2

1. Press the [ ] (Set) button.

The Setting menu screen is displayed.

Touching the [ ] (Next) key displays the

additional Setting menu screen.

2. Touch the desired menu item.

For the operation procedure hereinafter, see

the explanation of each section.

Note:

•For details about the Screen Colour item, see

“Setting the Screen Colour mode” (P. 67)

General Settings

When you touch the [General] key from the Setting menu, you can set various settings concerning the

general features.

Language setting

You can change the language used by the

system. As for “English”, you can also select the

unit of distance (km/mile).

“Language”:

You can select the language from the following

language keys:

[English (mile)] key

[English (km)] key

[Français] key

[Deutsch] key

[Español] key

[Italiano] key

[Nederlands] key

[Português] key

[Svenska] key

[Dansk] key

Note:

•For the languages other than English, distances

are displayed using the metric system.

Clock settings

You can set various settings concerning the

clock.

1. Touch the [Setting] key of the “Clock” item.

The Clock menu screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“On-Screen Clock”:

Shows/hides the clock display on the screen.

“Clock Format”:

Changes the clock format to 12-hour/24-hour

system.

“Daylight Saving Time”:

Selects whether to apply the daylight saving

time or not.

“Offset Adjust”:

Adjusts the current time manually. The

adjustment is applied as offset value related

to the time signal received via GPS. Touching

the [+] or [–] key shifts the time by 1 minute.

Normally, it is not necessary to adjust

because the time is received from the GPS

signals automatically.

General Settings

64 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

“Time Zone”:

Sets the time zone. You can select from the

list of 74 regions including the [Auto] key.

When you select the [Auto] key, the clock is

automatically switched to the time zone of the

country at the vehicle position.

Changing Skin

You can change the screen design by using the

skin data stored in the hard disk drive.

1. Touch the [Select] key of the “Skin Change”

item.

2. Touch the desired item key you wish to set.

Note:

•This operation is disabled while recording a CD or

loading/ejecting a disc.

Beep Sound

You can turn ON/OFF the beep sounds and

menu operation sounds.

Keyboard Type

You can change the keyboard layout used for

name entry.

1. Touch the item key of the “Keyboard” item.

2. Select the keyboard type by touching one of

the following keys:

[ABCDEF] key

[QWERTY] key

[QWERTZ] key

[AZERTY] key

Voice Recognition

You can turn ON/OFF the voice recognition

feature (optional). When you touch the [OFF]

key, the voice recognition is not available.

Voice Feedback

You can turn ON/OFF the voice feedbacks which

are responded when using voice commands.

Blinking LED

When this function is set to “ON”, the Blinking

LED indicator will blink when the power is turned

off.

Antenna

Select the [Auto Antenna] when your vehicle

has the auto antenna.

Note:

•When the “Auto Antenna” is selected, you can

extend/collapse the antenna by keeping pressing

the [ INFO] button more than 2 seconds. Be sure

to collapse the antenna before entering in a place

with low ceiling such as a multistory car park.

•Select [Others] for the vehicle equipped with no

auto antenna. Otherwise, the radio reception may

be disturbed extremely.

Security Mode

To set this function ON, setting a PIN code

(called as “Personal Code”) is required. When

you set your Personal Code, a theft is prevented

by disabling the operation of the unit.

In addition, set the Blinking LED function to “ON”

to improve the effect of this function.

Setting the Security Mode

1. Touch the [ON] key of the Security Mode item.

The Set Code screen appears.

2. Enter your desired 4-digit Personal Code by

using Ten-Key pad displayed on the screen,

then touch the [OK] key.

• Touch the [ ] key when you make a

mistake in entering.

3. Enter the same Personal Code again for

confirmation, then touch the [OK] key.

The entered Personal Code will be set, and it

will return to the previous screen.

Resetting the Security Mode

1. Touch the [OFF] key of the Security Mode

item.

The Erase Code screen appears.

2. Enter your 4-digit Personal Code by using

Ten-Key pad, then touch the [OK] key.

The message “Code erased” appears, and it

will return to the previous screen.

Personal Code entry

The Personal Code screen will be displayed

when turning the power on after performing the

following operations:

• The car battery was replaced.

• The backup power was cut off.

• The Reset button was pressed.

Note:

•If you forgot your Personal Code, please consult

your dealer or an authorized service centre.

General Settings

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

1. Enter your Personal Code currently set.

When the correct Personal Code is entered,

the unit will restart from the initial startup

screen.

Note:

•When you enter a wrong Personal Code, the

message “Code incorrect” is displayed and the

Personal Code entry is prohibited for a while. This

prohibited time is changed according to the

number of times of wrong code entry as follows:

•1 to 6 times: 15 seconds

•7 times or more: 15 minutes

System Check

You can check the connection status of the iPod

and Bluetooth Interface Box.

Note:

•This operation is disabled while recording a CD or

loading/ejecting a disc.

1. Touch the [Check] key of the System Check

item.

The System Check screen is displayed, and

connection statuses are shown.

2. Touch the [Check] key to perform system

check.

A confirmation screen appears.

3. Touch the [Yes] key.

The system will be restarted.

System Information

You can confirm the version number of the map

data and the system software. In addition, you

can confirm the remaining capacity for the Music

Catcher here.

1. Touch the [Info.] key.

The system information is displayed.

66 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Navigation Settings

When you touch the [Navigation] key from the Setting menu, you can set various setting concerning the

navigation system. For details, see the Navigation Manual.

Audio Settings

When you touch the [Audio] key from the Setting

menu, you can set various settings concerning

the audio features.

Adjusting the balance/fader

1. Touch the [Edit] key of the BAL/FAD item.

2. Touch the [E] or [e] key to adjust the fader

level.

• The factory default setting is “0”.

• Adjustment range: front 12 to rear 12

• You can also adjust the level by directly

touching the desired position of the

coordinate.

[E]: Emphasises the sound from the front

speakers.

[e]: Emphasises the sound from the rear

speakers.

3. Touch the [ ] or [ ] key to adjust the

balance level.

• The factory default setting is “0”.

• Adjustment range: left 13 to right 13

• You can also adjust the level by directly

touching the desired position of the

coordinate.

[]: Emphasises the sound from the left

speakers.

[]: Emphasises the sound from the right

speakers.

Adjusting the BASS

The bass gain, bass frequency (centre

frequency) and bass Q can be adjusted.

1. Touch the [Edit] key of the BASS item.

2. Touch the [–] or [+] key for the desirable type

to adjust to a desirable level.

Gain:

–6 to 8 (The factory default setting is “0”.)

FREQ:

50Hz, 80Hz, 120Hz (The factory default

setting is “50Hz”.)

1, 1.25, 1.5, 2 (The factory default setting is

“1”.)

Adjusting the MID

The MID gain, MID frequency (centre frequency)

and MID Q can be adjusted.

1. Touch the [Edit] key of the MID item.

2. Touch the [–] or [+] key for the desirable type

to adjust to a desirable level.

Gain:

–6 to 6 (The factory default setting is “0”.)

FREQ:

700Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz (The factory default

setting is “1kHz”.)

1.5, 2 (The factory default setting is “2”.)

Adjusting the TREBLE

The treble gain and treble frequency (centre

frequency) can be adjusted.

1. Touch the [Edit] key of the TREBLE item.

2. Touch the [–] or [+] key for the desirable type

to adjust to a desirable level.

Gain:

–6 to 6 (The factory default setting is “0”.)

FREQ:

8kHz, 12kHz (The factory default setting is

“12kHz”.)

Turning on/off the Magna

Bass EX

The Magna Bass EX does not adjust the low

sound area like the normal sound adjustment

function, but emphasises the deep bass sound

area to provide you with a dynamic sound.

• The factory default setting is “OFF”.

Switching the CD Recording

mode

You can set the CD Recording mode to [Auto] or

[Manual]. When the [Auto] is set, recording CD

is automatically performed when a CD is set into

the DVD player.

• The factory default setting is “Auto”.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Adjusting the Monitor

Setting the Screen Colour

mode

The system has two Screen Colour modes: the

Day mode and the Night mode. Each Screen

Colour mode has the own dimmer level setting.

To switch to the Day mode or Night mode

manually, touch the [Day] or [Night] key of the

Screen Colour item on the Setting menu.

When the [Auto] key is selected, the Screen

Colour mode is automatically switched according

to whether the illumination of the vehicle is turned

off or on.

Monitor settings

When you touch the [Monitor] key from the

Setting menu, you can adjust the Dimmer, Bright,

Colour, Hue, and Contrast level of the monitor

screen.

Note:

•Adjusting the Bright, Colour, Hue, and Contrast

level is enabled only when a video image is played

on this system.

•The dimmer level adjustment operates upon the

current Screen Colour mode.

1. Touch the [Monitor] key to display the

Monitor menu screen.

2. Touch the [Dimmer], [Bright], [Colour],

[Hue], or [Contrast] key to select adjustment

type.

3. Touch the [+] or [–] key to adjust the level.

“Bright”: Adjusts the brightness of the

display.

[+]: Press to make image brighter.

[–]: Press to make image dimmer.

“Colour”: Adjusts the colour saturation.

[+]: Press to increase colour depth.

[–]: Press to decrease colour depth.

“Hue”: Adjusts the tone of colour (red is

emphasised or green is emphasised).

[+]: Press to increase green.

[–]: Press to increase red.

“Contrast”: Adjusts the contrast of the

display.

[+]: Press to increase the contrast.

[–]: Press to decrease the contrast.

“Dimmer”: Adjusts the panel brightness.

[+]: Press to make image brighter.

[–]: Press to make image dimmer.

68 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

User Settings

When you touch the [User] key from the Setting menu, you can register User Profiles to personalise

Favourite/Frequent/Recent Album list data.

• Up to 4 User Profiles can be registered.

Registering the User Profile

1. Touch the desired [(Add New)] key you wish

to register.

A confirmation screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [Yes] key.

The Name entry screen is displayed.

3. Enter desired name of the User Profile by

touching the characters on the screen.

[]

Deletes the last entered character.

[Back]

Returns to the previous screen.

[Lower]

Displays lower case characters input

keyboard.

[Upper]

Displays upper case characters input

keyboard.

[All Clear]

Deletes all characters entered so far.

[A-Z]

Displays the alphabetic input keyboard.

[Accent]

Displays the accent characters input

keyboard.

[0-9]

Displays the number input keyboard.

[Symbols]

Displays the symbol characters input

keyboard.

[OK]

Fixes the entered characters, and proceeds to

the next step.

4. When the name entry completes, touch the

[OK] key.

The new user profile is created, and a

confirmation screen is displayed.

5. Touch the [No] key to return to the previous

screen.

• Touching the [Yes] key restarts the system

with the new User Profile activated.

6. Edit the new User Profile by the following

procedures.

Editing the User Profile

You can edit the details of the registered User

Profile by the following procedure.

1. Touch the [Edit] key of the Edit User Profile

item.

The Edit User Profile screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired User Profile key you wish

to edit.

The User Profile screen is displayed.

• You can also register the new User Profile

by touching [(Add New)] key. ➜

“Registering the User Profile” (P. 68)

3. Touch the [Name] key if you wish to edit the

name.

Edit the name, then touch the [OK] key to

return to the User Profile screen.

4. Touch the [Birthday] key if you wish to enter.

Enter the birthday information using the Ten-

Key pad displayed on the screen, then touch

the [OK] key to return to the User Profile

screen.

• Once you enter the Birthday information,

you cannot leave the entry field in blank.

5. Touch the [Image] key if you wish to assign an

image.

Touch the desired image displayed on the

screen you wish to assign to, then touch the

[OK] key to return to the User Profile screen.

• Once you assign an image, you cannot

leave the entry field in blank.

• Touch the [User] key to assign an image

imported by using SD cards.

6. Touch the [Memo] key if you wish to enter.

Enter the desired text information using the

keyboard displayed on the screen, then touch

the [OK] key to return to the User Profile

screen.

• Once you enter the Memo information, you

cannot clear it.

User Settings

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

7. When editing User Profile completes, touch

the [Back] key to return to the previous

screen.

Deleting the User Profile

Note:

•You cannot delete the current User Profile. Delete

it after switching to another User Profile.

1. Touch the [Delete] key of the Delete User

item.

The Delete User screen is displayed.

2. Touch the desired User Profile key you wish

to delete.

A confirmation screen is displayed.

3. Touch the [Yes] key to delete the selected

User Profile.

The selected User Profile is deleted, then

returns to the previous screen.

Switching the User Profile

Note:

•This operation is disabled while recording a CD or

loading/ejecting a disc.

1. Touch the desired User Profile key you wish

to switch to.

A confirmation screen is displayed.

2. Touch the [Yes] key to switch to the selected

User Profile.

The system will be restarted with the selected

User Profile.

Setting Select on Opening

Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key of the Select on

Opening item.

When this setting is set to “ON”, the User Profile

screen to select the User Profile is displayed

when turning on the power of this unit. ➜

“Turning the power on” (P. 12)

70 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting Stored Data

From the Stored Data menu, you can register/edit various data used in the navigation system. For

details, see the Navigation Manual.

Importing Data Using the SD Card

From the Import Data menu, you can import the downloaded data from the website. For more information

about the installation method and the function, see the Clarion homepage.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting

menu.

2. Touch the [Import Data] key to display the

Import Data menu.

Note:

•When you perform the operation of data import,

confirm that the SD card on which the relevant data

is stored has been set to the SD card slot.

To use the SD card

1. Press the [7OPEN/CLOSE] button to open

the operation panel.

2. Confirming the orientation of the SD card,

insert the SD card surely to the SD card slot

until it stops.

Note:

•For the detailed information on using SD cards,

see “Setting/Ejecting an SD Card” (P. 17).

CAUTION

Data may be broken when using SD cards in

the following situation:

When disconnecting the SD card or turning

the power off while writing or reading data.

When affected by static electricity or electric

noises.

It is recommended that you back up your

important data to a personal computer by

using the SD card.

Skin

You can import the Skin data stored in the SD

card into the hard disk drive.

Touch the [Import] key of the “Skin” item, then

operate according to the displayed messages.

To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive,

touch the [Delete] key.

Image

You can import the image data stored in the SD

card into the hard disk drive.

Touch the [Import] key of the “Image” item, then

operate according to the displayed messages.

To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive,

touch the [Delete] key.

Note:

•A special application is required for preparing

image data used in this system. You can download

this application from the Clarion homepage (http://

www.clarion-eu.com/).

Album Information

You can import/export the Album Information

data into/from the hard disk drive.

The Gracenote Media Database has the album/

track information data used in the Music Catcher

mode. Exporting the data to a PC, you can obtain

the latest information from the Gracenote Media

Database.

“Import”

Touch the [Import] key of the “Album

Information” item, then operate according to the

displayed messages.

“Export”

Touch the [Export] key of the “Album

Information” item, then operate according to the

displayed messages.

Note:

•A special application is required for obtaining the

information. You can download this application

from the Clarion homepage (http://www.clarion-

eu.com/).

Importing Data Using the SD Card

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Extra POI

You can import the Extra POI data stored in the

SD card into the hard disk drive.

Touch the [Import] key of the “Extra POI” item,

then operate according to the displayed

messages.

To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive,

touch the [Delete] key.

Safety Camera

You can import the location database of Safety

Cameras stored in the SD card to the hard disk

drive. Touch the [Import] key of “Safety

Camera”, then operate according to the

displayed messages. To delete the data imported

to the hard disk drive, touch the [Delete] key.

Note:

•This function displays the locations of Safety

Cameras on the map using the imported location

database of the Safety Camera on the hard disk

drive, and warns that the vehicle approaches the

location. For details, see the Clarion's homepage.

•Be sure to import the location database of Safety

Cameras while the vehicle is stopped. The

message “Reading Safety Camera data.”

disappears when the import is finished. If the

vehicle starts to move before the message

disappears, the import will be cancelled.

72 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Service Options

From the Service Option menu, you can perform the operation such as displaying a demonstration of the

navigation system, backup or restore of stored data, and resetting to the factory settings.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting

menu.

2. Touch the [Service Option] key to display the

Service Option menu.

Demonstration

Displays the demonstration of the route

guidance.

“Demo”:

Touch the [Select] key, then touch the desired

demonstration course to play.

Backing up User Data

You can back up the data currently stored in this

system to an SD card.

Note:

•This function saves the following data: the data of

the Stored Locations, the route data, the data

registered in Favourite/Frequent list, the setting

data of the Settings menu.

•The recorded music data, Playlist data, and data

imported using SD cards (Skin, Image, Album

Information, Extra POI) cannot be backed up.

“Backup User Data”:

When touching the [Backup] key, a screen with

a confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen.

Restoring User Data

You can restore data backed up by using an SD

card.

Note:

•When you perform backup/restore of data of two

different systems, the stored data on the restored

system will be lost. Be sure to back up data of this

system to restore to before performing the restore

operation.

“Restore User Data”:

When touching the [Restore] key, a screen with

confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen.

Resetting to the Factory

Settings

You can return this system to the status after

purchase.

Note:

•When the system is reset to the factory settings, all

stored data is erased (including the music data in

the Music Catcher). It is recommended that you

backup all data you want to keep.

“Reset to Factory Setting”:

When touching the [Reset] key, a screen with

confirmation message appears. Operate

according to the guidance on the screen.

Software & Map Update

You can update the system software and the

map data.

“Software & Map Update”

When touching the [Start] key, a screen with

message prompting to insert the update disc

appears. Operate according to the guidance on

the screen.

Screen Adjustment

The position and sharpness of the screen can be

adjusted.

“Screen Adjustment”:

After touching the [Adjust] key, adjust the screen

position by touching the [J], [K], [j], and [k] key.

Touch the [1] or [2] key to select a setting at

which the screen is displayed clearly.

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Setting Safety Camera

From the Safety Camera menu, you can set the Safety Camera.

1. Touch the [ ] (Next) key from the Setting menu.

2. Touch the [Safety Camera] key to display the Safety Camera menu.

3. Touch the desired menu item to set.

“Show Icon on Map”:

Turns ON/OFF the Safety Camera Icon display on the map.

“Warning & Sound”:

Turns ON/OFF both of the warning indication and alarm sound when the vehicle gets near a Safety

Camera location.

“Camera Location”:

Touch the [List] key to display the list of the Safety Camera locations. Touching an item of the list

displays the icon at the location of the Safety Camera on the right map.

Note:

•These settings are enabled when the Safety Camera data is stored in the hard disk. ➜ “Safety Camera”

(P. 71)

74 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

6. Others

Voice Command Operations

This system has built in voice recognition function. You can perform fundamental operations by saying

the corresponding voice commands.

• For details of the operations, see the Navigation Manual.

List of the Voice commands (AV features)

The following table lists the fundamental command examples available to control the AV features.

Note:

•You can omit the term enclosed by ( ).

•Touching the [] key displays the voice commands usable at that operating condition. You can refer to

them.

●Common voice commands available anytime during voice input

These are the commonly usable commands in any condition during the voice input operation.

●Voice commands for changing the operation modes

●Voice commands for controlling Tuner features

Operation Command

Terminates the voice operation, and displays the

current location map screen. “Map”

“Current Position”, “Display/Show Map”, “Go to

Map”, “(Show me) Where am I”, “Current Location”

Cancels the immediately precedent voice

operation, and returns to the previous voice input

wait mode.

“Back”

Displays the next page of voice command list

displayed on the screen. “Next (page)”

Displays the previous page of voice command list

displayed on the screen. “Previous (page)”

Displays the screen displayed when touching the

[ ] key (Voice Help screen). “(Voice)Help”

“What can I say?”

Operation Command

Turns on the AV features. “Audio On”

Turns off the AV features. “Audio Off”

Switches to the Tuner mode. “Radio”

Switches to the DVD/CD mode. “DVD Player” or “CD Player”

Switches to the Music Catcher mode. “Music catcher”

Switches to the SD Card mode. “SD card player”

Switches to the AUX mode. “AUX”

Switches to the iPod mode. “iPod”

Operation Command

Performs seek tuning. “Seek up/down”

Recalls a preset station. “Preset 1/2/3/4/5/6”

“Preset up/down”

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

General

Power does not turn

on. (No sound is

produced.)

Fuse is blown. Replace with a fuse of the same amperage. If the

fuse blows again, consult your store of purchase.

Incorrect wiring. Consult your store of purchase.

Nothing happens

when buttons are

pressed.

Display is not

accurate.

The microprocessor has

malfunctioned due to

noise, etc.

Turn off the power and open the operation panel.

Press the Reset button with a thin rod.

Note:

•When the Reset button is pressed, the system is

restarted with the Audio feature OFF.

• When the Reset button is pressed, frequencies

of radio stations, titles, etc. audio setting data

stored in memory are cleared.

There are red,

green, or blue points

in the display. —

This is not a failure, but a phenomenon peculiar to

a liquid crystal panel (The liquid crystal panel is

produced according to technology with very high

precision. Note that, though there are effective

pixels of 99.99% or more, pixel missing or

normally lit pixels account for 0.01%.)

DVD Player

Disc cannot be

loaded. Another disc is already

loaded. Eject the disc before loading the new one.

There is a foreign matter

already in place. Eject the foreign matter forcibly.

Sound skips or is

noisy. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc with a soft cloth.

The disc is heavily

scratched or warped. Replace with a disc with no scratches.

Sound is bad directly

after power is turned

on.

Water droplets may form

on the internal lens when

the car is parked in a humid

place.

Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.

The image is not

displayed. The parking brake is not

engaged. Check that the parking brake is engaged.

Disc cannot play with

the display

“PARENTAL

CONTROL

Please change the

parental access

level to playback

the current disc.”

shown.

The view is limited. Release the view limitation or change the parental

level. ➜ “Setting up the parental level” (P. 29)

Reset button

Troubleshooting

76 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

TV Tuner (When the optional TV tuner is connected)

The image is not

displayed. The parking brake is not

engaged. Check that the parking brake is engaged.

The display is dark. The brightness control is

too low. Adjust the brightness properly.

The operating condition is

not good. The temperature inside the vehicle may be 0°C or

lower. Set to an appropriate temperature (25°C or

so) and check it again.

The headlight of the vehicle

is lit. The display is made dark at night to prevent the

glare (When the headlight of the vehicle is lit in the

daytime, the display gets dark).

The colour of the

display is light or a

shade of colour is

not good.

The colour is not adjusted

adequately. Check that Colour and Hue are adjusted properly.

When the VTR is

connected, the

image is disturbed.

Improper NTSC/PAL

setting Set the VTR to output the PAL signals.

When the TV tuner is

connected, the

image gets unclear.

Bad receiving condition A radio wave may not reach sufficiently due to

obstruction of mountains or buildings. Check it

again at a place where a radio wave can be

received properly.

The TV tuner has a

double or triple

image.

Bad receiving condition It may be under the influence of radio wave

reflected by mountains or buildings. Check it again

after changing place or direction.

The TV tuner has

spots or stripes in

the image.

Presence of jamming It may be under the influence from motorcars,

streetcar, power cable, neon sign, and so forth.

Check it again after changing place.

Mobile Phone (When the optional Bluetooth Interface Box is connected)

The mobile phone

cannot be

connected.

The relevant profile is not

selected on the mobile

phone.

When selecting profiles is available, select a

profile with hands-free feature. Otherwise, register

the mobile phone again after deleting it from the

Phone Select screen.

The Interface Box is trying

to restore the connection

with the previous mobile

phone.

Turn off the Automatic Connection function, then

The system does not

operate correctly. There is no response from

the mobile phone. Turn off the power of the mobile phone, then turn

it on again.

Strange noise is

heard from the

speakers.

The remaining battery level

of the mobile phone is low. Charge the battery of the mobile phone.

Problem Cause Remedy

MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Error Messages

If an error display other than the ones described above appears, press the Reset button. If the problem

persists, turn off the power and consult your store of purchase.

• When the Reset button is pressed, frequencies of radio stations, titles, etc. stored in memory are

cleared.

Problem Cause Remedy

DVD Player

MECHANISM

ERROR A disc is caught inside the

DVD player and is not

ejected.

This is a failure of DVD player’s mechanism.

Please consult your store of purchase.

DISC ERROR A disc cannot be played

due to scratches, etc. Replace with a non-scratched, non-warped disc.

A disc is loaded up-side-

down inside the DVD

player and does not play.

Eject the disc then reload it properly.

INCORRECT FILE

FORMAT WMA files not supported by

this unit are played. Perform the operation such as skipping a file.

(Scan, repeat and random playback mode may be

cancelled.)

SD Card

ACCESS ERROR

Memory Card

access failed

The SD card is not set

correctly. Set the SD card again.

The SD card is not

recognised. Set another SD card.

Hard Disk Drive

HIGH TEMP

ERROR

Please wait until the

temperature

becomes normal

The HDD cannot be

accessed because the

temperature in the vehicle

is extremely high.

Please wait until the temperature becomes

appropriate.

LOW TEMP ERROR

Please wait until the

temperature

becomes normal

The HDD cannot be

accessed because the

temperature in the vehicle

is extremely low.

Please wait until the temperature becomes

appropriate.

HDD ACCESS

ERROR

Please consult a

dealer

The HDD cannot be

accessed.

The sectors or clusters of

the HDD may be damaged.

Please consult your nearest dealer.

78 MAX983HD

English Owner’s manual

Specification

GPS aerial

Mode: Microstrip flat aerial

Dimension: 30.4 (W) u 11.7 (H) u 35.5 (D) mm

Impedance: 50 Ohm

Navigation System

GPS receiving frequency: 1575.42 MHz, C/A

Code

Sensibility: –130 dBm or better

Number of GPS channels: 15 channels

FM Tuner

Frequency Range: 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

Usable Sensitivity: 9 dBf

50dB Quieting Sensitivity: 15 dBf

Alternate Channel Selectivity: 70 dB

Stereo Separation (1 kHz): 32 dB

Frequency Response (r3 dB): 30 Hz to 15 kHz

AM Tuner

Frequency Range:

MW: 531 kHz to 1602 kHz

LW: 153 kHz to 279 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: 28 dBPV

DVD Player

System: Digital Versatile Disc System with CDDA

capable

Usable discs: DVD video disc, Compact disc

Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (CD)

(+1 dB/–2 dB)

Signal to Noise Ratio: 80 dB (1 kHz)

Dynamic Range: 80 dB (1 kHz)

Distortion: 0.05%

Audio Amplifier

Maximum power output: 200 W (50 W u 4)

Output Power: 4 u 31 W

(DIN 45324, +B = 14.4 V)

Speaker impedance: 4 : (4 to 8 : allowable)

Input

Audio input:

130 r60mVrms

(input impedance 10 k: or more)

Video input: 1.0 ±0.2 Vp-p

(input impedance 75 :)

Video Output

Video output: 1.0 r0.2 Vp-p

(output impedance 75 :)

LCD Monitor

Screen Size: 7-inch wide type

156.2 mm Width u 82.3 mm Height

Display method: Transmission type TN liquid

crystal display

Drive method: TFT (thin-film transistor) active

matrix driving

Pixels: 336,960 (480 u 3 (RGB) u 234)

General

Power source voltage: 14.4 V DC

(10.8 to 15.6 V allowable)

Earth: Negative

Current consumption: 4.3 A (1 W)

Auto Antenna Rated Current: 500 mA less

Dimensions of the Main Unit: 178 mm Width u

100 mm Height u 162 mm Depth

Weight of the Main Unit: 3.0 kg

Note:

•Specifications comply with JEITA Standards.

•Specifications and design are subject to change

without notice for further improvement.

171 mm

178 mm

25mm 162mm

100 mm

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Safety Precautions

Before use

Notes on the place to install to

CAUTION

•Do not install the system in the locations

described below. This may cause a fire,

accident or electrical shock:

• A location exposed to rain or dust.

• A location interfering with the driver's visual

range or operation of the vehicle.

• An unstable location, or where the system

may fall.

•Do not install this unit in a place exposed to

direct sunlight or heat, or a place where the

vent holes or heat radiation holes are

covered.

•When you install the antenna, mount it in a

place where the elements of the antenna do

not protrude beyond the edge of the front,

back, left and right of the vehicle. If it comes

in contact with pedestrians, it may cause an

accident.

Installation notes

CAUTION

•Use only the supplied parts. If unspecified

parts are used, they may cause damage.

•Any holes made in the body of the vehicle

should be sealed with a silicon adhesive. If

exhaust fumes or water penetrates into the

vehicle, this may cause an accident.

•Fasten the bolts securely when installing

the unit. If the bolts are loose, an accident

or malfunction may occur.

WARNING

•Confirm the battery voltage of the vehicle

to be installed. This unit is designed only

for vehicles with DC 12V power supply.

•Disconnect the negative terminal of the

battery before connecting wires,

otherwise an electric shock, injury by

short circuit may occur.

WARNING

•When installing the unit to a vehicle with

an airbag system, never install it in a

place where it may interfere with the

operation of the airbag.

•Do not install this unit in the following

locations:

• A location interfering with the driver's

visual range or operation.

• A location where the gear lever or brake

pedal operation is hindered.

• A location where passengers are at risk.

• An unstable location, or where the

system may fall.

Car battery

WARNING

•Please note the position of pipes, tanks

and electrical wirings before installing

the unit into the vehicle. Failure in

avoiding these may cause a fire or

malfunction.

Safety Precautions

80 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Wire connection notes

CAUTION

•Connect cables appropriately. If a wrong

connection is made, this may cause a fire or

accident.

•When passing cables through the body of

the vehicle, use non-conductive grommets.

•If the coatings of the cables are worn out by

rubbing, this may cause an accident, fire or

a short circuit.

•After wiring cables, fix them with insulation

tape.

•Be sure to switch off the vehicle when

connecting or disconnecting cables to/from

the unit, otherwise an electric shock, injury

or accident may occur.

WARNING

•Loom all cables according to the

instruction manual so as not to hinder

operation.

•Wire the connecting cables away from

high temperature areas. If the coatings of

the cables melt, it may cause an accident/

fire by a short circuit. Take care when

wiring in the engine compartment.

•When wiring the connecting cables in a

vehicle with an airbag system, never feed

the cables through a place where it may

interfere with the operation of the airbag.

If the airbag not operating correctly in an

emergency, it may cause increased

injury.

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Package Contents

1Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2GPS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3Power supply lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

4Vehicle signal lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5RCA pin lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

6Microphone for voice control . . . . . . . . . . 1

7Microphone extension lead . . . . . . . . . . . 1

8Accessory bag (No. 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

9Accessory bag (No. 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

0Owner’s Manual (this book) . . . . . . . . . . . 1

!Navigation System Operation Manual . . . 1

@Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Contents in the Accessory Bag (No. 1) 8

1. Flat head screw (M5 u 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2. Sems hexagonal screw (M5 u 8). . . . . . . . 8

3. Electro tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4. Electro tap for speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . 1

5. Double-sided tape for fastening

antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

6. Lead holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

7. Double-sided tape for microphone . . . . . 1

Contents in the Accessory Bag (No. 2) 9

8. Rubber cap for RCA pin lead . . . . . . . . . . 6

1345

68 97 0!@

45 7

82 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Installing the Main Unit

Cautions on Installation

1. Prepare all parts necessary for installing the

main unit before starting.

2. This model features an operation panel that

slides forward. On some types of cars, the

operation panel may make contact with the

dashboard or gear lever, in which cause it

cannot be installed.

Before installing, check that the unit will not

hamper operation of the gear lever or obstruct

your view before selecting the installation

location.

3. Install the main unit within 30° of the

horizontal plane.

4. If you have to do any modification on the car

body, such as drilling holes, consult your car

dealer beforehand.

5. Use the included screws for installation. Using

other screws may cause damage.

6. This unit has a fan motor in the back of the

main unit. When the fan motor vent is covered

with leads or mounting bracket, it may cause

a malfunction. Be sure not to cover it when

wiring leads.

Dashboard

Gear lever

(check that it does not

touch the operation panel.)

Max. 30°

Max. 8 mm (M5 screw)

Chassis

Damage

Chassis

Fan motor vent

Installing the Main Unit

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Installing the Main Unit

This unit is designed for fixed installation in the dashboard.

1. When installing the main unit in NISSAN vehicles, use the parts attached to this unit.

When installing the main unit in TOYOTA vehicles, use the parts attached to the vehicle.

2. Wire as shown in the section “Wire Connection”.

3. Reassemble and secure the unit in the dashboard and set the face panel and centre panel.

Installing the main unit in a NISSAN Vehicle

Mounting Screw Holes (Side View of the Main Unit)

For NISSAN vehicle For TOYOTA vehicle

Main Unit 6-Spacer (thickness: 1 mm)

6-Flat head screw

(M5 u 8)

(attached to the main unit)

Mounting bracket

(1 pair for the left and right sides)

Installing the Main Unit

84 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Installing the main unit in a TOYOTA Vehicle

Install by using parts attached to the vehicle. (Screws marked ★ are attached to the vehicle.)

Note:

*1: Some panel openings are too small for the unit

depending on the vehicle type and model. In

such a case, trim the upper and lower sides of the

panel frame by about 0.5 to 1.5 mm so the unit

can be inserted smoothly.

*2: If a hook on the installation bracket interferes

with the unit, bend and flatten it with a nipper or

similar tool.

Vehicles other than NISSAN and TOYOTA

In some cases the centre panel may require modification. (Trimming, filing, etc.)

Removing the main unit

When the main unit is to be removed, disassemble it in the reverse of the order listed in this section.

Mounting bracket

(1 pair for the left

and right sides)

8–Hexagonal screw

(M5 u 8)

Centre Panel

(* 1)

Main Unit

(* 2)

Affix the screws to the ● marks.

Example 1

Typical Mounting Brackets

Example 2 Example 3

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Installing the GPS Antenna

Note:

•The supplied GPS antenna is for installing inside the vehicle. Do not install it outside the vehicle.

•Install the GPS antenna more than 50 cm away from the main unit, other audio devices such as CD player,

and a radar detector. If it is installed near these devices, GPS reception may be impaired.

•It is recommended that the GPS antenna is sited towards the centre of the road where GPS signal interruption

is minimised.

•To improve the GPS signal reception, install the GPS antenna horizontally on a flat plane.

•Do not wax or paint the cover of the GPS antenna. This may reduce the performance of the GPS antenna.

•Install the GPS antenna at least 10 cm away from the windshield.

•Wipe off the dirt of the mounting surface before installing the GPS antenna.

1. Stick the double-sided tape to the bottom face of the GPS antenna.

2. Mount the GPS antenna.

Stick it surely on a flat plane of the dashboard towards the centre of the road where GPS signal

interruption is minimised.

3. Wire the GPS antenna lead.

Fasten the lead using the lead holders.

(Shows an example in case of the left-hand traffic.)

WARNING

•Do not install the GPS antenna in a place where it may interfere with the operation of the

airbag hinder the driver’s visual range.

•Do not use this system with the GPS antenna lead cut off. The power cables in the lead may

be short-circuited.

Double-sided

tape

Bottom face of the GPS antenna

GPS antenna

Stick it on a horizontal place of

the dashboard towards the

centre of the road.

Lead holder

86 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Installing the Microphone for Voice Control

Note:

•Wipe off the dirt of the mounting surface before installing the microphone.

1. Stick the double-sided tape to the bottom face of the microphone.

2. Attach the microphone on a flat surface of the steering column or dashboard close to the driver.

3. Turn the microphone towards the mouth of the person who operates the system.

4. Connect the microphone extension lead to the microphone as required.

5. Fasten the lead using the lead holders.

Connecting the Speed Sensor

Note:

•Take care when connecting to the EC (Engine Control Computer) vehicle speed signal line.

1. Confirm the position of the EC (Engine Control Computer) and the vehicle speed signal line referring

to your car make/model.

2. Remove the vehicle parts, and confirm the position of the vehicle speed signal line of the EC.

3. Connect the vehicle speed signal line and the speed sensor connection lead of the vehicle signal lead

of this unit using the electro-tap for speed sensor.

4. Connect the negative terminal of the battery and start the engine.

Drive the vehicle slowly and check that the signals are proportional to the vehicle speed and are

correctly detected by displaying the connection check screen (see the “Navigation System Check”

section of the Navigation Manual).

6 Microphone for voice control

6. Lead holders

7. Double-sided tape for microphone

Engine control computer (EC)

EC vehicle speed signal cable

Vehicle speed harness

4. Electro-tap for speed sensor

Speed sensor connection lead

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Wire Connection

Note:

•For the optional devices, use the RCA pin cable and other connector cables sold separately.

WARNING

•Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before connecting wires, otherwise an

electric shock, injury by short circuit may occur.

•Be sure to read the section "Wire Connection Notes" before installation or connection

operations.

Microphone

for voice

control

iPod

connector

cable

Speed sensor lead

Connect to the EC (Engine Control Computer)

vehicle speed signal line.

Parking brake signal lead

Connect to the parking brake signal line.

Reverse gear signal lead

Connect to the + terminal for the reverse gear

lamp that is only fed when the transmission is

put in reverse.

Vehicle signal lead

GPS antenna

CeNET terminal

IR remote controller sensor

RCA pin

lead

Refer to the following figure.

Audio

input for

AUX

Video output for rear monitor

Video input for TV tuner/AUX

Audio output for rear monitor

TV tuner

VTR etc.

Rear

monitor

CCD camera terminal

RDS-TMC antenna terminal

Power supply

lead

Pink

Grass-green

Purple/White

CeNET cable

Wire Connection

88 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Power supply lead

Note:

*1: In certain vehicles - Volkswagen/Opel/Vauxhall - it is necessary to exchange the accessory <Red> and the

main power <Yellow> connection, to avoid overload and loss of memory.

Notes on installing the RDS-TMC antenna

• For vehicles that do not allow radio wave penetration such as heat reflection glass, heat insulation

glass or radio wave interception glass, the receiver sensitivity may decrease. For details, speak to the

dealer where you purchased the unit.

• The receiver sensitivity may weaken by interference from other antennas within the vehicle, therefore

try to install it away from other antennas.

• To prevent noise, wire the antenna cable separately from the power supply lead, speaker leads and

the other cables of the vehicle.

B-1 B-6

B-5

B-7

B-8

B-4

B-3

B-2

A-4

A-6

A-8

A-7

A-5

∗1

10A No. Description

REAR RIGHT+

REAR RIGHT-

FRONT RIGHT+

FRONT RIGHT-

FRONT LEFT+

FRONT LEFT-

REAR LEFT+

REAR LEFT-

+12 V MAIN POWER (∗1)

TUNER +B

ILLUMINATION

+12 V ACCESSORY (∗1)

EARTH

ISO CONNECTOR

Spare terminal (Yellow)

Wire Connection

MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Connecting to the CCD camera for vehicle

Connect the CCD camera for vehicle to the CCD camera terminal on the main unit. For detailed

information, refer to the instruction sheet or manual for the CCD camera.

Note:

• A power supply box (sold separately) is required for connection of the main unit and the CCD camera.

• The power supply box for the camera CAA185 cannot be used. Please use the CAA188 instead.

Notes on wire connection

When connecting the plugs and sleeves, be sure to insert the plug until it locks securely. After completing

connections, fasten the leads using lead clamps and tapes.

Connecting the reverse gear or parking brake signal lead

Connect each signal lead using the supplied electro-taps.

1. Place the lead from this unit at the stopper, and fold it back in the direction of the arrow.

2. Pass the vehicle signal lead through, and fold it back in the direction of the arrow.

Note:

•After connecting the parking brake signal lead, pull the parking brake and check that the line falls to ground.

•For your safety, some functions will not operate unless the parking brake signal lead is connected correctly.

Female

Sleeve

If the male knob is in the shape shown at A,

cut the female sleeve about 5 mm.

Tape

Clamp

Male

Cut 5 mm.

Coupler connected to other equipment

From this unit

3. Electro-tap

Power supply lead from this unit

Vehicle and main unit signal lead

Stopper

Wire Connection

90 MAX983HD

English

INSTALLATION AND WIRE

CONNECTION MANUAL

Example of relay usage

Use a special installation kit (relay lead kit), sold separately, prepared specifically for your model. For

applicable models, consult the dealer where you purchased this unit.

Note:

•When connecting the main power supply lead (yellow) of the main unit, connect it to a spare terminal of this

unit.

Replacing the fuse

If the fuse should blow, check to see if the wiring is correct. If a fuse is blown, replace it with a new one

of the same amperage rating as the original (10A FUSE).

To replace the fuse, remove the old fuse of the power supply lead and insert the new one.

Note:

•There are various types of fuse holder. Do not let the battery side touch other metal parts.

CAUTION

•After the connection, fix the lead by a clamp or insulation tape for protection.

Vehicle coupler

(Yellow)

Relay lead (Sold separately)

Conforms to EIAJ standard (CP2501)

Ground lead from this unit Tighten with the vehicle side screw and fasten

securely to the vehicle metal part.

To main unit

(Yellow)

Fuse

(10A FUSE)

Fuse holder

Owner’s manual (Audio, Visual, General & Installation)

Mode d’emploi (Audio, vidéo, fonctionnement général et installation)

Benutzerhandbuch (Lyd visuel, generelt og installation)

Manuale dell’utente (Audio, video, generali e installazione)

Gebruikershandleiding (Audio, visueel, algemeen en installatie)

Guía de usuario (Imagen, sonido, general e instalación)

Ägarhandbok (Ljud, Sikt, Allmänt & Installation)

Manual do utilizador (Áudio, Visual, Geral e Instalação)

Brugervejledning (Audio, Video, Allgemein und Installation)

HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD

HDD-NAVIGATIESYSTEEM

SISTEMA DE NAVEGACIÓN HDD

NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED HÅRDDISK

SISTEMA DE NAVEGAÇÃO COM HDD

(UNIDADE DE DISCO RÍGIDO)

HDD-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM

QY-5003E-B

2008/5(Y-YI)

MAX983HD

Clarion Co., Ltd.

Printed in Hungary / Imprimé en Hongrie / Gedruckt in Ungarn /

Stampato in Ungheria / Gedrukt in Hongrarije / Impreso en Hungría /

Tryckt i Ungern / Impresso na Hungria / Trykt i Ungarn

Clarion Max983Hd Users Manual NAVI ENG

MAX983HD MAX983HD-NAVI-ENG,13

MAX983HD to the manual a8809d4d-5e69-4e3e-9d05-88d3dbf230e0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation